:     ' 


JAN  18  1918 


BS  2825  .G64  1914 
Gordon,  S.  D.  1859-1936 
Quiet  talks  about  the 
crowned  Christ 


/^ 


JAN  k^  ^iii3 


QUIET  TALKS 

ABOUT 

The  Crowned  Christ 


S.    D.    GORDON 

Author  of 

'  Quiet  Talks  on  Power, "  "  Quiet  Talks  on  Prayer, " 
''Quiet  Talks  about  Our  Lord' s  Return'' 


NEW  YORK       CHICAGO        TORONTO 

FLEMING    H.  REVELL   COMPANY 

LONDON       AND       EDINBURGH 


Copyright,  1914,  by 
FLEMING  H.  REVELL  COMPANY 


New  York:  158  Fifth  Avenue 
Chicago:  17  N.  Wabash  Ave. 
Toronto:  25  Richmond  St.,  W. 
London:  21  Paternoster  Square 
Edinburgh:  zoo  Princes  Street 


PREFACE 

Crowning  the  Christ  is  an  intensely  practical 
thing,  whether  taken  in  the  personal  sense  or  the 
world  sense.  He  has  been  crowned  in  the  upper 
world.  With  wondrous  patience  and  gracious- 
ness  He  pleads  for  the  personal  crowning  in  our 
lives.  Some  day — no  one  knows  just  when — 
He  will  begin  to  act  as  the  crowned  Christ  in  all 
the  affairs  of  our  earth. 

The  initiative  of  all  action  to-day  on  the  earth 
is  in  man's  hands.  Some  day  the  initiative  of 
governing  action  on  the  earth  will  be  in  the  hands 
of  the  crowned  Christ,  even  while  the  personal 
initiative  of  each  man's  life  will  still  be  in  his  own 
hands. 

God  is  intensely  practical.  Jesus  was  never 
concerned  about  speculation  nor  mere  discussion ; 
He  was  too  intent  on  helping  people.  The  Bible 
is  wholly  a  practical  book.  It  is  concerned  only 
with  helping  us.  It  does  not  tell  us  all  the  truth 
there  is;  we  shall  be  constantly  learning  more 
in  the  future  life.  But  it  does  tell  us  all  we  need 
to  know  now.  And  its  purpose  in  telling  us  what 
it  does  is  wholly  practical, — to  urge  us  to  right 
choice,  and  to  lives  that  square  with  the  choice. 
This  is  the  purpose  that  decided  just  what  truth 
should  be  told  in  the  Book. 


6  Preface 

There  is  one  book  of  the  sixty-six  devoted 
wholly  to  this  subject  of  the  crowned  Christ, — 
"  The  Revelation  of  John."  Every  one  of  these 
books  touches  Him  at  some  angle,  and  finds  its 
deepest  meaning  in  what  He  was  to  do  and  did 
do,  and  yields  up  its  secrets  only  under  the  touch 
of  His  hand.  But  this  book,  the  closing  and  cli- 
max of  all,  the  knot  in  the  end  of  the  inspired 
thread,  this  deals  wholly  with  the  action  of  the 
crowned  Christ. 

No  book  of  the  sixty-six  has  seemed  so  much 
like  a  riddle  and  set  so  many  a-guessing.  And 
without  doubt  much  of  its  meaning  will  be  clear 
only  as  events  work  themselves  out.  Events  will 
prove  the  only  expositor  of  much.  But  it  is  with 
the  deep  conviction  that  this  is  wholly  a  practical 
book,  written  wholly  from  a  practical  point  of 
view,  and  concerned  wholly  with  our  practical 
daily  lives,  that  I  have  ventured  to  take  it  up  in 
this  series  of  simple,  wholly  practical,  Quiet 
Talks.  And  it  is  only  this  side  of  its  teachings 
that  will  be  dealt  with  here.  The  Book  is  a  street 
leading  into  the  true  overcoming  life  the  Master 
would  woo  us  to. 

It  is  only  after  many  years'  study  of  this  Book 
of  the  Revelation,  and  a  special  study  the  past 
three  years  and  a  little  more,  that  I  have  ventured 
to  put  these  talks  together.  And  now  they  are 
sent  out  with  the  earnest  humble  prayer  that 
others  may  find  some  little  practical  help  in 
prayerfully  reading,  as  I  have  found  much  in 
prayerfully  studying,  under  the  Master's  gracious 
faithful  touch. 


CONTENTS 

I.    The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact  ...  9 

II.    The  Crown  Book 39 

III.  A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ    .     .  ,  .  63 

IV.  A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ  .  97 

V.    An    Advance   Step   in   the   Royal    Pro- 
gramme        127 

VI.    A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm  .     .  151 

VII.    The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning      .     .     .  215 

VIII.    Watching  the  Horizon 235 


I.— THE  CHRIST  CROWNED, 
THE  FACT 


"  When  God  sought  a  King  for  His  people  of  old, 
He  went  to  the  fields  to  find  him; 
A  shepherd  was  he,  with  his  crook  and  his  lute 
And  a  following  flock  behind  him. 

"  0  love  of  the  sheep,  O  joy  of  the  lute, 
And  the  sling  and  the  stone  for  battle; 
A  shepherd  was  King,  the  giant  was  naught, 
And  the  enemy  driven  like  cattle. 

"  When  God  looked  to  tell  of  His  good  will  to  men, 
And  the  Shepherd-King's  son  whom  He  gave  them; 
To  shepherds,  made  meek  a-caring  for  sheep, 
He  told  of  a  Christ  sent  to  save  them. 

"  O  love  of  the  sheep,  O  watch  in  the  night. 
And  the  glory,  the  message,  the  choir ; 
*Twas  shepherds  who  saw  their  King  in  the  straw, 
And  returned  with  their  hearts  all  on  fire. 

"  When  Christ  thought  to  tell  of  His  love  to  the  world 
He  said  to  the  throng  before  him, 
'The  Good  Shepherd  giveth  His  life  for  the  sheep — * 
And  away  to  the  cross  they  bore  Him. 

"O  love  of  the  sheep,  O  blood  sweat  of  prayer, 
O  man  on  the  cross,  God-forsaken ; 
A  shepherd  has  gone  to  defend  all  alone 
The  sheepfold  by  death  overtaken. 

"  When  God  sought  a  King  for  His  people,  for  aye, 
He  went  to  the  grave  to  find  him; 
And  a  shepherd  came  back.  Death  dead  in  His  grasp, 
And  a  following  flock  behind  Him. 

"O  love  of  the  sheep,  O  life  from  the  dead, 
O  strength  of  the  faint  and  the  fearing; 
A  shepherd  is  King,  and  His  Kingdom  will  come. 
And  the  day  of  His  coming  is  nearing."  * 

^  Joseph  Addison  Richards. 


THE  CHRIST  CROWNED,  THE 
FACT 

His  Coronation  Gift. 

Christ  is  crowned.  Not  in  any  vague  far- 
fetched meaning,  but  in  the  plain  common-sense 
meaning  of  the  word,  He  is  crowned. 

For  crowned  means  put  in  the  place  of  highest 
power,  with  full  right  to  exercise  that  power  at 
will.  And  when  the  crucified  Jesus  went  up  that 
Olivet  day,  before  the  astonished  eyes  of  the  dis- 
ciples, into  the  sightless  blue,  on  the  cloud.  He 
was  received  in  the  upper  world  by  the  Father. 
And  He  was  lifted  up  into  the  place  of  highest 
honour  and  greatest  power.  He  sat  down  at  the 
right  hand  of  the  Father.^ 

He  had  said  it  would  be  so.  Breathing  the  air 
thick  with  bitter  hate  on  the  night  of  His  trial, 
He  had  quietly  said  to  the  Jewish  rulers  that 
even  so  it  would  be,  bringing  at  once  about  His 
person  the  bursting  of  the  storm  of  hate.^  Now 
His  unfaltering  trust  in  His  Father  has  its  sweet 
reward. 

The  Holy  Spirit  poured  out  on  Pentecost,  the 
birthday   of   the  Church,   was  the  gift  of  the 

*  Mark  xvi.  19. 

'  Matthew  xxvi.  64. 

IX 


12  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

crowned  Christ.  The  rushing  sound  as  of  a  mighty 
wind  that  filled  all  the  house,  the  tongues  of  flame 
plainly  seen,  the  bold  talking  to  the  crowds  of 
foreign  Jews  of  God's  mighty  power,  the  faith- 
ful witnessing  about  the  crucified  Jesus  in  the 
city  that  hounded  Him  to  death,  the  convinced 
crowds  openly  declaring  at  the  peril  of  their  lives 
their  belief  in  the  despised  Jesus,  the  strangely 
rare  unselfishness  even  in  money  matters,  and 
the  winsome  graciousness  of  spirit  that  marked, 
not  only  the  inner  circle,  but  these  greatly 
increased  crowds, — all  this  said  one  thing  in 
clear  unanswerable  tones  of  unmistakable  power, 
Christ  is  crowned,^  For  the  sending  down 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  was  the  act  of  the  crowned 
Christ. 

And  every  touch  of  the  Holy  Spirit's  presence 
within  trusting  hearts, — the  sweet  peace,  the  quiet 
assurance,  the  longing  for  purity,  the  drawing 
away  to  prayer,  the  hunger  for  God's  Word, 
the  intense  desire  to  have  others  saved,  the  pas- 
sion to  please  this  wondrous  God  of  ours, — all 
these  simple  marks  of  the  Holy  Spirit's  presence 
in  our  hearts,  all  tell  us,  and  each  tells  us,  in 
unmistakable  tones,  that  Christ  is  crowned.  For 
this  wondrous  Spirit  within  is  the  gift  of  the 
crowned  Christ. 

When  Jesus  went  up  from  the  earth,  holding 
as  His  sure  captive  the  captivity  of  suffering 
and  death  to  which  He  had  with  such  great 
strength  yielded,  He  received  gifts,  coronation 
gifts.    The  Father  gave  Him  all.    He  gave  Him 

*  Acts  ii.  33;  iii.  13-16;  v.  31-32;  vii.  55,  56. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       13 

the  disposal  and  control  of  all.     This  was  the 
crowning. 

And  in  His  great  out-reaching  love  Christ  re- 
ceived these  gifts  on  behalf  of  men,  His  blood 
brothers.  And  at  once  He  gave  to  men,  to  His 
trusting  disciples,  the  all-inclusive  gift,  the  Holy 
Spirit,  His  coronation  gift.^  So  God  came  anew 
to  dwell  with  men  as  originally  planned. 

This  blessed  Presence  within  tells  me,  by  His 
mere  presence,  that  Christ  is  crowned. 

The  writers  of  the  New  Testament  make  a 
chorus  of  sweet  music  on  this  chord,  ringing 
out  in  clear  tones  the  full  notes  of  delight  and 
joy.  Luke's  simple  narrative  sounds  the  note 
four  times.  Paul  swells  it  out  with  a  joyous  ful- 
ness that  grows  in  volume  and  intensity  as  his 
narrowing  prison  walls  shut  out  more  and  more 
the  lower  lights,  and  centres  his  upward  gaze 
upon  Jesus,  "  far  above  all  rule,  and  authority, 
and  power,  and  dominion,  and  every  name  that 
is  named,"  with  "  all  things  in  subjection  under 
His  feet."  ^  John's  special  companion  and  work- 
ing partner,  Peter,  makes  this  note  blend  with  and 
dominate  the  minor  chord  of  suffering  for 
Christ 's  sake.' 

The  Christian  Hebrew  who  wrote  so  eloquently 
to  his  fellow-countrymen  of  the  immense  superi- 
ority of  Jesus  and  so  modestly  withheld  his  own 
name,  strikes  this  note  five  times  with  strong, 

*  Psalm  Ixviii.   i8 ;  Ephesians  iv.  8 ;  Acts  ii.  33. 

'  Romans  viii.  34 ;  Ephesians  i.  20-22 ;  Philippians  ii. 
9-1 1;  Colossians  iii.  I. 

•  I   Peter  iii.  22. 


14  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

clear  touch.^  He  quotes  that  Eighth  Psalm, 
which  so  wonderfully  gives  God's  own  ideal  for 
man's  mastery  over  all  creation.  And  then  he 
tells  us  that  in  Jesus  the  ideal  will  yet  be  fully 
realized.  And  that  while  the  whole  plan  has  not 
yet  fully  worked  out  as  it  will,  yet  even  now  we 
see  the  Jesus  who  tasted  death  for  every  one, 
crowned  with  glory  and  honour  as  part  of  the 
plan  which  He  carried  out  in  suffering  the  ex- 
treme suffering  of  death. 

And  our  Lord  Jesus  Himself,  talking  out  of 
the  glory  to  the  man  who  was  His  bosom  com- 
panion on  earth,  reserves  as  His  last  tender  plea 
to  us  to  live  the  overcoming  life  this — ''  he  that 
overcometh  I  will  give  him  to  sit  down  with  me 
in  my  throne  as  I  also  overcame  and  sat 
down  with  my  Father  on  His  throne."  ^ 

And  so  we  find  out  just  what  this  word 
crowned  means.  Jesus  was  received  in  the  upper 
world,  exalted,  glorified,  made  to  sit  down  at  the 
Father's  right  hand,  put  far  above  all  rule  and 
authority,  with  a  name  greater  in  the  sweep  of 
its  power  than  any  other,  and  with  all  things 
put  in  absolute  subjection  under  His  feet.  This 
is  the  simple,  direct  meaning  of  the  sentence — 
Christ  is  crowned. 

What  a  contrast  the  two  faces  of  that  glory 
cloud  saw !  The  face  looking  down,  and  the  face 
looking  up!  The  one — the  downward  face — 
looked  upon  a  cross,  a  Man  hanging  there  with 
a  mocking  crown  of  thorns  without  and  a  break- 

*  Hebrews  i.  3;  ii.  8-9;  viii.  I ;  x.  12;  xii.  2. 
'  Revelation  iii.  21. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact        15 

ing  heart  within,  scowHng  priests,  jeering  crowds, 
deserting  disciples,  sneering  soldiers,  weeping 
women,  heart-broken  friends,  a  horror  of  dark- 
ness, a  cave-tomb  under  imperial  seal,  and  black- 
est night  settling  down  over  all. 

The  other — the  upward  face — looked  upon  a 
great  burst  of  the  upper  glory,  the  countless 
angels  singing  swelling  songs  of  worship,  the 
wondrous  winged  cherubim,  the  redeemed  hosts 
from  Eden  days  on  reverently  bowing  and  ex- 
ultantly singing,  the  exquisitely  soft-green-rain- 
bow-circled throne,  the  Father's  face,  once  hid- 
den, but  to  be  hidden  now  never  again,  the  shared 
seat  on  the  Father's  throne, — what  a  contrast ! 

Here  crucified — there  crowned.  Crucified  on 
earth,  one  of  the  smaller  globes  of  the  universe. 
On  the  throne  of  the  whole  universe  of  globes — 
crowned !  From  the  lowest  depth  to  the  one  ex- 
treme height.  From  hate's  worst  to  Love's  best. 
From  love  poured  out  for  men  to  love  enthroned 
for  those  same  men;  love  triumphant  each  time, 
on  cross  and  on  throne.  What  a  contrast !  What 
a  coronation!  What  a  welcome  home  to  a 
throne ! 


The  Music  of  a  Name. 

It  is  most  intensely  interesting  to  recall  that, 
of  course,  this  is  just  what  the  very  word  Christ 
means, — the  Crowned  One.  We  sometimes  get 
so  used  to  a  word  that  it  is  easy  to  forget  its 
real  meaning.  The  word  Christ  has  been  used  so 
generally  for  so  many  centuries  as  a  name  that 


1 6  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

we  forget  that  originally  it  was  a  title,  and  not  a 
name. 

And  it  still  is  a  title,  though  used  chiefly  as  a 
name.  Some  day  the  title-meaning  will  overlap 
the  name-meaning.  We  may  never  cease  think- 
ing of  it  as  a  name,  but  there  is  a  time  coming 
when  events  will  make  the  title-meaning  so  big 
as  to  clear  over-shadow  our  thought  and  use  of  it 
as  a  name. 

It  helps  to  recall  the  distinctive  meaning  of 
the  words  we  use  for  Him  who  walked  amongst, 
and  was  one  of  us.  Jesus  is  His  name.  It  be- 
longs to  the  man.  It  belongs  peculiarly  to  the 
thirty-three  years  and  a  bit  more  that  He  was 
here,  even  though  not  exclusively  used  in  that 
way  in  the  Book. 

There's  a  rare  threefold  sweetness  of  mean- 
ing in  that  five-lettered  name.  There  is  the 
meaning  of  the  old  word  lying  within  the 
name,  before  it  became  a  name,  victory,  victor, 
saviour-victor,  Jehovah-victor.  There  is  the 
swing  and  rhythm  and  murmur  of  music,  glad 
joyous  music,  in  its  very  beginnings  as  a  com- 
mon word. 

Then  it  has  come  to  stand  wholly  for  a  per- 
sonality, the  rarely  gentle,  winsome,  strong 
personality  of  the  Man  of  Bethlehem  and  Naza- 
reth, and  of  those  crowded  service-days.  And 
every  memory  of  His  personality  sweetens  and 
enriches  the  music  in  the  old  word. 

And  then  the  deepest  significance,  the  richest 
rhythm,  the  sweetest  melody,  come  from  the 
meaning  His  experiences,  His  life,  pressed  into 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       17 

it.  The  sympathy,  the  suffering,  the  wilder- 
ness, the  Cross,  the  Resurrection,  all  the  experi- 
ences He  went  through,  these  give  to  this  victory- 
word,  Jesus,  a  meaning  unknown  before.  They 
put  the  name  Jesus  actually  above  every  name 
in  the  experiences  of  tense  conflict  and  sweeping 
victory  it  stands  for.  This  threefold  chording 
makes  music  never  to  be  broken  nor  forgotten. 

"There  is  no  name  so  sweet  on  earth, 
No  name  so  sweet  in  heaven, 
The  name  before  His  wondrous  birth, 
To  Christ  the  Saviour  given." 

Lord  is  a  title,  of  course.  It  was  used  of  one 
who  was  a  proprietor,  an  owner,  or  a  master.  It 
was  commonly  used  as  a  title  of  honour  for  one 
in  superior  position,  as  a  leader  or  teacher.  In 
speaking  of  Jesus  it  is  coupled  with  the  title 
Christ  as  an  interchangeable  word,^  as  well  as 
an  additional  title.  But  peculiarly  it  is  the  per- 
sonal title  given  Jesus  by  one  who  takes  Him 
as  his  own  personal  Master,^  while  it  still  retains 
its  broader  meaning. 

But  Christ  is  peculiarly  the  official  title  of 
Jesus.  There  is  only  one  Christ.  Lord  is  used 
of  men.  It  is  used  of  both  the  Father  and  the 
Holy  Spirit,  as  well  as  of  Jesus.  But  the  name 
Christ  is  used  of  only  one  person,  and  can  mean 
only  that  one.    There  could  be  only  one  Christ. 

The  word  or  its  equivalent  was  used  occasion- 
ally in  the  Old  Testament  in  a  narrowed  sense 

*  Acts  ii.  36  •  Romans  x.  9. 


1 8  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

for  the  King  of  Israel,  who  is  reverently  spoken 
of  as  "  the  Lord's  anointed,"  that  is,  God's  Mes- 
siah or  Christ.^ 

But  the  one  common  thought  of  it  among  the 
Hebrew  people,  growing  ever  intenser  as  the  Old 
Testament  period  merges  into  the  time  of  the 
New,  was  that  there  was  one  coming,  the  Mes- 
siah, the  Christ,  God's  chosen,  the  one  anointed 
and  empowered,  to  be  their  Deliverer.  The  one 
question  that  sets  all  hearts  a-flutter  about  the 
rugged  John  of  the  deserts  was  this :  ''  Is  he  the 
Christ?"^  In  their  thought  there  was  only  one 
to  whom  the  title  belonged. 

And  even  so  it  is.  Christ  is  the  official  title 
of  the  One  Chosen  and  anointed  by  God  to  be 
ruler  over  His  Hebrew  people,  and  over  all  the 
race,  and  the  earth,  and  the  universe, — God's 
King,  to  reign  until  all  have  been  brought  into 
full  allegiance  to  the  great  loving  Father.^  The 
Christ  is  the  Crowned  One,  God's  Crowned  One. 
The  very  word  Christ  tells  that  Christ  is 
crowned. 

Our  Great  Kinsman. 

There  is  an  intensely  interesting  question  that 
crowds  its  way  in  here,  and  it  proves  an  im- 
mensely practical  question,  too.  Why  was  Christ 
crowned  ?    We  can  say  at  once  that  this  was  His 

*I  Samuel  xvi.  6;  xxiv.  6,  lo;  II  Samuel  i.  14-16; 
XIX.  21,  and  elsewhere;  Psalm  xviii.  50,  and  frequently 
m  Psahns. 

•John  i.  20,  25;  Luke  iii.  15. 

*  Philippians  ii.  10;  I  Corinthians  xv.  J4-a6. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       19 

due.  He  was  given  that  which  belonged  to  Him 
in  good  right.  He  was  reinstated  in  His  former 
position,  with  all  the  power  and  glory  that  were 
His  before  His  errand  to  the  earth. ^ 

Then  too  this  was  His  vindication  after  the 
shameful  treatment  of  earth.  Before  the  eyes  of 
all  the  upper  world,  both  loyal  and  disloyal  eyes, 
this  man  whom  earth  hounded  so  shamelessly  is 
vindicated ;  He  is  set  right  by  the  Father.^ 

But  there  is  yet  more  than  this.  It  is  a  more  of 
a  sort  that  concerns  us  very  closely,  and  it  sets 
one's  heart  a-beating  a  bit  faster.  This  crowning 
was  part  of  a  plan,  a  plan  of  which  our  earth 
is  the  centre.  It  was  the  second  great  part  of 
a  plan  of  which  the  suffering  and  dying  were  the 
first  great  part.  Both  were  for  the  sake  of  us 
men  and  our  earth-home,  and  the  lower  creation. 

This  is  the  thing  being  emphasized  in  the  sec- 
ond great  paragraph  of  the  Hebrews.^  Man  was 
made  the  under-master  of  the  earth  and  of  the 
lower  creation,  but  lost,  weakly  surrendered,  his 
place  of  mastery.  The  new  Man  came  to  re- 
cover for  man  what  had  been  lost  and  to  realize 
this  original  lost  plan. 

And  so  He  became  our  brother,  sharer  of  our 
flesh  and  blood,  tempted  like  as  we,  perfected 
in  His  human  character  by  the  experiences  He 
went  through,  then  tasted  to  the  bitter  dregs  the 
death  that  belongs  to  our  sin.    And  then  foUow- 

*John  xvii.  5;  i.  1-3;  Colossians  i.  I5-I7- 
'  Matthew  xxvi.  64;  Acts  ii.  22-24,  32-36;  Philippians 
ii.  9-1 1 ;  Hebrews  ii.  9. 
'  Hebrews  ii.  5-18. 


20  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

ing  that,  He  was  crowned  with  glory  and  hon- 
our. And  so  He  rises  to  the  place  of  mastery 
over  all  that  belongs  to  perfect  man.  So  He 
brings  all  creation  into  the  glad  subjection 
which  is  its  natural  happy  state.  It  is  for 
earth's  sake,  for  the  race's  sake,  and  for  the 
sake  of  our  faithful  companions  and  servants, 
the  whole  lower  creation,  that  Christ  has  been 
crowned. 

We  think  more  about  the  personal  meaning  to 
ourselves  of  His  having  died  and  risen  again. 
We  need  to  remember,  too,  this  broader  meaning. 
The  dying  and  rising  secures  our  salvation  per- 
sonally. The  crowning  and  the  reigning  will 
work  out  the  redemption  of  all  nature  and  of  the 
lower  creation,^  and  this  in  turn  will  mean  much 
for  men  living  on  the  earth  in  the  Kingdom  time, 
and  for  the  race  as  a  race. 

This  leads  at  once  to  another  question  that 
presses  in.  What  is  the  domain  of  the  crowned 
Christ?  If  we  take  the  crowning  in  the  com- 
mon meaning  of  that  word,  it  means  that  there 
is  some  domain  that  Christ  rules  over.  What 
is  it  that  He  is  crowned  over  ? 

And  the  answer  is  so  sweeping  as  to  seem 
far-away  and  dreamy  to  us  who  are  living  on  this 
sin-hurt  earth.  He  is  the  crowned  Ruler  of  the 
whole  created  universe  and  all  intelligent  beings 
in  it.  He  has  been  placed  over  absolutely  every 
"  rule  and  authority  and  power  and  dominion, 
and  not  only  in  this  present  age  but  in  the  com- 

*  Romans  vii.  19-22;  Jeremiah  ix.  10;  xii.  4,  11;  xxiii. 
10 ;  Genesis  iii.  17-19;  Acts  iii.  21. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       21 

ing  age."^  There  is  simply  no  limit  in  extent 
to  His  domain.  Everything  has  been  placed  in 
subjection  to  Him  and  is  now  subject  to  His 
word,  and  His  alone. 

There  is  a  striking  passage  in  Philippians  that 
fits  in  here.2  In  speaking  of  the  exaltation  of 
Jesus  Christ,  Paul  is  careful  to  explain  particu- 
larly that  every  knee  would  bow,  in  the  heavens, 
and,  on  the  earth,  and  under  the  earth  or  in  the 
world  below. 

This  threefold  division  is  very  striking.  The 
heaven  things  are  understood  at  once,  and  things 
of  the  earth  sphere.  But  there  is  a  third  world 
to  be  taken  into  account,  that  strange  uncanny 
world  of  evil  spirit  beings  in  rebellion  against 
God's  authority.  It  is  spoken  of  repeatedly  as 
principalities  and  powers,  indicating  numbers  and 
organization,  dignity,  and  power.^  All  of  this  is 
included  in  what  has  been  placed  under  Christ's 
authority.* 

Is  Christ  Reigning  Now? 

But  there  is  still  another  question  that  has  been 
impatiently  pushing  underneath  for  some  time. 
And  it  also  is  an  intensely  practical  one.  Does 
this  mean  that  Christ  is  actually  ruling  now  over 
this  domain  of  His?    How  about  the  affairs  on 

*  Ephesians  i.  20-22 ;  Hebrews  ii.  6-8. 

*  Philippians  ii.  9-1 1. 

*  Ephesians  vi.  12;  Colossians  ii.  15. 

*  Colossians  ii.  10;  Ephesians  iii.  10;  iv.  8-10; 
I  Corinthians  xv.  24. 


22  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

the  earth?  Are  all  things  here  subject  to  Him? 
Is  this  the  way  He  would  have  things  go  ?  And 
some  of  us  think  the  evil  spirits  seem  pretty  free 
in  their  movements.  This  present  order  of  things 
that  we  are  living  in  the  thick  of,  is  this  the  reign 
of  the  crowned  Christ  ?  And  some  of  us  feel  the 
stress  of  things  so  much  that  we  can  scarce  keep 
patient  for  a  thoughtful  poised  answer  to  our 
questions. 

There  are  those,  and  good  earnest  folk  they 
are,  too,  who  tell  us  that  Christ  has  come,  and 
is  constantly  coming,  more  and  more,  into  our 
common  life.  The  higher  ideals  that  are  crowd- 
ing for  expression,  the  more  spiritual  conceptions 
of  man  and  his  brotherly  relations,  the  constant 
striving  toward  better  civilization,  the  bettering  of 
the  condition  of  the  poor  and  less  fortunate,  the 
increased  recognition  of  men's  rights  in  the  com- 
plex industrial  world,  the  increasing  effort  to 
correct  evils  by  legislation,  the  great  moral  re- 
forms that  are  sweeping  aside  the  awful  liquor 
curse,  and  loosening  women's  bonds,  and  safe- 
guarding young  womanhood  and  children,  the 
newer  aggressiveness  in  the  missionary  propa- 
ganda and  in  much  of  the  activity  of  the  Church, 
even  the  attempt  to  humanize  and  civilize  the 
warfare  that  in  itself  is  stupidly  savage  and  ut- 
terly inhuman, — is  not  all  this  a  coming  of  Christ 
and  of  the  Christ-spirit  into  our  common  life? 
many  ask. 

And  there  is  only  one  answer  to  such  ques- 
tions, a  strong  emphatic  "  yes."  It  surely  is  the 
Christ-spirit  that  moves  in  all  of  this.    This  is  a 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       23 

coming  of  Christ;  and  a  blessed  coming,  too. 
There  was  nothing  of  this  sort  before  the  Christ- 
spirit  began  to  sweeten  the  world's  life.  And 
there  is  none  of  it  to-day  except  in  those  parts 
of  the  world  where  the  Christ-spirit  influences 
life. 

But — there's  a  "  but " — it  proves  a  blessed  but ; 
this  is  only  a  crumb  or  two  falling  from  a  loaded 
table.  And  he  who  judges  Christ  by  these 
crumbs  only,  wholesome  and  toothsome  as  they 
are,  will  have  a  very  skimpy  conception  of 
Christ. 

All  of  this  sort  of  thing  that  has  come  has  come 
very  slowly.  It  has  had  to  fight  through  and 
in,  every  step  of  the  way  that  it  has  come.  Its 
coming  has  been  opposed  stubbornly,  maliciously, 
viciously  every  inch  of  the  road,  as  only  those 
know  who  are  in  the  thick  of  the  struggle  for 
these  reforms,  panting  for  breath  sometimes. 

It  is  as  though  a  few  whiffs  of  wholesome  life- 
giving  air  have  breathed  through  the  cracks  and 
crevices  of  the  breastworks  and  fortifications  of 
evil  in  which  all  our  common  life  seems  en- 
trenched. But  the  fortifications  are  still  there. 
If  the  sweet,  wholesome  breathing  in  through 
cracks  and  crannies  has  been  so  blest,  what  would 
it  be  if  the  forces  of  evil  were  clean  removed 
from  the  scene,  and  the  Christ-spirit  became  the 
whole  atmosphere  breathed  fully  and  freely  with- 
out restraint,  with  no  bad  draughts,  and  no  coun- 
ter currents  to  guard  and  fight  against  ? 

It  would  seem  like  a  strange  sort  of  a  kingdom 
if  the  present  is  even  a  gradual  coming  in  of 


24  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

the  Kingdom.  We  would  seem  to  be  having  a 
new,  strange  sort  of  a  Christ  if  the  present  is  a 
sample  of  His  sort  of  reigning.  For  it  may  well 
be  thoughtfully  doubted  if  ever  there  was  such 
a  condition  of  feverish  unrest  in  all  parts  of  the 
world  as  to-day. 

It  is  most  difficult  to  put  your  finger  on  a  single 
spot  of  the  world-map  that  is  not  being  torn 
and  uptorn  by  unrest  in  one  shape  or  another. 
Either  actual  war,  or  constant  studious  prepara- 
tion for  war,  actually  never  ceases.  And  it  is 
difficult  to  say  which  is  the  worse  of  the  two. 
The  actual  war  reveals  more  terribly  to  our  eyes 
and  ears  the  awful  cost  in  treasure  and  in  pre- 
cious human  blood  spilled  without  stint.  The 
never-ceasing  preparation  for  war  seems  actually 
to  cost  more.  In  the  immense  treasure  involved, 
and  in  blood  too,  given  out,  not  on  an  occasional 
battlefield,  but  in  the  continual  battle  of  daily  life 
to  meet  the  terrible  drain  of  taxation,  it  costs  im- 
mensely more.  There  is  less  of  the  tragic  for 
the  news  headings,  but  not  a  whit  less,  rather 
much  more,  in  the  slow  suffering,  the  pinched 
lives,  and  the  awful  temptations  to  barter  charac- 
ter for  bread. 

Then  there  is  the  continual  seething  unrest 
in  the  industrial  world;  the  protests  sometimes 
so  strange  and  startling  against  social  and  political 
conditions ;  the  feverish  greed  for  gold,  and  land, 
and  position ;  the  intense  pace  of  all  our  modern 
life ;  the  abandonment  of  home  and  home  ideals ; 
the  terrific  attack  against  our  young  womanhood. 
The  political   pot   which   gathers   into  itself  all 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       25 

these  things,  never  quits  boiling  or  boiling  over, 
in  some  part  of  the  world,  now  here,  now  there. 
And  it  seems  like  the  greatest  achievement  of 
diplomacy  when  here  and  there  it  can  be  kept 
from  boiling  clean  over,  or  at  least  made  to  boil 
over  less. 

It  would  seem  indeed  like  a  queer  sort  of 
kingdom  if  this  is  a  sample.  Some  of  us  would 
have  less  heart  in  repeating  one  petition  of  the 
old  daily  prayer.  And  Christ  would  seem  to  have 
quite  changed  His  spirit  and  character  if  this  is 
a  result  of  His  coming. 

The  Greatness  of  Patience. 

And  the  great  simple  truth  is  this,  the  truth 
that  in  the  strange  mix-up  of  life  we  easily  lose 
sight  of  is  this :  Christ  has  not  yet  taken  posses- 
sion of  all  of  His  domain;  a  part  of  it  still  remains 
to  be  possessed.  "  We  see  not  yet  all  things  sub- 
jected to  Him."  ^  We  are  living  in  the  "  not- 
yet"  interval  between  the  crowning  and  the 
actual  reigning.  We  are  living  on  the  "  not- 
yet  "  possessed  part  of  His  domain. 

And  the  question  that  comes  hot  and  quick 
from  our  lips,  even  though  with  an  attempt  at 
subdued  reverence,  is  this :  "  Why  does  He  not 
take  possession,  and  untangle  the  snarl,  and  right 
the  wrongs,  and  bring  in  the  true  rational  order 
of  things  ?  "  And  all  the  long  waiting,  the  sore- 
ness of  hearts  over  the  part  that  touches  one*s 
own  life  most  closely,  the  shortness  of  breath  in 

*  Hebrews  ii.  8. 


26  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

the  tensity  of  the  struggle,  underscore  that  word 
"why?"* 

And  the  answer  to  the  impatient  question  re- 
veals all  afresh  the  greatness  of  the  love  of  our 
Christ.  His  greatness  is  shown  most  in  His 
patience.  But  patience  is  one  of  the  things  we 
men  on  this  old  earth  don't  know.  It's  one  of 
the  unknown  quantities  to  us.  It  can  be  known 
only  by  knowing  God.  For  patience  is  love  at 
its  best.  Patience  is  God  at  His  best.  His  is 
the  patience  that  sees  all,  and  feels  all  with  the 
tender  heart  that  broke  once  under  the  load,  and 
yet  waits,  steadily  waits,  and  then  waits  just  a 
bit  longer. 

In  this  He  runs  the  risk  of  being  misunder- 
stood. Men  in  their  stupidity  constantly  mis- 
take strong  patience  for  weakness  or  indifference 
or  lack  of  a  gripping  purpose.  And  God  is 
misunderstood  in  this,  even  by  His  trusting  chil- 
dren. But,  even  so,  the  object  to  be  gained  is 
so  great,  and  so  near  Christ's  heart  that  He 
waits,  strongly  waits  with  a  patience  beyond  our 
comprehension;  waits  just  a  bit  longer,  always 
just  a  bit  longer. 

There  are  two  parts  to  the  answer.  Jesus  the 
Christ  is  giving  man  the  fullest  opportunity.  He 
never  interferes  with  man's  right  of  free  choice. 
Man  is  free  to  do  as  he  chooses.  Every  possible 
means  is  used  to  influence  him  to  choose  right,  but 
the  choice  itself  is  always  left  to  the  man.  The 
present  is  man's  opportunity.  The  initiative  of 
action  on  the  earth  is  altogether  in  man's  hand. 
All  of  God's  power  is  at  man's  disposal ;  but  man 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       27 

must  reach  out  and  take.  This  long  stretched 
out  waiting  time  is  for  man's  sake,  that  he  may- 
have  fullest  opportunity.  The  longsuffering  of 
God  would  woo  men.^ 

When  at  length  opportunity  comes  to  its  end 
it  will  be  only  because  things  have  gotten  into 
such  desperate  shape,  into  such  an  awful  fix,  that 
at  length  for  man's  sake  Christ  will  step  into  the 
direct  action  of  the  earth  once  again.  He  will 
take  the  leadership  of  earth  into  His  own  hands, 
even  while  still  leaving  each  man  free  in  his 
individual  choice.  This  is  the  first  part  of  the 
answer.  The  waiting  is  that  man  may  have  full- 
est opportunity. 

Then  Christ  has  a  great  hunger  for  willing 
hearts.  No  words  are  strong  enough  to  tell  His 
longing  for  a  free,  glad,  joyous  surrender  to  His 
mastery.  He  could  so  easily  end  the  present  con- 
flict, but  He  waits  that  men  may  bring  to  Him 
the  allegiance  of  their  lives,  given  of  their  own 
glad,  gracious,  voluntary  accord.  He  was  a  vol- 
unteer Saviour.  He  longs  for  that  love  that  is 
the  bubbling  out  of  a  free,  full  heart. 

The  best  love  is  only  given  freely  without  any 
compulsion  of  any  sort,  save  only  love's  sweet 
compelling.  He  wants  what  He  gives — the  best. 
And  so  He  waits,  patiently  waits  just  a  bit  longer. 
This  is  the  second  bit  of  the  answer.  The  long 
delay  spells  out  the  hunger  as  well  as  the  patience 
of  God's  heart.    The  divine  Husbandman  is  pa- 

*  II  Peter  iii.  8-9;  Romans  ii.  4;  ix.  22;  Revelation 
ii.  21;  I  Peter  iii.  20;  II  Peter  iii.  15;  Exodus  xxxiv. 
6-7. 


28  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

tiently  waiting,  and  sending  warm  sun  and  soft 
rains  and  fragrant  dews  while  waiting.^ 

"  The  Husbandman  waiteth — 
The  Husbandman?    Why? 
For  the  heart  of  one  servant 
Who  hears  not  His  cry. 

"  The  Husbandman  waiteth — 
He  waiteth r    What  for? 
For  the  heart  of  one  servant 
To  love  Him  yet  more. 

"  The  Husbandman  waiteth — 
Long  patience  hath  He — 
But  He  waiteth  in  hunger — 
Oh!     Is  it  for  thee?' 

Taking  with  Your  Life. 

But — ah !  listen,  there's  a  wonderful  "  but "  to 
put  in  here.  But,  while  waiting  He  puts  all  His 
limitless  power  at  our  disposal.  If  that  simple 
sentence  could  be  put  into  letters  of  living  flame, 
its  tremendous  meaning  might  burn  into  our 
hearts.  When  Paul  piled  up  phrase  on  phrase 
in  his  eager  attempt  to  have  his  Asiatic  friends 
in  and  around  Ephesus  take  in  the  limitless  power 
of  the  ascended  Christ,  he  added  the  significant 
words,  "  to  the  Church."  ^  All  that  power  is  for 
the  use,  and  at  the  disposal,  of  the  Church. 

The  Church  was  meant  to  be  a  unit  in  spirit 
in  loyalty  to  her  absent  Lord,  wholly  under  the 
dominating  touch  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  not  only 

*  James  v.  7.  '  F.  M.  N. 

•  Ephesians  i.  20-22. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       29 

in  her  official  actions,  but  in  the  lives  of  the  in- 
dividual members.  If  she  were  so,  no  human 
imagination  could  take  in  the  startling,  revolu- 
tionary power,  softly,  subtly,  but  with  resistless 
sweep,  flowing  down  from  the  crowned  Christ, 
among  grateful  men. 

Not  being  such  a  unit  it  is  not  possible  that  that 
power  shall  be  as  great  in  manifestation  as  was 
planned  and  meant.  For  no  individual  nor  group 
can  ever  take  the  place  in  action  of  the  whole 
unified  body  of  believers,  acting  as  a  channel 
for  the  power  of  the  crowned  Christ.  That  power 
shall  be  realized  on  the  earth  only  when  the 
Church  is  so  unified,  and  at  work,  under  the 
reigning  Christ,  from  the  new  headquarters  up 
in  the  heavens. 

But  meanwhile  all  of  that  power  is  at  the  dis- 
posal  of  any  disciple  of  Christ — the  humblest — 
who  will  simply  live  in  full-faced  touch  with 
Christ,  and  who  will  take  of  that  power  as  the 
need  comes,  and  as  the  sovereign  Holy  Spirit 
leads. 

It  is  of  this,  this  personal  taking,  that  Paul  is 
speaking  when  he  piles  up  that  intense  sentence : 
"  able  to  do  exceeding  abundantly  above  all  that 
we  ask  or  think  according  to  the  power  that  work- 
eth  in  us."  ^  The  great  bother  in  Paul's  day  and 
ever  since,  and  now,  is  to  get  people  to  take.  The 
power  is  fairly  a-tremble  in  the  air  at  our  very 
finger-tips.  And  we  go  limping,  crutching  along 
both  bodily  and  mentally  and  in  our  spiritual 
leanness. 

*  Ephesians  iii.   20. 


30  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Those  tremendous  words  of  Jesus,  ''  because 
I  go  unto  the  Father,"  with  the  whole  passage  in 
which  they  occur/  must  be  read  in  the  light  shin- 
ing from  the  throne.  Only  so  can  they  be  under- 
stood. But  then,  so  read,  they  begin  to  grip  us, 
and  grip  us  hard,  as  we  see  what  He  really  meant 
and  means. 

He  who  has  the  warm,  child-like  touch  of  heart 
with  Jesus,  that  the  word  "  believeth  "  stands  for, 
shall — as  the  Holy  Spirit  has  full  control — do  the 
same  works  as  Jesus  did,  same  in  kind  and  in 
degree,  and  then  shall  do  even  greater  than  Jesus 
ever  did.  Because  it  is  now  the  glorified  crowned 
Christ  who  is  doing  them  through  some  child 
of  His,  simple-hearted  enough  to  let  Him  have 
full  control. 

And  the  means  through  which  He  will  do  them 
is  simple,  child-like,  trusting,  humble  prayer.  The 
man  using  the  power  is  on  his  knees.  The  lower 
down  he  gets  the  more  and  more  freely  the  power 
flows  down  and  out  among  men. 

As  one  learns  to  keep  in  touch — learns  it 
slowly,  stumblingly,  with  many  a  stupid  fall,  and 
many  a  tremble  and  quiver — as  he  learns  to  keep 
in  simple  touch  with  the  crowned  Christ  he  will 
find  all  the  power  of  that  Christ  coming  with  a 
soft  surging  throb  of  life  wherever  needed.  We 
may  have  all  we  can  take.  But  the  taking  must 
he  with  one's  very  life.  No  mere  earnest  repeat- 
ing of  a  creed  in  Church  service  will  avail  here. 
The  repeating  must  be,  syllable  by  syllable,  with 
feet    and    will,    with   hands    and    life,    in    the 

*John  xiv.  12-14. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       31 

daily  tread  where  each  step  is  stubbornly 
contested. 

This  is  the  bit  of  truth  for  the  waiting  time. 
This  is  the  song  to  be  singing  in  this  present 
"  not-yet  "  interval.  And  the  song  will  help  cut 
down  the  length  of  that  "  not-yet/'  until  the  fric- 
tion of  our  lived  faith  shall  wear  off  the  "  not " 
and  wipe  out  the  '*  yet,"  and  we  shall  find  the 
crowned  Christ  a  reigning  Christ. 

For  some  day  this  patient  waiting  crowned 
Man  will  rise  up  from  His  seat  at  the  Father's 
right  hand.  He  will  step  directly  into  the  action 
of  earth  once  again.  Man  will  have  had  his  full- 
est opportunity  lengthened  out  to  the  last  notch 
ot  his  possible  use  of  it.  Then  we  shall  see  the 
crowned  Christ  quietly  stepping  in,  taking  matters 
wholly  into  His  own  hands,  and  acting  in  all  the 
affairs  of  earth  as  the  Crowned  One.  Then  He 
shall  reign  from  sea  to  sea,  and  from  the  Eu- 
phrates out  to  where  the  ends  of  the  earth  be- 
come a  common  line  on  the  other  side.  The 
Kingdom  will  have  come,  for  the  King  will  be 
reigning. 

The  night  will  be  gone.  The  day  has  come. 
The  shadows  flee.  He  has  come,  whose  pres- 
ence puts  the  new  day  at  dawn,  with  the  East 
all  aflame,  and  the  fragrant  dew  glistening  gladly 
on  every  tender  green  blade.  This  time  of  ex- 
pectancy is  over ;  ^  the  time  of  making  real  has 
come.  Then  comes  the  restoration  of  the  old 
original  love  plan  to  earth  and  beast  and  man.- 

*  Hebrews  x.  13.  *  Acts  iii.  21. 


32  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

"Thou  art  coming,  O  my  Saviour! 

Thou  art  coming,  O  my  King  I 
In  thy  glory  all-transcendent; 
In  thy  beauty  all  resplendent ; 

Well  may  we  rejoice  and  sing! 
Coming  I    In  the  opening  east, 

Herald  brightness  slowly  swells; 
Coming,    O  my  glorious    Priest, 

Hear  we  not  thy  golden  bells? 

"  Thou  art  coming,  Thou  art  coming ! 

We  shall  meet  Thee  on  Thy  way, 
We  shall  see  Thee,  we  shall  know  Thee, 
We  shall  bless  Thee,  we  shall  show  Thee 

All  our  hearts  could  never  say! 
What  an  anthem  that  will  be, 
Ringing  out  our  love  to  Thee ; 
Pouring  out  our  rapture  sweet 
At  Thine  own  all-glorious  feet! 

"Thou  art  coming!     Rays  of  glory, 
Through  the  veil  Thy  death  has  rent, 
Touch  the  mountain  and  the  river 
With  a  golden  glowing  quiver. 

Thrill  of  light  and  music  blent. 
Earth  is  brightened  when  this  gleam 
Falls  on  flower,  rock,  and  stream; 
Life  is  brightened  when  this  ray 
Falls  upon  its  darkest  day. 

"  Not  a  cloud  and  not  a  shadow, 

Not  a  mist  and  not  a  tear, 
Not  a  sin  and  not  a  sorrow. 
Not  a  dim  and  veiled  to-morrow, 

For  that  sunrise  grand  and  clear! 
Jesus,  Saviour,  once  with  Thee, 

Nothing  else  seems  worth  a  thought! 
Oh,  how  marvellous  will  be 

All  the  bliss  Thy  pain  hath  bought ! 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       33 

"  Thou  art  coming !    At  Thy  table. 

We  are  witnesses  of  this, 
While  remembering  hearts  Thou  meetest. 
In  communion  clearest,  sweetest. 

Earnest  of  our  coming  bliss. 
Showing  not  Thy  death  alone, 

And  Thy  love  exceeding  great. 
But  Thy  coming  and  Thy  throne. 

All  for  which  we  long  and  wait. 

"  Thou  art  coming !    We  are  waiting 

With  a  hope  that  cannot  fail; 
Asking  not  the  day  or  hour. 
Resting  on  Thy  word  of  power 

Anchored  safe  within  the  veil. 
Time  appointed  may  be  long, 

But  the  vision  must  be  sure; 
Certainty  shall  make  us  strong, 

Joyful  patience  can  endure ! 

"  O  the  joy  to  see  Thee  reigning, 

Thee,  my  own  beloved  Lord! 
Every  tongue  Thy  name  confessing. 
Worship,  honor,  glory,  blessing, 

Brought  to  Thee  with  glad  accord  I 
Thee,  my  Master  and  my  Friend, 

Vindicated  and  enthroned! 
Unto  earth's  remotest  end 

Glorified,  adored,  and  owned !  * 


Working  by  the  Light  of  the  Throne. 

But  we  are  still  in  the  "  not-yet  "  interval.  We 
see  not  yet  all  things  subject  to  Him.  This  is 
still  the  waiting  time.  It  is  the  pleading  time 
for  Him.  He  pleads  for  the  personal  crowning 
of  Himself  in  our  lives,  that  He  may  reign  there 

*  Frances  Ridley  Havergal. 


34  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

and  He  alone.  This  is  our  great  opportunity. 
We  shall  never  see  its  like  again,  nor  anywhere 
else  than  on  this  earth. 

In  the  reigning  time  that's  coming  this  peculiar 
opportunity  of  crowning  Christ  while  He  still  is 
absent  and  despised,  this  will  be  gone.  In  the 
upper  world  they  have  no  such  opportunity. 
There  is  no  opposition  there.  Now  and  here  is 
the  rarest  opportunity  to  put  this  great  waiting 
patient  Man  on  the  throne  of  heart  and  life, 
with  possessions  and  ambitions  and  plans  all  in 
subjection  under  His  feet. 

Every  woman  knows  the  name  of  Brussels 
lace.  The  old  capital  of  the  low  countries  of 
Europe  has  long  been  famous  for  its  lace.  It 
is  of  great  interest  to  note  the  conditions  under 
which  it  is  sometimes  made.  They  are  condi- 
tions studiously  prepared  after  long  experience. 
In  one  of  the  famous  lace  factories  in  Brussels 
there  are  a  number  of  small  rooms  devoted  to  the 
making  of  some  of  the  most  delicate  patterns. 

Each  room  is  just  large  enough  for  a  single 
worker,  and  is  quite  dark  except  for  one  narrow 
window.  The  worker  sits  so  that  the  stream 
of  light  falls  from  above  directly  upon  the  threads, 
while  he  himself  sits  in  the  darkness.  The  dark- 
ness aids  the  workman's  eyes  to  see  better,  and  to 
work  more  skilfully  in  the  narrow  line  of  clear 
light  centred  on  the  delicate  task.  He  weaves 
in  the  upper  light  intensified  by  the  surrounding 
gloom,  and  does  exquisite  work. 

There  is  a  clear  line  of  light  from  a  throne 
shining  down  into  the  darkness  in  which  we  sit 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       35 

and  move.  It  shines  from  the  face  of  a  crowned 
Man.  In  the  light  of  that  Hght  we  can  see  clearly 
to  do  a  difficult  bit  of  crowning  work, — to  crown 
the  Christ  in  our  lives  and  to  keep  Him  crowned. 

As  our  eyes  follow  that  line  of  upper  light  we 
may  catch  glimpses  of  His  wondrous  Face  up 
there  in  the  glory.  So  we  shall  be  steadied  and 
cheered  in  the  darkness  as  we  stick  to  our  glad 
crowning  work.  And  so  we  shall  move  forward 
on  the  calendar  the  day  when  that  thin  line  of 
light  seen  now  only  by  watching  eyes  shall  be- 
come a  burst  of  glory  light  seen  by  all  eyes. 

And  this  is  the  thing  the  crowned  Christ  is 
asking  of  us  during  this  waiting  time,  this  "  not- 
yet  "  interval.  He  is  counting  on  each  of  us 
being  faithful  to  Him,  our  absent  Lord,  in  this. 

"  He  is  counting  on  you. 
He  has  need  of  your  life 
In  the  thick  of  the  strife : 
For  that  weak  one  may  fall 
H  you  fail  at  His  call. 
He  is  counting  on  you, 
If   you    fail   Him — 
What  then  ? 

"He   is   counting  on   you. 
On  your  silver  and  gold, 
On  that  treasure  you  hold; 
On  that  treasure  still  kept, 
Though  the  doubt  o'er  you  swept 
'  Is  this  gold  not  all  mine? 
(Lord,   I   knew   it  was   Thine') 
He  is  counting  on  you, 
If  you  fail  Him — 
What  then? 


26  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

"He   is  counting  on  you. 
On  a  love  that  will  share 
In  His  burden  of  prayer, 
For  the  souls  He  has  bought 
With  His  life-blood ;  and  sought 
Through  His  sorrow  and  pain 
To  win  '  Home '  yet  again. 

He  is  counting  on  you, 

If  you  fail  Him — 
What  then? 


"  He  is  counting  on  you. 

On  life,  money,  and  prayer; 
And  *  the  day  shall  declare  * 
If  you  let  Him  have  all 
In  response  to  His  call; 
Or  if  He  in  that  day 
To   your   sorrow   must  say, 
*  I  had  counted  on  you, 
But  you  failed  me ' — 
What  then  ? 

"  He  is  counting  on  you. 

Oh!  the  wonder  and  grace. 

To  look  Christ  in  the  face 

And  not  be  ashamed; 

For  you  gave  what  He  claimed, 

And  you  laid  down  your  all 

For  His  sake — at  His  call. 
He  had  counted  on  you, 
And  you  failed  not. 
What  then?"* 

Ah!    Please  God,  by  His  grace,  we  shall  not 
fail  in  the  ruling  purpose  of  our  lives.    We  may 
*  Mrs.  Bessie   Porter  Head. 


The  Christ  Crowned,  the  Fact       37 

crown  Him  Lord  of  all.     We  can.     He  asks  it. 
We  surely  2mlL 

"With  all  my  powers  Him  I  greet, 
All  subject  to  His  call; 
And  bowing  low  at   His  pierced  feet 
Now  crown  him  Lord  of  all." 


II.— THE  CROWN  BOOK 


"All   hail   the  power  of   Jesus'  Name! 
Let  angels  prostrate  fall : 
Bring    forth    the   royal    diadem, 
And  crown  Him  Lord  of  all. 

"  O  that  with  yonder  sacred  throng 
We  at  His  feet  may  fall, 
Join  in  the  everlasting  song 
And  crown  Him  Lord  of  all! 

"  With  all  my  powers  Him  I  greet, 
All  subject  to  His  call; 
And  bowing  low  at  His  pierced  feet, 
Now  crown  Him  Lord  of  all. 

"  I  hail  the  power  of  Jesus'  Name, 
Before  Him  gladly  fall, 
Bring  Him  my  own  heart's  diadem 
And  crown  Him  Lord  of  all ! " 


THE   CROWN   BOOK 

The  CroTvning  Book. 

There  is  a  crown  book  in  this  old  Book  of 
God, — the  Revelation  of  John.  It  is  the  crown 
book,  the  only  one.  It  is  the  crown  book  of  the 
sixty-six  in  two  senses.  It  is  the  capping  climax 
of  the  whole  revelation  of  God's  Word.  It  gath- 
ers up  into  itself  in  a  peculiar  way  the  dominant 
characteristics  of  both  the  Hebrew  Old  and  the 
Greek  New  Testaments. 

And  it  is  the  book  of  the  Crown.  The  King 
is  in  action.  He  Himself  gives  the  message  of 
the  book  to  John.  He  is  seen  stepping  forward 
to  take  possession  of  His  realm.  Then  He  takes 
possession.  He  dispossesses  the  pretender.  He 
reigns  over  the  earth.  The  Revelation  of  John  is 
the  Crown  book. 

This  is  the  peculiarity  of  the  Revelation  in 
comparison  with  all  the  other  books.  Only  here 
is  Christ  seen  exercising  His  crown  rights.  From 
end  to  end  of  the  Old  Testament  pages.  His  com- 
ing is  looked  forward  to,  with  an  eager  longing 
that  grows  in  intensity  as  the  national  failure 
grows  ever  worse. 

In  the  Gospels  He  comes,  but  not  as  He  was 
expected.  He  is  heralded  as  King,  and  claims 
to  be  King.     He  has  all  the  graciousness  of  a 

4J 


42  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

King  in  ministering  to  the  needs  of  the  people, 
and  all  the  power  of  a  King  in  His  personal 
touch.  But  He  is  rejected  by  the  nation,  and 
goes  to  the  Cross,  yet  still  as  a  King, — a  hu- 
miliated, crucified  King. 

In  the  Acts  He  is  the  risen,  glorified  King 
seated  at  the  Father's  right  hand  in  glory,  and 
at  work  through  His  followers  among  men  on 
the  earth.  But  it  is  always  in  the  midst  of  sharp, 
bitter  opposition.  In  the  Epistles  He  is  seen 
crowned  at  the  Father's  right  hand,  guiding  and 
teaching  His  followers  who  are  still  suffering 
persecution. 

But  in  the  Revelation  of  John  all  this  is 
changed.  There's  a  sharp,  decided,  advance  step. 
Here  He  is  not  only  crowned,  but  stepping  di- 
rectly and  decisively  into  the  action  of  the  earth 
in  the  full  exercise  of  His  crowned  rights  and 
power.  It  is  peculiarly  the  book  of  the  Crown, 
the  royal  book,  the  enthroned  Christ  exercising 
fully  and  freely  at  will  His  crown  rights. 

Jesus'  Bosom  Friend. 

The  book  was  written  by  John  the  disciple  and 
apostle.  This  is  our  same  old  friend  John,  whom 
we  met  first  that  ever-memorable  afternoon,  down 
by  the  Jordan  River  road,  when  he  was  intro- 
duced to  Jesus  by  the  John  of  the  deserts,  and 
had  his  first  long,  quiet  talk  with  Him.^  The 
friendship  began  that  day,  grew  steadily,  and 
never  flagged.    It  was  one  of  the  few  friendships 

*  John  i.  35-42. 


The  Crown  Book  43 

that  Jesus  had  that  never  knew  any  lapse  nor 
eclipse. 

He  became,  in  an  outstanding  sense,  the  bosom 
friend  of  Jesus.  Probably  it  was  not  because  of 
any  special  gentleness  or  amiability  on  John's  part, 
though  he  may  have  had  something  of  these  traits. 
It  was  more  likely  because  of  the  deep,  intelligent 
sympathy  between  the  two,  a  sympathy  not  only 
of  personality,  but  deeper  and  stronger  because 
of  a  mental  and  spirit  likeness  growing  up  be- 
tween them.  It  would  seem  likely  that  John  de- 
veloped a  mental  grasp,  a  spirit  insight,  a  student 
thoughtfulness,  a  steadiness  of  temperament,  and 
with  these,  a  growing  understanding  of  much — 
at  the  least — much  of  Jesus'  spirit  and  ideals  and 
vision. 

It  may  quite  be  that  all  this  came  slowly,  and 
grew  up  out  of  the  constant  contact  with  Jesus, 
and  out  of  the  warm  personal  love  between  the 
two  men ;  quite  likely.  Who  could  live  so  close 
to  Jesus  as  he  and  not  bear  the  marks  on  mind 
and  spirit?  The  fire  that  burned  so  fiercely 
in  early  years  ^  grew  into  a  steady,  unflickering 
flame  under  the  influence  of  that  personal  friend- 
ship. 

It  seems  not  unlikely  that  John  belonged  to  a 
good  family,  and  had  his  home  in  Jerusalem.  He 
was  clearly  on  terms  of  easy  intimacy  at  the 
palace  of  the  High  Priest,-  which  in  itself  would 
suggest  his  social  standing  in  the  city.  It  was  to 
this  man  that  Jesus,  on  the  Cross,  committed  the 
care  of   His  mother.     And  John  accepted  the 

'  Luke  ix.  54.  *  John  xviii.  15-16. 


44  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

trust  as  a  tender  token  of  friendship,  and  took 
Mary  at  once  to  his  own  home.  And  as  Mary- 
remained  in  Jerusalem  at  least  some  time,  and 
John  clearly  for  a  long  time,  the  home  was  likely 
there. 

John  was  one  of  the  chief  leaders  in  Jerusa- 
lem during  the  Pentecost  days,  and  after.  Peter 
was  the  chief  spokesman,  but  John  was  always 
close  by  his  side.  The  friendship  between  the 
two  seems  to  have  been  close  and  of  long  stand- 
ing. They  were  sent  together  by  the  Master  to 
arrange  for  the  supper  that  memorable  betrayal 
night,^  and  they  are  seen  together  in  the  activi- 
ties in  Jerusalem  for  many  years.^ 

It  would  seem  that  in  later  years  John  left  Jeru- 
salem, and  made  his  home  for  the  remainder 
of  his  life  in  Ephesus.  Doubtless  he  was  led, 
after  the  years  of  leadership  in  the  mother 
Church,  to  leave  the  great  Jew  centre,  and  devote 
his  strength  to  missionary  service  in  the  outside 
Gentile  world. 

Ephesus  was  the  chief  city  of  the  province  of 
Asia,  and  the  natural  centre  of  the  population 
and  life  of  the  province.  John  probably  worked 
out  from  Ephesus,  preaching  throughout  the 
whole  district;  teaching,  advising,  praying  with, 
and  visiting  the  groups  of  little  Churches  scat- 
tered throughout  the  province,  perhaps  founding 
some,  and  strengthening  all.  For  his  work  seems 
to  have  been,  not  so  much  evangelizing,  but  the 

^  Luke  xxii.  8. 

*  Acts  iii.  I,  3,  4,  II ;  iv.  13,  19;  viii.  14,  25;  Galatians 
ii.  9. 


The  Crown  Book  45 

much  more  difficult  work  of  teaching,  patiently, 
carefully,  teaching ;  a  work  so  essential  to  the  life 
of  any  Church.  So  he  would  be  quite  familiar 
with  the  Churches  to  which  the  Revelation  letters 
are  sent,  and  would  be  well  known  by  these  peo- 
ple and  loved  and  revered  by  them  as  a  father  in 
the  faith. 

This  personal  bit  about  John  is  of  intensest 
interest  in  studying  this  book  of  his.  It  was 
to  this  man  that  Jesus  could  entrust  the  writing 
of  this  special  message.  John  could  take  in  what 
the  Master  was  showing  him  as  few,  if  any  oth- 
ers, could.  The  close,  sympathetic  friendship 
made  him  able  to  take  in  what  his  old  Friend 
and  Master  is  now  telling  him  in  the  glory.  And 
he  could  give  it  out  too,  simply,  fully,  clearly, 
just  as  it  was  given  to  him. 

Love  can  see  and  grasp,  and  can  obey  sim- 
ply, where  mere  mental  keenness  fails.  There 
is  no  tonic  for  the  brain  like  love  in  the  heart. 
No  brain  ever  does  its  best  work,  nor  can,  until 
the  heart  is  fired  by  some  tender,  noble  passion. 
It  was  to  Mary  Magdalene  who  had  such  reason 
to  love  tenderly  that  Jesus  showed  Himself  first 
after  the  resurrection.^ 

And  it  is  to  John,  the  bosom  friend,  whose 
friendship  stood  the  severest  test  where  all  others 
failed,  that  He  now  shows  Himself  in  glory,  and 
entrusts  this  pleading  message,  and  vision  of  com- 
ing events,  and  of  the  after  glory.  He  that  will- 
eth  to  do  the  Master's  will  shall  know  surely 
and  clearly  what  that  will  is.    And  he  that  goeth 

*  Mark  xvi.  9;  John  xx.  i,  11-18. 


46  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

farther  yet,  and  willeth  to  give  the  tenderest  love 
of  his  heart,  ever  kept  at  summer  heat,  shall  knov^r 
the  Master  Himself,  in  present  personal  touch, 
and  in  clear  and  clearing  understanding  of  His 
coming  victorious  action  and  crowning  glory. 

John  wrote  a  Gospel ;  one  chief  Epistle,  besides 
the  two  very  brief  personal  letters ;  and  this  book 
of  the  Revelation.  The  Gospel  and  Epistles  were 
quite  likely  written  while  in  Ephesus. 

The  Gospel  was  his  plea  to  all  men  to  whom 
it  might  come  to  accept  Jesus  as  their  personal 
Saviour.  Its  characteristic  word  is  *'  believe." 
And  the  plan  of  it  is  a  simple  array  of  incidents 
about  Jesus  that  would  lead  men  to  a  warm,  in- 
telligent belief  in  Him. 

The  chief  Epistle  is  written  to  the  little  groups 
of  believers  scattered  throughout  Asia  Minor, 
and  doubtless  in  the  old  home  district  of  Judea, 
too.  Its  characteristic  word  is  "  abide."  It  is 
an  intense  plea,  by  a  personal  friend  to  abide, 
steadily,  fully,  in  Christ,  in  spite  of  the  growing 
defections  and  difficulties  pressing  in  so  close. 

The  Revelation  was  written,  quite  likely,  on  the 
island  of  Patmos  while  all  was  yet  fresh  in  his 
mind ;  or  possibly  in  Ephesus  after  his  release 
from  his  island  prison;  or  perhaps  begun  in 
Patmos  and  put  into  its  final  shape  in  Ephesus. 
It  is  written  to  the  little  groups  of  believers  in 
and  near  Ephesus.  It  is  a  most  intense  plea  to 
be  personally  true  to  the  Lord  Jesus  in  the  midst 
of  subtle  compromise  and  of  bitter  persecution. 

Its  characteristic  word  is  "  overcome."  It 
speaks  much  of  the  opposition  to  be  encountered, 


The  Crown  Book  47 

and  tells  of  greater  opposition  yet  to  come,  the 
greatest  ever  known.  And  it  pleads,  with  every 
possible  promise,  and  every  warning  of  danger, 
that  the  true  believer  set  himself  against  the  evil 
tide,  at  every  risk,  and  every  possible  personal 
loss,  and  so  that  he  "  overcome  "  in  the  Name 
of  the  Lord  Jesus. 

Old  and  New  Woven  Together. 

The  language  in  which  the  book  is  written  is 
of  intense  interest.  It  is  so  unusual.  It  com- 
bines Hebrew  thought  and  Greek  speech.  It  is 
as  though  a  Hebrew  soul  were  living  in  a  Greek 
body,  and  the  soul  has  so  dominated  the  body  as 
to  make  decided  changes  in  it.  The  thought  and 
imagery,  and  the  very  words  are  largely  taken 
over  from  the  Old  Testament,  much  of  it  not 
being  found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament.  It 
is  as  though  the  Old  Testament  reaches  clear 
over  the  intervening  space  and  writes  the  last 
book  of  the  New  as  an  additional  book  of  the 
Old,  but  with  distinct  additions.  But  all  these 
additions  are  outgrowths  of  what  is  already  in 
the  Old. 

But  while  the  thought  and  imagery  are  He- 
brew, the  language  is  Greek.  But  scholars  note 
that  John's  Greek  here  is  different  from  that 
of  his  Gospel,  and  is  indeed  peculiar  to  itself, 
with  new  grammatical  adjustments,  as  though 
better  to  express  his  Hebrew  thought.  Yet,  like 
the  Gospel,  it  is  an  easy  Greek  to  learn  and  to 
understand.    It  is  as  though  the  Old  Testament 


48  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

were  the  warp  of  a  new  bit  of  fabric,  with  the 
New  as  the  shuttle-threads,  and  yet  with  such 
additions  as  makes  the  pattern  stand  out  much 
more  definite  and  clear^  and  the  colours  in  it 
more  pronounced.  Thus  this  end-book  is  a  weav- 
ing of  both  Old  and  New  into  a  new  bit  of 
fabric,  but  with  a  more  distinct  pattern  than 
either. 

This  explains  the  use  of  the  symbolism  which 
is  so  marked  here.  The  picture  language  of 
John's  Revelation  has  seemed  very  puzzling.  It 
has  seemed  like  a  new  language,  to  which  we  had 
neither  grammar  nor  dictionary,  and  the  intended 
meaning  of  which  we  could  only  guess  at.  But 
this  is  because  we  are  Westerners  and  a  bit  set 
in  our  western  way.  And  possibly,  too,  though 
we  dislike  to  confess  it,  because  we  have  not 
gotten  a  clear,  simple  grasp  of  this  old  Book  of 
God  as  a  whole.  The  Bible  is  an  Oriental  book, 
written  in  the  characteristic  picture  language  of 
the  Orient. 

The  truth  is  that  the  symbol  or  picture 
language  is  meant  to  make  the  book  easier  of 
understanding.  We  simply  need  to  learn  how  to 
read  picture  language,  not  whimsically,  but  sensi- 
bly according  to  the  laws  of  picture  language.  The 
symbolism  or  picture  sees  things  as  they  look  at 
the  moment  the  picture  is  taken.  The  picture 
is  meant  to  give  one  general  distinct  impres- 
sion of  the  thing  being  presented,  the  details  of 
the  picture  being  of  value  only  as  they  give  col- 
oring to  that  one  general  impression.  It  is  con- 
cerned, not  at  all,  or  only  in  the  most  incidental 


The  Crown  Book  49 

way,  with  the  process  by  which  the  thing  came 
to  the  point  pictured. 

There  is  a  rare  wisdom  in  the  use  of  this  pic- 
ture language.  It  is  really  the  common  language 
not  of  the  Orient  merely,  but  of  all  the  world. 
In  our  western  half  of  the  globe  it  is  the  language 
of  the  street,  the  common  crowd,  the  common 
exchange  of  life,  and  of  children.  It  is  the 
language  of  the  primitive  peoples  of  all  parts 
of  the  world.  Everywhere  the  conventionalized 
book-language  is  spoken  by  the  few.  The  pic- 
ture, with  its  companion,  the  story,  is  the  uni- 
versal, the  original,  the  natural  language  of  the 
race. 

On  the  mere  human  side  here  is  one  secret 
of  the  freshness  of  the  Bible.  It  is  the  oldest 
book  in  some  of  its  parts,  but  admitted  to  be 
the  freshest  and  most  modern  in  its  adaptation 
to  modern  life.  And  the  reason  is  simple.  The 
pictures  give  principles.  Principles  don't  change 
with  the  changing  of  centuries.  Rules  change. 
Principles  abide.  Details  alter  with  every  gen- 
eration. Principles  of  action  are  as  unchange- 
able as  human  nature,  which  is  ever  the  same, 
east  and  west,  below  the  equator,  and  above. 

John's  Revelation  is  naturally  full  of  this  pic- 
ture language,  for  it  is  a  gathering  up  of  the 
chief  threads  of  the  old  Oriental  Hebrew  fabric. 
It  will  help  us  understand  the  meaning  if  we  keep 
in  mind  the  simple  rules  of  this  Hebrew  picture 
language. 

John,  of  course,  was  a  Hebrew,  bom  and 
bred  in  a  Hebrew  home,  and  immersed  in  the  old 


50  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Hebrew  Bible  from  the  time  of  his  mother's 
milk.  What  Greek  language  and  culture  had 
come  was  a  bit  of  the  outer  world  come  into  his 
Hebrew  home  and  life.  Now  in  his  old  age  the 
early  memory  is  asserting  itself. 

Then  too  it  is  quite  likely  that  in  his  imprison- 
ment he  had  been  brooding  anew  over  the  old 
prophecies,  reviewing  afresh  events  since  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus, — the  growth  of  the  Church, 
and  now  the  severe  persecution,  with  himself  a 
prisoner.  And  while  he  in  no  way  doubts  the 
unseen  overruling  Hand,  yet  he  is  seeking  to  get 
a  fresh  outlook  into  the  future  from  the  old 
prophetic  writings. 

And  through  all  of  this  without  doubt  the 
Holy  Spirit  was  brooding  in  unusual  measure 
over  this  man,  reviving  early  memory,  bringing 
to  his  remembrance  all  things  of  other  days, 
deepening  impressions,  bringing  old  facts  into 
new  perspective,  giving  clearer  vision,  mellowing 
and  maturing  both  mind  and  heart  into  fresh 
plastic  openness  to  further  truth.  And  so  we 
have  this  little  book  with  its  Hebrew  soul  and 
its  Greek  body. 

The  meaning  of  all  this  is  very  simple,  and  yet 
a  meaning  of  intense  significance.  Here  is 
summed  up  the  whole  of  the  revelation  of  God's 
Word.  Here  all  the  lines  of  Revelation  meet. 
Almost  two  thousand  years  of  inspiration  come 
to  a  climax  in  this  little  end-book.  Psalmist  and 
prophet,  historian  and  law-giver,  Gospel  and 
Epistle  come  to  a  final  focus  point  in  one  simple 
intense  message.    The  purpose  of  the  book  is  in- 


The  Crown  Book  51 

tensely  and  only  practical.  Here  is  the  message 
of  the  whole  Bible  to  Christ's  people  for  this 
present  interval  between  the  Ascension  and  the 
next  great  step  in  our  Lords  world-plan. 


Jesus'  Plea  to  His  Friends. 

And  the  message  is  simply  this :  put  to  us  with 
all  the  intensity  of  the  One  who  gave  His  very 
life  for  us,  it  is  this, — that  we  he  personally  true 
to  our  Lord  Jesus  during  His  present  absence. 
This  comes  as  His  personal  request,  that, in  sweet, 
stem  purity  of  life,  in  full  glad  obedience  of 
spirit,  in  tender  freshness  of  personal  devotion, 
in  holding  absolutely  everything,  of  talents  and 
position  and  possession,  subject  to  His  call,  and 
in  keeping  our  eye  ever  open  forward  and  up- 
ward for  His  return,  we  be  true  to  Him. 

He  is  the  Lamb  slain.  Only  through  His 
blood  is  there  salvation  for  any  one.  He  is  now 
allowing  man  fullest  opportunity  before  He  comes 
to  set  things  right.  This  is  the  in-between  time, 
much  lengthened  out.  In  the  midst  of  formal- 
ism and  subtle  compromise,  the  tangling  of  ideas 
and  issues,  and  the  blurring  of  vision  within  His 
Church,  He  calls  to  His  own  blood-bought  ones 
to  be  true  to  Himself. 

There's  a  terrific  moral  storm  coming.  Wick- 
edness will  wax  to  a  worst  never  yet  known. 
Evil  will  be  so  aggressive,  compromise  so  radical, 
temptations  so  subtle  and  coming  with  such  a 
rush,  and  ideals  of  right  so  blurred  and  dimmed 
in  the  glare  of  the  lower  lights,  that  even  those 


52  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

of  the  inner  circle  will  be  sorely  tried,  and  many 
will  be  deceived.  Just  at  the  bursting  of  the 
worst  of  the  storm  the  crowned  Christ  will  ap- 
pear. He  will  come  on  the  clouds  before  all 
eyes,  take  away  His  own  out  of  the  storm,  then 
clear  the  storm  by  His  own  touch,  and  begin 
the  new  order  of  things. 

The  test  coming  will  be  terrific.  He  knows  it. 
And  his  knowledge  makes  His  plea  intense  that 
we  be  true  to  Himself,  our  beloved,  crucified, 
crowned  Lord,  utterly  regardless  of  consequences 
to  ourselves.  So  we  shall  "  overcome  by  the 
blood  of  the  Lamb,"  and  be  joined  with  Him  in 
closest  intimacy  during  His  coming  reign  over 
the  earth. 

There  is  a  striking  thing  told  us  at  the  very 
outset  of  the  book ; — it  is  a  revelation.  That  is, 
it  is  something  revealed  directly  by  God.  It  is 
the  only  book  of  the  Bible  of  which  we  are  told 
plainly  and  directly  that  it  is  a  revelation. 

It  is  not  that  the  other  books  do  not  have  the 
same  inspirational  characteristic.  But  our  at- 
tention is  explicitly  called  to  the  fact  that  this 
one  is,  in  its  entirety,  a  direct  revelation;  and 
not  only  so,  but  it  is  a  revelation  given  directly 
by  God  to  the  Lord  Jesus,  and  given  in  person  by 
Him  to  John.  This  is  significant.  It  marks  out 
the  message  of  the  book  as  of  the  utmost  mean- 
ing and  importance. 

This  suggests  a  need.  And  the  need  of  some- 
thing of  the  sort  is  plain  enough,  if  one  think 
into  it.  Already  in  John's  day  there  was  a  dis- 
tinct break-away  from  the  simplicity  and  purity 


The  Crown  Book  53 

of  the  Gospel,  both  in  the  Church  and  in  the  lives 
of  professed  Christians.  The  messages  to  the 
Churches  of  Pergamum  and  Thyatira  and  Sardis 
show  clearly  that  there  had  already  begun  a 
rubbing  out  of  the  sharp  line  of  distinction  be- 
tween the  Church  and  the  world.  The  world 
spirit  was — not  creeping  in,  but — walking  boldly 
into  the  life  of  the  Church. 

It  is  striking  to  note  the  thing  that  leads  John 
to  write  his  First  Epistle,  that  is,  the  alarming 
conditions  among  Christ's  followers.  The  spirit 
of  compromise  seems  seeping  in  at  every  crevice. 
And  worse  yet,  the  spirit  of  Antichrist,  that 
makes  such  a  savage  attack  on  Jesus,  on  the 
deity  of  His  person,  and  the  atoning  significance 
of  His  death,  this  was  openly  at  work  among 
them.^  These  conditions,  so  familiar  to  those 
who  first  read  his  little  Epistle,  are  the  con- 
tinual underscoring  of  His  intense  plea  for 
abiding. 

It  is  most  significant  that  Jude's  intense  flame- 
like Epistle  talks  entirely  about  conditions  with- 
in Church  circles.  Run  through  it  again  with 
this  fact  fresh  in  mind,  and  the  significance  of 
it  stands  out  in  a  startling  way.  Peter's  Second 
Epistle  reveals  the  same  sort  of  an  atmosphere 
seeping  in  among  the  groups  of  disciples  to 
whom  he  writes.  Not  only  was  there  doubt  and 
confusion  about  the  meaning  of  the  prophetic 
teachings,  but  even  a  sneering  and  mocking  at 
the  teaching  about  the  second  coming  of  our 
Lord. 

*I  John  ii.  18-29;  iv.  1-6. 


54  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

These  are  a  few  indications  of  how  things  were 
in  the  Church  generally  before  the  first  century 
had  closed.  It  was  a  time  of  confusion  and  com- 
promise. The  air  was  tense.  The  need  was 
critical.  It  would  seem  that  if  ever  our  Lord 
would  give  a  simple  direct  revelation  afresh,  to 
His  people,  it  would  be  in  just  such  circum- 
stances. And  it  reveals  to  us  at  once  how 
grave  things  looked  to  His  eyes,  and  how  much 
depended  on  His  followers  having  a  clear  under- 
standing of  how  things  would  work  out,  that  our 
Lord  Jesus  does  do  just  this  thing, — send  a  di- 
rect revelation  that  would  meet  just  such  a 
need. 

More  Alike  than  Different. 

It  is  most  striking  that  the  conditions  of  the 
Church  then  and  to-day  are  so  much  alike.  The 
line  between  Church  and  world  is  either  badly 
blurred,  or  quite  wiped  out.  And  this  one  fact 
throws  a  flood  of  light  upon  Church  conditions. 
Within  the  Church,  when  it  comes  to  the  matter 
of  what  its  real  purpose  of  being  is,  and  what  the 
essentials  of  faith,  the  lines  are  hopelessly 
crossed  and  tangled,  even  though  the  surface 
shows  so  much  striving  toward  at  least  a  seem- 
ing unity,  and  so  much  aggressiveness  in  action. 
The  common  absence  of  real  spiritual  power, 
that  unmistakable  moving,  like  a  breath,  of  the 
Spirit  of  God,  is  freely  admitted. 

It  is  a  painful  fact  that  membership  in  a 
Church  no  longer  gives  any  clue  to  a  man's  vital 
belief,  nor  even  to  his  moral  conduct.    There  is 


The  Crown  Book  55 

utter  confusion  about  the  practical  meaning  of 
God's  prophetic  Word,  and  what  the  actual 
outcome  of  the  present  order  will  be;  that  is, 
where  such  things  are  not  quite  dismissed  from 
consideration.  And,  stranger  yet,  indifference, 
or  an  actual  repugnance,  to  any  mention  of  the 
Lord's  return  is  the  common  thing.  It  is  not 
surprising  that  earnest  people  are  bewildered 
as  to  just  what  should  be  the  attitude  of  one 
who  would  ring  true  to  the  absent  Jesus.  It 
hurts  to  remember  that  all  this  is  the  freely  ad- 
mitted commonplace,  where  such  things  are  se- 
riously spoken  of. 

Indeed  it  is  of  intense  interest  to  note  that  just 
this  sort  of  thing  has  marked  the  whole  interval 
since  these  early  Church  days.  Broadly  the  same 
characteristics  have  marked  both  world  move- 
ment and  the  Church  movement  in  this  long 
interval.  There  is  a  unity  characterizing  the  age 
since  our  Lord  ascended.  There  have  been  dif- 
ferences, very  sharp  and  marked,  but  always  they 
have  been  differences  in  degree,  now  more  in- 
tense, now  less.  The  general  characteristics  have 
been  the  same  in  kind. 

The  need  of  the  Church  in  the  end  of  the  first 
century  is  its  need  in  the  beginning  of  the  twen- 
tieth. Surely  the  thing  of  all  things  needed  is 
a  simple,  clear,  understandable  revelation  direct 
from  our  Lord  Jesus  Himself.  It  was  needed 
then.  Clearly  it  has  been  needed  in  every  gen- 
eration since  then.  And  one  whose  pulse  is  at 
all  sensitive  to  spirit  conditions  to-day  feels  that 
surely  it  is  the  thing  needed  now. 


$6  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

And  here  it  is,  a  revelation  of  Himself, 
crowned  in  the  upper  world,  keeping  in  closest 
touch  with  things  down  in  this  world,  telling  us 
what  the  outcome  is  to  be,  and  especially  speak- 
ing of  our  attitude  toward  Himself  in  this  present 
in-between  interval. 

Usually  God's  method  with  man  is  to  give  him 
enough  of  a  revelation  of  Himself  in  nature,  and 
in  His  Word,  to  start  him  straight,  and  guide 
him  as  he  goes  to  school  with  himself  as  chief 
pupil,  with  all  of  nature  to  find  out  and  develop, 
and  so  to  get  mastery  both  of  himself  and  of 
nature  and  its  forces.  We  recognize  this  as 
the  best  school-teacher  method  for  good  self- 
development. 

But  here  something  more  seems  needed.  The 
situation  down  on  the  earth  has  gotten  badly 
mixed  up.  Even  though  Jesus  has  been  on  the 
earth,  and  has  died,  and  has  sent  down  the  Holy 
Spirit  in  such  irresistible  power,  the  situation  in 
the  world,  and  among  His  disciples,  has  gotten  so 
subtly  tangled  and  intense,  the  enemy  is  so 
viciously  and  cunningly  at  work,  that  only  one 
thing  will  meet  the  need, — a  revelation,  a  simple, 
direct,  warm  revelation  given  us  personally  by 
the  Lord  Jesus  Himself.  And  here  it  is  in  this 
little  end-book,  with  its  vision  of  the  glorified 
Jesus,  its  pleading  heart-cry  to  His  followers,  and 
its  simple  but  tremendous  outlook  into  the  fu- 
ture. 

It  would  not  be  surprising  if  such  a  book  should 
be  made  the  subject  of  special  attack  by  the  evil 
one.     It  is  not  surprising,  though  it  is  deeply 


The  Crown  Book  57 

grievous,  that  the  common  idea  about  this  book 
among  Christian  people  is  that  it  is  a  sort  of  a 
puzzle,  that  it  is  impossible  to  get  a  simple,  clear, 
workable  understanding  of  its  message.  Parts  of 
it  are  conned  over  tenderly  and  loved,  a  para- 
graph here,  a  verse  there,  and  so  on,  but  a  grasp 
of  the  one  simple  message  of  the  book  seems  not 
common,  to  put  it  mildly.  No  book  of  the  sixty- 
six  has  seemed  so  much  like  a  riddle  to  which 
no  one  knew  the  answer.  And  without  doubt  the 
full  meaning  of  much  will  be  quite  clear  only  as 
events  work  themselves  out.  Events  will  be  the 
best  exposition  of  certain  parts.  But  these  parts, 
be  it  keenly  noted,  are  not  essential  to  the  grasp 
of  the  whole  message.  God  is  intensely 
practical.  Jesus  was  too  intent  on  helping  peo- 
ple to  be  otherwise  than  practical.  He  hasn't 
changed.  He  is  too  tremendously  wrapped  up 
in  the  outworking  of  His  plans.  The  Bible  is 
wholly  a  practical  book.  And  this  crowning  end 
of  it  is  intensely  and  only  practical.  It  is  with 
the  clear  conviction  that  it  is  entirely  possible  to 
get  the  simple  grasp  of  it  that  shall  steady  our 
steps,  and  clear  our  understanding,  and  feed  our 
personal  devotion  to  the  absent  Jesus,  our  blessed 
Lord,  that  these  few  simple  quiet  talks  have  been 
put  together. 

Doing  Leads  to  Understanding. 

The  outline  of  the  book  is  very  simple.    After 
the  brief  introduction^  and  personal  greeting,^ 
*  Revelation  i.  1-3.  '  Revelation  i.  4-8. 


58  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

there  comes  the  wondrous  vision  of  the  glorified 
Jesus,  and  His  personal  message  to  John.^  He 
is  the  Living  One,  v^ho  became  dead  for  a  great 
purpose,  and  is  now  Hving,  never  to  die  again. 
He  is  seen  walking  quietly  among  the  groups  of 
his  followers,  with  eyes  of  flame,  and  heart  of 
love,  keeping  watch  over  these,  His  empowered 
witnesses  on  earth. 

And  He  tells  John  that  he  is  to  write  to  the 
groups  of  his  followers  a  threefold  message, 
a  description  of  Himself  as  just  now  seen  by 
John,  a  description  of  affairs  in  these  Churches 
as  seen  by  His  own  eyes,  and  an  account  of 
the  things  that  are  going  to  happen  on  the 
earth. 

Then  follows  this  description  of  the  Churches. 
It  is  in  a  sevenfold  personal  message  to  His 
followers  on  the  earth. ^  Then  the  vision  of 
Himself  in  heaven  as  He  steps  directly  into  the 
action  of  the  earth  to  take  possession  of  His 
crown  domain.^  Then  comes  the  account  of 
coming  happenings.  It  is  a  sevenfold  view  of  a 
terrific  moral  storm  on  the  earth,  that  will  follow 
this  advance  step  of  His  in  the  heavens.  It  is  so 
terrific  and  includes  so  much,  that  it  is  possible 
to  get  a  clear  view  of  it  and  its  sweep  only  by 
looking,  now  at  this  feature  of  it,  and  now  at 
this;  now  from  this  angle  of  vision,  and  now 
from  this  other. 

It  is  the  final  contesting  of  Christ's  crown 
claim  as  He  steps  forward  to  assert  it ;  the  final 

*  i.  9-20.  "  Chapters  ii.  and  iii. 

'  Chapters  iv.  and  v. 


The  Crown  Book  59 

outburst  of  evil  unrestrainedly  storming  itself 
out.  And  it  is  the  clearing-up  storm,  too.  There 
is  ever  the  shining  of  a  clear  light  just  beyond 
the  outer  rim  of  the  terrible  blackness  of  the 
storm  clouds.  This  takes  up  the  greater  part 
of  the  little  book,  including  chapter  six,  to  the 
close  of  chapter  eighteen. 

And  then  there  is  given  briefly  the  actual  com- 
ing to  earth  in  glory  of  the  crowned  Christ;^ 
the  new  order  of  things  under  His  personal 
reign ;  ^  a  final  crisis ;  ^  and  then  in  a  vision  of 
wondrous  winsomeness,  God  and  men  are  seen 
dwelling  together  as  one  reunited  family,  though 
still  with  a  sad  burning  reminder  of  the  old  sin- 
rebellion  as  part  of  the  picture.*  And  the  book 
closes  with  personal  paragraphs  to  John  and  to 
the  groups  of  Churches.^ 

Another  of  the  striking  things  peculiar  to 
this  book  is  the  personal  plea  that  it  be  read 
and  lived  up  to.  At  the  very  front-door  step  as 
one  starts  in  he  is  met  full  in  the  face  with  this : 
"  Blessed  is  he  that  readeth,  and  they  that  hear, 
(or  give  careful  heed  to)  the  words  of  the 
prophecy,  and  keep  the  things  that  are  written 
therein." « 

Here  at  the  very  outset  is  a  plea,  made  to 
each  one  into  whose  hands  the  little  book  may 
come,  for  a  reading,  and  a  careful  thinking  into, 
and  then,  yet  more,  a  bringing  of  the  whole 
life  up  to  the  line  of  what  is  found  here. 
The    blessing     of    God     will     rest    peculiarly 

*  xix.  i-xx.  3,  ^  XX.  4-6.  *  XX.  7-15. 

*  xxi.  i-xxii.  5.  '  xxii.  6-21.  '  i.  3- 


6o  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

upon  him  who  heeds  this  threefold  plea. 
That  man  is  moving  in  the  line  of  the  plan  of 
God. 

A  little  past  the  midway  line  of  the  book,  all 
at  once,  abruptly,  in  the  thick  of  terrible  happen- 
ings being  told,  an  unexpected  voice  comes. 
Clearly  it  is  the  Lord  Jesus  Himself  speaking.  It 
is  as  though  He  were  standing  by  all  the  time 
throughout  all  these  pages,  watching  with  a  sleep- 
less concern.  Now  He  speaks  out.  Listen: 
**  Blessed  is  he  that  watcheth/'  that  keepeth  ever 
on  the  alert  against  the  subtle  temptations,  and 
the  compromise  that  fills  the  very  air,  "  and 
keepeth  his  garments; "  ^  sleeplessly,  kneefully, 
takes  care  that  no  breath  of  evil  get  into  his  heart, 
no  taint  of  compromise  stain  his  life,  no  suspicion 
of  lukewarmness  cool  his  personal  devotion  to 
the  absent  Jesus. 

And  again,  doing  sentinel  duty  at  the  rear-end, 
is  the  same  plea.  *'  Blessed  is  he  that  keepeth  the 
words  of  the  prophecy  of  this  book."  -  Reading, 
heeding,  obeying,  watching,  living  up  to,  this  is 
the  earnest  plea  peculiar  to  this  book.  Clearly 
our  Lord  Jesus  desires  earnestly  that  it  be  read. 
And  He  expects  us  to  understand  it.  And  He 
pleads  with  us  to  live  in  the  light  of  what  He 
tells  us  here. 

He  that  willeth  to  do  shall  know  what  he  ought 
to  do.  He  that  doeth  the  thing  he  does  know 
will  know  more.  And  that  more  done  will  open 
the  door  yet  wider  into  all  the  fragrance  of  a 
strongly   obedient    life,    and    into   a  clear    and 

^  xvi.  15.  '  xxii.  7. 


The  Crown  Book  6i 

clearing  understanding  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Him- 
self. 

He  that  brings  his  life  bit  by  bit  up  to  the  level 
of  the  earnest  plea  of  this  special  revelation,  as 
bit  by  bit  it  opens  to  him,  will  find  his  under- 
standing of  it  wonderfully  clearing.  Obedience  is 
the  organ  of  understanding.  Through  it  there 
comes  clear  grasp  of  the  truth. 

A  single  recent  illustration  of  this  comes  from 
Korea,  that  land  that  gives  us  so  much  of  the 
romance  of  missions,  as  well  as  so  much  of  its 
pathos.  Dr.  James  S.  Gale,  of  Seoul,  tells  of  a 
Korean  who  had  travelled  some  hundred  miles 
to  confer  with  him  about  Christian  things.  He 
recited  to  Dr.  Gale  the  whole  of  the  Sermon 
on  the  Mount  without  slip  or  error.  After 
this  surprising  feat  of  memory,  the  mission- 
ary said  gently  that  memorizing  was  not 
enough;  the  truth  must  be  practised  in  daily 
life. 

To  his  surprise  the  Korean  quietly  said: 
**  That's  the  way  I  learned  to  memorize.  I  tried 
to  memorize,  but  it  wouldn't  stick.  So  I  hit  upon 
this  plan ;  I  would  memorize  a  verse,  then  find  a 
heathen  neighbour  and  practise  the  verse  on  him. 
Then  I  found  it  would  stick." 

That's  the  rule  for  understanding  this  revela- 
tion of  Jesus  through  John,  as  well  as  all  of  this 
inspired  Word  of  God.  This  rule  simply,  faith- 
fully, followed  will  open  up  this  little  end-book 
which  to  many  has  seemed  a  sealed  book.  He 
that  "  keepeth  the  things  "  that  are  written  here 
will  find  these  pages  opening  to  his  eyes.     He 


62  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

that  liveth  the  truth  he  does  understand  will 
understand  more  and  better,  and  so  live  in  the 
wondrous  power  of  it,  and  in  the  sweet  presence 
of  Him  who  gives  it  to  us. 


III.— A  SIGHT  OF  THE 
CROWNED  CHRIST 


Since  mine  eyes  were  fixed  on  Jesus, 
I've  lost  sight  of  all  beside, 

So   enchained  my  spirit's  vision. 
Looking  at  the  Crucified." 


"  The  Lord  Christ  passed  my  humble  cot : 
I  knew  him,  yet  I  knew  him  not; 
But  as  I  oft  had  done  before, 
I  hurried  through  my  narrow  door 
To  touch  His  garment's  hem. 

"He  drew  me  to  a  place  apart 
From  curious  crowd  and  noisy  mart; 
And  as  I  sat  there  at  His  feet 
I  caught  the  thrill  of  His  heart-beat 
Beyond  His  garment's  hem. 

"Rare   was   the   bread   He   broke    for   me, 
As  wine  the  words  He  spoke  to  me — 
New  life  surged  in,  the  old  life  died  .   .   . 
I  cannot  now  be  satisfied 
To  touch  His  garment's  hem."  * 


*  William  Norris  Burr. 


A  SIGHT  OF  THE  CROWNED 
CHRIST 

(Revelation,  Chapter  i.) 
Transfigured  by  a  Look. 

No  one  ever  had  a  sight  of  Christ's  face  and 
forgot.  No  one  ever  gets  a  sight  of  Him  and 
gets  over  it.  He  is  never  the  same  man  after 
that.    He  doesn't  want  to  be  the  same. 

A  look  into  the  face  of  Christ  is  transforming. 
You  see  Him;  and  you  can  never  be  the  man 
you  have  been  and  be  content.  A  change  comes. 
You  want  a  change.  You  must  have  it.  This 
longing  is  the  beginning  of  the  deeper  change. 
You  can  never  be  content  again  with  being  the 
man  you  have  been. 

It  has  always  been  so.  It  always  will  be  so. 
For  this  is  the  natural  thing.  In  the  dawning 
twilight  of  Eden  God  looked  into  the  face  of  the 
man  he  had  fashioned.  He  drew  very  close  to 
him,  close  enough  to  breathe  his  own  breath  into 
his  face.  And  the  man  looked  out  into  God's  face, 
and  took  on  God's  likeness.  So  he  became  his 
own  real  self,  as  originally  planned. 

But  while  man  was  yet  young,  sin  looked  him 
in  the  face.  And  the  man  looked  at  sin  with  an 
evil  longing  look.  And  in  that  look  he  took  m 
65 


66  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

some  of  what  he  saw.  He  was  marred.  The 
God  image  was  hurt.  He  was  not  the  same  man. 
And  he  knew  it.  He  felt  it.  His  eyes  were 
never  the  same  after  that  exchange  of  looks  with 
sin. 

But  God  helped  him.  He  didn't  go  away.  He 
came  closer  for  the  sake  of  the  sin-hurt  eyes. 
And  whenever  man  has  looked  into  that  won- 
drous God-face,  even  though  seeing  dimly  and 
indistinctly,  something  within  him  makes  a  great 
bound.  He  recognizes  the  original  of  his  own 
natural  self.  And  he  catches  fire  at  the  sight  A 
holy  discontent  springs  up  within. 

**  Couldst  thou  in  rision  see 

Thyself  the  man  God  meant, 
Thou   never  more  couldst  be 
The  man  thou  art — content'* 

But  you  have  to  see  Jesus  as  He  was  in  His. 
humanity  to  see  yourself  the  man  God  meant. 
And  you  have  to  see  Jesus  as  He  is  now  to  see 
the  God  who  meant  you  to  be  like  Himself. 

It  has  always  been  so.  This  has  been  God's 
simple  method  with  men  He  would  use.  He  has 
wooed  and  then  wooed  more,  and  a  bit  longer, 
gently,  persistently,  up  and  away  and  apart 
until  at  last  the  man's  eyes  were  trained  away 
from  the  lower  glare  enough  to  see  the  real 
things. 

Then  in  some  vision  of  the  night,  whose  dark- 
ness helped  hold  back  the  lower  earth  lights, 
God  has  looked  a  man  in  the  face  once  again.  Or, 
perhaps  in  open  day   there  came  to   him  that 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      67 

which  he  could  not  describe.  But  in  his  inner 
spirit  he  knew  there  was  One  with  him  whom 
yet  his  outer  eyes  could  not  see,  but  who  could 
not  be  more  real  if  his  outer  eyes  did  see. 

And  in  that  presence  there  was  a  mingling  of 
exquisite  tenderness  and  of  limitless  power  that 
was  overawing.  Inconceivable  purity  and  yet 
such  an  unspeakable  graciousness  seemed  blended 
in  this  presence.  And  the  man  seeing  was  melted 
in  his  innermost  being  with  the  sense  of  tender- 
ness, and  bowed  in  awe  to  the  lowest  dust  in 
the  sense  of  overwhelming  power.  Those  who 
have  seen  will  understand  how  poor  the  words 
are  to  tell  the  story.  And  those  who  have 
not  may  wonder  a  bit  until  they,  too,  have 
seen. 


Some  Transfigured  Men. 

This  it  was  that  transformed  that  man  of  the 
early  dawnlight  named  Enoch,  the  seventh  from 
Adam.  He  was  the  head  of  the  leading  family  of 
the  race,  the  racial  leader.  He  had  lived  well  on 
into  the  seventh  decade  of  his  life. 

Then  the  change  came.  He  recognized  a 
Presence  with  him,  one  day.  That  One  unseen 
by  unseeing  eyes  became  real  to  him  and  then 
more  real.  He  yielded  to  His  wooing.  He  com- 
panioned with  Him  daily.  This  came  to  be  the 
realest  thing.  And  he  was  transformed  by  it. 
He  grew  constantly  less  like  what  he  had  been, 
and  more  like  what  he  was  originally  meant  to 
be,  like  his  Companion.     Constant  contact   re- 


68  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

stored  the  original  likeness.  He  was  trans- 
formed before  men's  eyes,  changed  over  from 
within. 

Then  one  day  the  transforming  forces  had 
gone  so  far  that  he  was  transferred  to  the  upper 
levels,  where  all  see  His  face,  and  his  likeness 
shines  out  of  all  faces.  He  never  got  over  the 
sight  that  came  to  him  that  early  day. 

It  was  this  that  wooed  the  man  of  Ur  away 
from  his  ancestral  home  to  be  a  lonely  pilgrim,  a 
stranger  among  strangers.  Nothing  less  or  else 
could  have  broken  the  early  attachments,  the 
strongest  of  the  East.  That  winsome  wooing 
Presence  became  to  him  stronger  than  the  strong- 
est human  attachments  of  his  family  and  home 
land. 

This  it  was  that  steadied  him  through  the 
loneliness,  the  homelessness,  the  disappoint- 
ments, the  long  delays,  until  it  was  the  image  of 
a  new  man,  a  transformed  man,  a  faith-begotten 
man,  that  at  length  looked  at  him  out  of  the  eyes 
of  his  only  begotten.  This  it  was  that  steadied 
him  through  the  hardest  test  of  all  with  that 
only  begotten,  the  fire  test  on  Moriah.  And  that 
made  the  transformation  yet  fuller.  For  so  he 
grew  the  liker  him  to  whose  presence  he  insisted 
on  yielding  as  each  test  came. 

So  it  was  with  that  rare  student  of  Egypt  and 
Arabia.  Trained  in  the  best  that  man  could  give 
in  the  University  of  the  Nile,  and  then  further 
trained  by  absence  from  man  in  the  University 
of  the  Desert,  alone  with  sheep  and  stars,  shift- 
ing sand  and  immovable  rock,  he  wasn't  ready  for 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      69 

his  task  yet.  He  was  well  trained  but  not  yet 
transformed. 

The  fires  had  to  be  kindled,  purifying,  melt- 
ing, fusing  fires.  And  only  fire  kindles  fire.  The 
fire  of  the  unburnt  bush  told  him  first  of  a  new 
kind  of  fire,  uncatalogued  on  the  Nile.  The  fire 
of  a  Presence  burned  daily,  not  consuming  him, 
but  only  the  dross  in  him,  as  he  led  his  race 
from  Egypt  to  Sinai,  out  from  the  slavery  of  men 
up  to  the  freedom  of  the  presence  of  God.  And 
then  for  six  weeks,  twice  over,  he  was  in  the 
Presence  of  Flame  on  the  Mount. 

This  it  was  that  utterly  changed  him  into  the 
strongly  gentle,  patient,  tender-hearted,  wise  man 
who  taught  and  trained,  lived  with  and  led,  the 
immature  men  and  women  whom  God  would 
weld  into  a  nation,  a  God-nation.  He  never  got 
over  those  two  long  visits  to  the  Mount,  nor  has 
the  world. 

It  was  nothing  else  than  this,  long  years  later, 
that  made  the  rugged  man  of  the  deserts  brave 
the  traitorous  Ahab  in  his  luxurious,  licentious 
court.  Without  it,  the  sight  obscured,  the  vision 
lost,  he  is  a  coward  fleeing  like  a  whipped  dog 
before  a  bad  woman,  thinking  only  of  saving 
his  own  skin.  It  showed  himself,  his  weak, 
cowardly  self,  to  himself. 

A  fresh  vision  that  early  morning  in  the  mouth 
of  the  desert  cave  made  the  yet  deeper  more 
radical  transformation.  That  unutterably  gentle 
sound  of  stillness,  too  exquisite  to  be  told,  only 
to  be  felt  by  a  spirit  in  tune,  that  left  him  not  a 
whit  less  willing  to  brave  danger  than  before, 


70  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

but  made  over  now  into  another  sort,  like  him 
whose  Presence  in  the  cave  so  melted  him  down. 

This  new,  gentled,  mellowed,  strengthened  Eli- 
jah reappears  in  the  man  who  received  the  birth- 
right portion  of  his  spirit.  We  know  the  new 
Elijah  by  the  spirit  that  swayed  Elisha.  The  old 
spirit,  fiercely  denouncing,  calling  down  fire, 
slaying  the  priests,  but  with  no  grief-broken  heart 
under  these  stern  needful  things, — this  we  think 
of  familiarly  as  the  Elijah  spirit. 

The  new  spirit,  healing,  teaching,  sympathizing, 
leading,  feeding,  fathering,  the  greatness  of  gen- 
tleness and  patience,  these  characteristics  of  Eli- 
jah's prophetic  heir  tell  of  the  deep  radical  trans- 
formation by  the  wondrous  unseen  Presence  that 
early  morning  in  the  mouth  of  the  cave.  This  is 
the  birthright  gift  of  Elijah  to  Elisha.  Elijah 
had  a  spirit-sight  of  God,  and  he  never  got  over 
it.  He  became  like  Him  into  whose  face  he 
looked. 


Heart  Stimulant  for  the  Brain. 

But  time  fails,  and  words  fail  immensely  more, 
to  tell  this  thing.  Let  him  who  would  know  that 
transforming  sight  get  quietly  alone  with  Isaiah 
in  the  temple,  and  on  bent  knees  linger  unhur- 
riedly, and  listen,  and  watch,  and  breathe  out  his 
prayer,  and  strongly  wait  until  something  of 
the  same  brooding  Presence  be  discerned  that 
transformed  this  young  Hebrew  messenger  of 
God. 

Then  let  him  get  alone  with  the  Moses  of  the 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       71 

New  Testament.  For  there  is  no  man  who  was 
so  utterly  transformed,  and  so  quickly,  as  the 
man  on  the  Damascus  road.  The  whole  course 
of  his  character  and  life  was  radically  changed 
as  by  a  lightning  touch.  This  is  the  most  strik- 
ing illustration  of  all.  No  man  so  reveals  in  him- 
self the  tremendous  transforming  power  there 
is  in  the  sight  of  the  Christ  as  does  this  high- 
strung  son  of  the  Hebrew  race. 

But — words  are  such  lame  things.  They  can- 
not tell  the  story  here.  They  are  all  one  has 
to  use.  Yet  they'll  never  be  understood  except 
as  the  light  of  experience  shines  upon  them. 
When  any  one  attempts  to  talk  of  such  a  thing  as 
this  of  seeing  God  or  Christ,  his  words  seem  so 
poor  and  lame  and  under  the  mark  by  the  man 
who  has  had  something  of  the  vision.  And  they 
either  are  meaningless  and  uninteresting,  or  else 
they  seem  overstated,  and  quite  beyond  the  mark 
to  one  who  has  had  no  inkling  in  experience  of 
the  thing  itself. 

I  recall  distinctly  the  experience  of  a  Danish 
friend  in  Copenhagen.  She  had  been  trying  to 
read  in  English  a  certain  devotional  book,  but 
said  she  couldn't  seem  to  grasp  the  meaning  of 
the  English  words.  They  eluded  her,  and  so  the 
book  didn't  help  her  much. 

Then  she  went  through  a  time  of  sore  stress 
of  spirit  In  the  sickness  and  death  of  her  mother. 
A  new  experience  of  the  nearness  of  God  came 
to  her.  And  then  happening — as  it  seemed — to 
pick  up  the  English  book  again  she  was  amazed 
and  delighted  to  find  how  much  better  and  more 


72  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

quickly  she  knew  the  words  and  sensed  the  mean- 
ing. 

It  is  only  as  the  heart  is  fired  that  the  brain 
awakens.  Experience  gives  the  meaning  to  lan- 
guage. Without  experience  it  is  a  dead  language 
in  meaning  even  though  it  be  one's  own  mother 
tongue.  Only  the  man  who  has  caught  some- 
thing of  the  vision  of  Christ's  face  can  under- 
stand the  strong  words  used  in  talking  of  such 
a  vision. 

It  is  most  striking  to  notice  that  even  when 
the  glory  of  God's  presence  was  hidden  beneath 
human  wrappings  in  Jesus  it  still  could  be  felt. 
Men  felt  that  presence  though  they  knew  not 
just  what  it  was  they  felt,  nor  why.  When  the 
glory  came  yet  closer  in  the  coming  of  Jesus,  it 
must  be  well  covered  up  for  the  sake  of  men's 
eyes,  that  they  might  not  go  blind  at  once;  but 
its  power  of  attraction  could  not  be  wholly  hid. 

So  really  human  was  Jesus  in  the  outer  cir- 
cumstance of  His  life  that  His  brothers  of  the 
home  couldn't  believe  he  was  essentially  differ- 
ent from  themselves.  But  the  attraction  of  that 
presence  was  felt  constantly  even  through  the 
human  hiding  of  it. 

John  of  the  Wilderness  instinctively  recog- 
nized that  here  was  more  than  the  man  he  saw, 
and  so  obeyed  His  word.  The  crowds  gathered 
eagerly  in  the  Jordan  bottoms  in  even  greater 
numbers  than  to  hear  John,  drawn  by  a  power 
they  felt  they  must  yield  to,  and  did  yield  to 
gladly. 

From  the  first  the  crowds  gathered  thick  about 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      73 

Him,  Jewish  aristocrat,  Samaritan  half-breed 
and  sinful  outcast  jostling  elbows  in  their  eager- 
ness to  hear,  drawn  by  a  power  they  could  feel, 
but  could  not  understand  any  more  than  they 
could  withstand  it.  The  children  loved  his  pres- 
ence and  touch. 

The  bad  in  life  were  as  resistlessly  drawn  up 
to  a  new  life  as  the  Greeks  were  drawn  from 
clear  beyond  the  blue  waters  of  the  Hellespont 
into  His  presence.  The  crowds  were  irresist- 
ibly drawn  to  follow  on  that  last  eventful 
journey  to  Jerusalem  even  while  they  felt 
"  afraid." 

It  was  the  sight  of  the  glory  on  the  Mount 
that  drew  faithful  John  in  with  Jesus,  and  held 
him  steady  that  awful  night  in  palace  and  court- 
yard, and  that  later  brought  poor  blasphemous 
Peter  back  for  forgiveness.  The  two  walking  to 
Emmaus  found  their  hearts  all  aflame,  though 
they  supposed  it  was  only  the  chance  stranger 
of  the  roadway  they  listened  to. 

Even  those  who  hated  Him  were  compelled  to 
recognize  the  wondrous  power  of  His  presence. 
The  Nazareth  hands  that  itched  to  seize  Him 
were  restrained  by  His  presence  as  He  passed 
through  their  midst.  Ten  times  did  the  Jeru- 
salem crowds  attempt  his  life,  and  ten  times  were 
they  restrained  by  a  power  in  Him  that  they 
could  neither  understand  nor  withstand. 

The  men  officially  empowered  to  arrest  Him 
return  empty-handed,  confessing  the  overawing 
power  of  His  words.  That  last  week  the  leaders 
that  were  hotly  plotting  His  death  felt  the  strange 


74  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

restraint  of  His  presence  while  He  quietly  sat 
in  their  very  midst,  and  swayed  the  crowds. 

In  the  garden  soldiers  and  priests  alike  were 
felled  to  the  ground  by  the  power  of  His  pres- 
ence. So  it  always  has  been.  No  one  has  ever 
had  a  sight  of  that  Face,  and  gotten  used  to  it, 
or  gotten  over  it. 


A  Fresh  Vision  Needed. 

But  the  thing  we  are  specially  needing  to-day 
is  a  sight  of  Christ  as  He  is  now.  It  seems  a 
bit  strange  that  we  don't  get  this  more.  One  his- 
toric Church  has  Him  fastened  to  a  cross,  never 
freed  from  the  old  fastenings.  Another  has  Him 
set  in  picture  frame,  behind  glass.  And  the  mul- 
titudes prostrate  themselves  and  reverently  kiss 
the  glass. 

In  widely  differing  Churches  He  seems  quite 
covered  up  out  of  sight  by  classical  ritual,  beau- 
tiful music,  and  impressive  stately  service.  The 
crowds  gather  and  listen  and  bow  low  in  hushed 
stillness.  But,  apparently,  Him  they  see  not,  else 
how  different  their  conduct  as  they  come  out,  and 
their  lives. 

And  yet  as  I  have  mingled  with  the  worship- 
pers in  Catholic  Churches  in  the  south  of  Europe, 
in  Greek  Churches  in  Russia,  and  in  congrega- 
tions of  the  Church  of  England  classed  as  "  high," 
I  have  been  caught  by  faces  here  and  there  in  the 
crowd  that  clearly  were  reaching  out  hungrily 
for  Him,  and  were  having  some  sort,  some  real 
sort,  of  touch  with  Him,  too.    Yet  it  seemed  to  be 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      75 

in  spite  of  surroundings.  The  insistence  of  their 
hunger  pierces  through  these  to  Him.  He  seems 
hidden  from  the  crowd  by  them. 

Scholarly  orthodox  theologians  talk  learnedly 
about  Him,  but  Himself  as  He  walked  among  us 
and  as  He  is  now,  Him  it  would  seem  that  they 
see  not,  at  least  not  enough  to  burn  through  and 
burn  out  and  burn  up  and  send  men  out  aflame 
with  the  Jesus-passion.  Philosophies  about  Him 
that  are  classed  as  "  liberal  "  and  put  attractively, 
yet  have  nothing  of  the  burn  in  them  that  reveals 
Himself. 

The  more  modern  Church  of  the  more  west- 
em  world  seems  to  have  gotten  a  new  lease  of 
aggressiveness  in  service,  a  new  intensity  in  ac- 
tivities so  numerous  as  to  be  a  bit  bewildering 
sometimes.  The  wheels  whir  busily  and  noisily. 
You  feel  them.  But  Him,  the  unseen  presence 
that  makes  you  reverently  wrap  your  face  up 
out  of  sight,  and  stand  with  awed  heart  to  listen, 
Him  we  seem  not  to  see. 

The  wondrous  quiet  Voice  that  makes  your 
heart  burn  within  you  with  a  burning  that 
cleanses  and  mellows  and  melts  down,  that  we 
seem  to  hear  only  by  getting  away  from  the  noise 
of  the  whirring  wheels  into  some  quiet  corner. 

There  are  in  every  Church  and  nation  those 
who  seem  to  have  the  close  personal  touch  with 
Himself.  Their  faces  and  daily  lives  show  the 
marks.  Their  lips  may  not  say  so  much,  for  they 
who  see  most  can  say  least  of  what  they  see.  But 
the  marks  in  the  life  are  unmistakable. 

Yet  even  here  the  sight  of  Christ  emphasizes 


76  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

chiefly  the  personal  side,  what  He  is  personally 
to  them.  And  what  a  blessed  side  that  is  only 
they  who  know  it  know.  They  think  of  Him  as 
a  personal  Saviour,  and  the  heart  glows.  They 
see  Him  at  the  Father's  right  hand  interceding, 
and  gratefully  remember  that  He  will  forget  no 
name  where  there  is  a  trusting  heart.  They  think 
of  the  Holy  Spirit,  the  other  Jesus,  Jesus'  other 
self,  always  "alongside  to  help,"  alongside  in- 
side. And  they  practise  letting  Him  work  out  the 
Christ-likeness  within  themselves. 

And  all  this  is  blessed,  only  blessed.  They  see 
Him  in  His  personal  relation  to  themselves.  But 
there's  something  more  than  this.  No  one  knew 
more  of  this  blessed  personal  part  than  John. 
But  John  saw  more  than  this  on  Patmos.  He  saw 
Christ  as  He  is  now. 

This  is  clearly  a  new  sight  of  Christ.  It  was 
new  to  John.  It  would  seem  to  be  new  to  us. 
It  is  new  in  the  pages  of  this  book.  It  is  some- 
thing dififerent  from  any  sight  seen  before.  In 
the  Gospels  we  see  Jesus  the  Man.  In  carpenter 
shop  and  little  whitewashed  stone  cottage,  in  the 
ministering  life  clear  from  the  Jordan  bottoms  to 
the  healing  touch  at  Gethsemane's  gate,  and  in 
the  suffering  clear  up  to  the  ninth  hour  of  that 
fateful  day  He  is  the  Man,  one  of  ourselves, 
though  clearly  more  even  in  His  humanity  than 
the  humanity  we  are. 

On  the  Transfiguration  Mount  the  favoured 
inner  three,  the  leaders,  see  the  glory  within 
shining  out  through  the  Man.  So  bewildered  are 
they  that  the  chief  impression  that  remains  is  of 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       77 

a  blinding  brightness.  Yet  this  is  up  on  a  high 
mountain  far  away  from  the  crowd,  and  from 
the  haunts  of  men. 

As  Stephen  is  being  stoned  his  eyes  are  opened 
to  see  the  Son  of  Man  standing  in  glory  up  at  the 
Father's  right  hand.  The  Damascus  traveller 
sees  an  overpowering  burst  of  glory  out  of  the 
blue  and  hears  a  voice  speaking.  In  the  epistles 
Paul  pictures  Him  seated  at  the  Father's  right 
hand  with  an  authority  greater  than  any  other. 
All  the  power  He  has  is  placed  at  the  disposal  of 
His  followers  on  the  earth.  He  Himself  is  above 
in  the  glory.^ 

But  in  this  very  end  of  the  Book  John  is  given 
a  new  sight  of  Christ.  He  sees  Him  as  He  is 
now.  That  is  to  say,  this  is  the  sight  of  Christ 
as  He  is  now  characteristically .  It  is  the  distinct- 
ive sight  that  stands  out  above  all  these  others. 

He  is  at  one's  right  hand  in  closest  personal 
relation,  through  His  Holy  Spirit.  He  is  at  the 
Father's  right  hand  in  glory  waiting  expectantly 
till  the  time  is  ripe  for  the  next  direct  move  on 
the  earth.  But  there's  more  than  these.  There's 
a  sight  of  Him  that  overshadows  these.  It  is 
the  characteristic  sight  that  lets  us  see  Him  as 
He  is  peculiarly  now  in  His  relation  to  affairs  on 
the  earth. 

Christ  as  He  Is  Now. 

This  new  sight  of  Christ  is  the  heart  and  soul 
of  this  crowning  book,  this  end-book  of  the  Book. 
*  Notably  Ephesians  i.  20-23. 


78  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

It  was  out  of  this  sight  that  this  end-book 
grew.  It  is  written  wholly  under  the  spell  of 
this  new  sight  of  Christ.  It  is  a  revelation  both 
of  Jesus  Christ  and  by  Jesus  Christ;  first  of, 
then  by. 

John  begins  his  story  by  telling  that  he  had 
gotten  such  a  revelation,  and  of  the  special  bless- 
ing attached  to  reading  and  fitting  one's  life  to  it.^ 
Then  foUows  his  salutation  to  those  for  whom 
the  revelation  was  given,  and  the  book  written.* 
It  is  peculiarly  a  Church  book.  Its  message  'is 
not  peculiarly  for  individual  followers,  but  for 
groups  of  believers  gathered  together  as 
Churches. 

The  salutation  is  absorbed  with  the  One  whom 
he  has  seen  in  the  vision,  what  He  has  done  for 
us  in  shedding  His  blood,  and  that  He  is  actu- 
ally coming  again.  ''  Behold  He  cometh  with  the 
clouds ;  and  every  eye  shall  see  Him,  and  they 
that  pierced  Him."  The  Jew  is  specifically  des- 
ignated: the  coming  has  special  significance  for 
the  Jewish  nation.  And  all  the  people  of  the 
earth  shall  penitently  mourn  as  they  see  Him. 
And  then  like  an  endorsing  signature  from  the 
One  of  whom  he  is  writing  comes  the  sentence : 
"  I  am  the  Alpha  and  the  Omega,  saith  the  Lord 
God,  who  is  and  who  was,  and  who  cometh,  the 
Almighty  One." 

Then  comes  the  new  sight  of  the  crowned 
Christ.^    It  was  on  a  Lord's  day.    John  was  on 

*  Revelation  i.  1-3.  '  Revelation  i.  4-8. 

'  Revelation  i.  9-20. 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       79 

the  lonely  sea-girt  isle  of  Patmos.  He  was  alone, 
brooding  probably  over  some  bit  of  the  Word  of 
God,  and  about  the  Jesus  of  whom  he  had  been 
so  earnestly  testifying.  It  was  these  that  had 
brought  him  to  his  lonely  island  prison.  These 
ever  burned  within  him,  the  wondrous  written 
Word,  the  immensely  more  wondrous  Word 
made  flesh,  of  whom  he  had  written,  the  Word 
that  was  God  and  became  a  Man  and  walked 
the  will  of  God. 

And  as  he  brooded  he  became  conscious  of  the 
Spirit  of  God  overshadowing  him,  gentle  as  the 
soft  breeze,  noiseless  as  the  fragrant  dew,  mighty 
as  an  enveloping  presence  that  filled  his  being 
and  had  possession  of  him. 

Then  a  voice  spake  and  the  tone  of  authority 
in  it  was  unmistakable.  "  What  thou  seest, 
write."  He  was  to  see  something.  He  was  to 
tell  what  he  saw.  There's  a  delightful  touch  of 
the  simplicity  of  natural  speech  here.  He  turned 
to  see  the  voice.  And  he  saw  Him  who  was  the 
voice  of  God  to  him.  Then  the  sight  is  told  in 
the  same  simplicity  of  speech. 

There  is  a  group  of  candlesticks,  light-holders, 
made  of  gold.  And  in  the  midst  of  the  group 
there  is  some  One  standing.  He  is  in  outer 
form  like  a  man.  But  there  is  such  an  overpow- 
ering sense  of  divine  glory  that  John  falls  on  his 
face  as  one  dead.  Yet  through  all  this  over- 
whelming experience  the  impression  of  a  man 
stands  unmistakably  out. 

With  keen,  quick  glance  John  takes  in  head  and 
hair,  eyes  and  feet,  voice  and  hands,  mouth  and 


8o  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

face.  A  simple,  natural  man  in  every  outer  par- 
ticular like  himself,  a  brother  man,  wearing 
man's  garb  and  girdle.  This  is  the  first  impres- 
sion indelibly  stamped  on  John's  mind. 

But  there's  more,  ah,  much  more  than  a  man 
in  this  man !  This  is  the  stupendous  part.  There 
is  some  One,  other  than  man,  and  more  than 
man,  possessing  this  man.  The  divine  fills  the 
human.  It  is  this  sense  of  the  glory  filling  the 
man  that  is  so  overpowering  to  John. 

A  glorious  presence  overshadows  the  man  and 
shines  out  of  Him,  but  never  obhterates  nor 
makes  the  man  less.  That  indescribable  glory 
within  shining  out  through  the  man  magnifies 
every  part  of  His  human  being.  The  head  and 
hair  are  white,  not  like  a  pale  or  painted  white, 
but  a  transparent  whiteness,  an  intense  search- 
ing, glowing  light  shining  out  from  Him  through 
the  human  head  and  hair. 

The  eyes  are  as  a  flame  of  pure  fire,  the  feet 
like  melting  metal  glowing  in  fire.  And  the 
whole  countenance  was  as  the  sun  in  its  noon- 
time strength  shining  out  of  a  rainless,  cloudless 
sky.  Humanity  enveloped  in  deity,  yet  remain- 
ing true,  full  humanity.  God  within  man  im- 
measurably more  than  man,  yet  not  overwhelm- 
ing, not  disturbing  nor  obliterating,  any  part  of 
his  humanity,  rather  making  every  part  stand 
out  more  distinctly. 

Is  this  incidentally  a  kind  of  parable?  Is  it 
something  like  this  on  an  immensely  humbler 
scale  that  was  meant  for  us  men  ?  God  the  Holy 
Spirit  dwelling  in  a  man.     He  the  chief  one, 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       8i 

the  divine  one,  yet  expressing  Himself  through 
the  man,  and  doing  it  fully  to  meet  the  need  of 
the  hour.  His  presence  magnifying,  vitalizing, 
and  using  every  human  power,  yet  Himself  the 
dominant  personality. 

It  is  most  striking  to  note  that  this  is  the 
same  in  principle  as  every  appearance  of  God  in 
the  Old  Testament  pages.  Sometimes  He  talked 
with  men  when  there  is  no  suggestion  made  of 
any  appearance  or  of  what  the  appearance  was 
like.  But  wherever  the  appearance  is  spoken 
of  it  is  always  either  fire  or  some  touch  of  the 
human  kind  or  both. 

In  Eden  He  walks  and  speaks,  two  human 
things.  He  talks  with  Abraham  as  a  man  talks, 
and  ratified  the  covenant  by  passing  fire  through 
the  pieces  of  the  covenant  sacrifice.^  It  is  as 
a  simple,  natural  man  appearing  at  Abraham's 
tent  door  that  He  talks  about  Sodom.  It  is  a 
human  voice  speaking  about  Isaac,  though  no 
appearance  is  mentioned.  Moses  sees  a  flaming 
bush,  and  hears  a  voice  in  the  desert,  and  sees 
a  whole  mount  aflame  while  a  voice  speaks  at 
Sinai. 

And  so  it  was  always :  the  fiery  presence-cloud 
in  the  Wilderness,  Joshua's  Captain  taking  com- 
mand, Manoah's  angel  ascending  in  the  flame  of 
the  altar,  the  voice  in  the  night  heard  by  Sam- 
uel, the  flooding  of  Tabernacle  and  Temple  with 
the  glory-presence,  Carmel's  fire  descending, 
Elijah's  *'  still  small  voice,"  Isaiah's  vision  of 
glory  and  the  voice,  Ezekiel's  man  of  flame  speak- 

*  Genesis  xv. 


82  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

ing,  and  Daniel's,  both  of  the  latter  two  akin  to 
this  Revelation  appearance. 

But  there  is  a  distinctness  and  a  fulness  of 
description  here  greater  than  at  any  previous 
time,  yet  the  same  essential  thing  as  at  every 
appearance  of  God  in  Old  Testament  pages.  The 
coming  of  Jesus  among  us  has  brought  God 
closer  to  us  and  made  Him  mean  more.  Jesus 
was  God  coming  closer  and  in  a  way  that  we 
could  understand  better  and  take  hold  of  more 
easily. 

The  Identifying  Mark. 

But  let  us  reverently  look  a  little  closer  that 
we  may  understand  yet  better.  There  are  cer- 
tain characteristics  of  this  Man  of  Fire  that  are 
allowed  to  stand  sharply  out  here.  We  arc 
meant  to  look  at  them.  This  is  part  of  the 
purpose  in  the  heart  of  Christ  in  letting  us  sec 
Him  as  He  is  here. 

The  sense  of  purity  is  intenser  than  can  be  put 
into  words.  Fire  is  pure.  There  is  nothing  so 
pure.  It  resists  impurity.  It  burns  it  up.  It 
is  most  significant  that  this  is  the  one  thing  fa- 
miliar to  us  that  always  accompanies  the  presence 
of  God  as  He  appears  to  men.  It  is  always  in 
fire  whether  to  speak  His  message  of  peace  and 
love  or  to  remove  the  impurity  of  evil. 

Our  God  is  a  consuming  fire.  Yet  fire  only 
consumes  what  can't  stand  its  flame.  The  fire 
reveals  purity  and  makes  pure.  God  is  pure. 
The  presence  within  the  man  looked  out  in  eyes 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      83 

of  flame,  in  a  countenance  like  the  sun,  and  feet 
like  molten  brass  glowing  in  a  furnace.  There 
could  be  no  stronger  statement  of  purity  than 
this. 

Then  there  is  an  overwhelming  sense  of 
authority.  That  seems  the  human  word  to  use, 
though  the  word  seems  to  tell  so  much  less  than 
John  felt.  John  feels  it  more  than  he  can  tell 
it.  He  cannot  tell  it  in  words.  His  limp  figure 
lying  flat  on  the  earth  tells  what  words  never 
can.  He  had  seen  the  glory  outshining  in  the 
Transfiguration  Mount,  but  this  is  unspeakably 
beyond  that. 

There  was  a  voice  like  a  trumpet.  It  com- 
manded John  to  write.  It  says :  "  I  became  dead, 
and,  behold !  I  am  alive  forever  more."  It  is  an 
authority  over  life  to  yield  it  up,  and  over  death 
to  put  it  to  death,  and  call  life  back,  never  again 
to  be  touched  by  the  finger  of  death.  No  such 
authority  is  known  among  men  to-day.  And  this 
is  further  emphasized  in  the  quiet  words :  "  I 
have  the  keys — the  control — of  death  and  of  the 
whole  spirit  world." 

But  immensely  more  than  all  this  to  John  was 
the  intense  feeling  of  majesty  which  completely 
overpowered  him.  The  sense  of  authority  was 
overwhelming.  The  items  in  the  description  can 
thus  be  catalogued,  but  it  is  impossible  to  get 
the  overwhelming  sense  of  majestic  authority  that 
came  to  John,  except  as  he  got  it, — ^by  a  sight, 
something  of  a  sight  of  this  great  crowned 
Christ. 

But  who  is  this?    Is  this  not  merely  Ezekiel's 


84  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

vision  repeated?^  He  saw  just  such  a  vision, 
one  in  the  Ukeness  of  a  man,  enveloped  in  fire, 
and  sitting  on  a  throne.  And  the  effect  was  the 
same  as  Ezekiel  lies  flat  on  his  face.  Is  it  not 
the  same  as  Daniel  saw?^  A  man  clothed  in 
linen,  aflame  with  inner  fire,  and  the  same  au- 
thoritative voice,  and  Daniel  in  a  deep  sleep  of 
awe-stricken  stupor  with  face  on  the  ground? 
He  does  indeed  seem  to  be  the  same.  The  de- 
scriptions tally  remarkably. 

But  listen.  He  speaks.  And  the  sense  of  ter- 
rifying authority  in  the  voice  that  spake  is  gentled 
to  John's  tense  ear  in  the  quiet  words  that  come. 
Like  the  loving  words  that  came  to  Daniel's 
quaking  heart  is  the  personal  message  that  came 
to  John, — "  Fear  not."  And  with  the  words,  as 
ever,  come  the  new  sense  of  stilling  peace  within. 
"  I  am  the  First  and  the  Last,  and  the  Living 
One." 

Still  it  may  be  EzekieFs  Man  even  yet,  or 
Daniel's.  But  listen :  "  and  I  became  dead/' 
Ah!  this  identifies  Him.  Now  we  know  for  the 
first  time  that  this  Man  of  Flame  is  Jesus  our 
Brother-man.  The  cross  becomes  the  mark  of 
identification.  The  form  of  the  words  as  spoken 
fits  in  with  the  sense  of  authority.  With  great 
strength  of  heart  in  carrying  out  a  great  pur- 
pose He  "became  dead." 

This  is  Ezekiel's  Man  and  Daniel's  and  more, 
unspeakably  more.  The  Man  they  saw  has  lived 
amongst  us  for  a  generation  of  time,  and  then 
given  His  life  clear  out  for  us.     He  has  be- 

*  Ezekiel  i.  26-28.  *  Daniel  x.  5-9. 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       85 

come  more  in  coming  as  Jesus.  He  has  taken 
human  experience  and  suffering  up  into  Him- 
self. He  was  Creator.  He  has  become  more — 
Saviour. 

There  is  the  same  purity  and  authority  speak- 
ing out  here  as  there.  But  here  is  love  speaking 
out  as  never  was  spoken  out  before.  Here  is 
love  lived  out;  aye,  here  love  is  died  out,  and 
never  living  so  much  as  when  dying.  Here  is 
love  putting  death  to  death  for  us.  Purity  and 
authority  fastened  on  a  cross!  This  is  love 
such  as  man  had  never  known,  and  God  never 
shown  before.  Calvary  lets  us  see  the  love  that 
burned  in  the  purity  and  controlled  in  the 
authority. 

John's  Man  is  Ezekiers  and  Daniel's,  but  with 
the  love  shining  out  through  purity  and  author- 
ity, and  outshining  both.  Yet  that  love  is  the 
purity  and  authority  combined  in  action.  We 
don't  know  love  only  as  we  know  God.  And 
we  don't  know  God  only  as  we  know  Jesus  not 
living  merely  but  pouring  out  His  life  for  men. 
This  is  love — that  Man,  that  God-man,  but  with 
the  God-glory  hidden  within,  using  all  His 
authority  over  His  life  to  fasten  His  purity  on  a 
cross  with  the  thorns  of  our  sin,  and  then  throt- 
tling death  and  bringing  up  a  new  sort  of  death- 
less life  for  us.    This — He — is  love. 

The  Outstanding  Characteristic. 

But  we  haven't  gotten  to  the  heart  of  this 
yet.     There  is  immensely  more  here  than  even 


86  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

this.  The  distinctive  thing,  the  characteristic 
thing  in  this  sight  of  Christ,  is  yet  to  be  noticed. 
All  of  this  can  be  gotten  from  other  sights  of 
Christ.  But  notice  now  keenly  where  this  Man 
of  Fire  is.  For  this  is  the  distinctive  thing.  He 
is  not  up  in  the  heavens,  as  in  Ezekiel.  He  has 
not  come  on  a  special  errand,  as  in  Daniel's  ex- 
perience.^ He  is  walking  down  on  the  earth. 
His  whole  concern  is  about  affairs  on  the  earth. 

But  note  where  He  is  on  earth :  not  in  Jerusa- 
lem, the  Jew  centre;  not  in  Rome,  the  world's 
ruling  centre,  nor  in  Athens  or  Corinth,  the 
world's  culture  centres.  He  is  seen  walking 
among  a  small  group  of  candlesticks.  This  is 
the  centre  of  earth  action  for  Him.  This  is  the 
significant  thing  of  this  new  sight  of  Christ.  Let 
us  look  at  it  a  moment  to  get  at  the  simple  sig- 
nificance of  the  scene. 

The  candlesticks,  we  are  told,  are  the  Churches, 
the  little  groups  of  followers  banded  together 
here  and  there.  These  small  groups  of  Christ's 
followers  are  called  candlesticks  or  lampstands. 

There  is  no  suggestion  yet  of  their  giving  any 
light.  No  lighted  candles  nor  oily  wicks  are 
burning  and  shining.  They  are  only  c2Lnd\tsticks. 
They  are  of  gold,  the  most  precious  metal,  but 
they  can  give  no  light,  they  can  only  hold  the 
light  some  one  else  supplies.  The  Man  standing 
amongst  them  is  the  light.  The  whole  effect  of 
the  sight  of  Christ  here  is  that  He  is  the 
light.  The  presence  within  the  man  shines  out 
through  head  and  eyes  and  limbs,  as  light,  in- 

*  Daniel  x.  20. 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ       87 

tense  dazzling  light,  even  as  the  sun  in  his 
strength. 

Here  is  the  distinctive  thing.  Christ's  whole 
interest  centres  in  the  earth.  All  heaven  is 
bending  over  watching  the  run  of  events  down 
here.  The  intensity  of  His  suffering  and  death 
tell  the  intensity  of  Christ's  interest  in  the  move- 
ment of  things  on  the  earth.  He  has  a  plan.  He 
has  put  His  very  life  into  it.  It  centres  wholly 
in  the  affairs  of  us  men  down  here.  And  it  cen- 
tres in  His  Church. 

This  quite  upsets  our  common  ideas  about  the 
centre  of  things  down  here.  We  class  London 
and  New  York  as  the  great  financial  centres; 
Paris  and  Berlin  as  the  great  fashion  and  mili- 
tary centres.  Rome  is  the  centre  of  authority 
of  the  Catholic  Church,  and  St.  Petersburg  of  the 
Greek  Orthodox.  The  Man  who  holds  all  power 
in  His  hands,  and  on  whose  word  everything 
depends,  quietly  brushes  all  this  aside  with  scarce 
a  move  of  His  hand.  The  earth-centre  of  things 
is  the  Church.  That  is,  the  groups  of  His  fol- 
lowers banded  together  in  various  parts  of  the 
world. 

Sometimes  it  is  seen  as  a  magnificent  organi- 
zation intimately  connected  with  the  machinery 
of  government.  Sometimes  as  very  small  groups 
of  persons  with  no  social  standing,  despised  and 
reckoned  as  not  worth  reckoning  with.  But  this 
is  the  thing  He  is  depending  on  for  getting  out 
to  His  world.    All  His  plans  centre  here. 

He  is  the  light.  The  light  He  gave  and  gives 
through  nature,  and  within  every  man's  breast, 


88  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

has  been  awfully  darkened  through  refusal  and 
neglect  to  use  it,  through  stubborn  self-will.  It 
is  so  darkened  that  ofttimes  it  seems  to  have 
been  quite  put  out.  His  coming  amongst  us  as 
one  of  ourselves,  living  our  life,  dying  on  our 
behalf  to  free  us  from  sin,  rising  again  victo- 
rious over  death,  sending  His  Holy  Spirit  to 
make  all  this  real  and  living  to  each  of  us, — this 
is  the  light  at  its  full  shining,  the  flood-light. 

He  has  made  a  plan  for  sending  this  flood- 
light to  every  one  in  every  part  of  the  earth. 
That  plan  centres  in  His  followers.  He  is  the 
light.  The  Church  is  the  light-bearer,  the  can- 
dlestick. It  is  to  hold  Him  up  in  such  a  way  that 
men  everywhere  can  get  in  direct  touch  with 
Him.  When  He  is  held  up,  the  darkness  goes. 
The  darkness  can't  stand  the  light.  This  is  the 
immensely  significant  thing  here.  This  is  the 
sight  of  Christ  needed  to-day,  a  sight  of  Him  as 
He  stands  waiting  on  the  Church  to  carry  out 
His  plan  for  the  earth. 

The  faithfulness  of  the  Church  is  not  meas- 
ured by  compact  organization,  costly  houses  of 
worship,  impressive  services,  eloquent  scholarly 
preaching,  and  a  ceaseless  round  of  organized 
activities.  It  can  be  told  only  by  how  much  of 
the  spirit  of  the  Christ  who  died  is  carried,  in  the 
daily  life  of  its  individual  members,  into  home 
and  social  and  commercial  circles  until  men  are 
compelled  to  feel  its  power  in  conviction  of  the 
sin  of  their  own  lives. 

Nor  yet  is  it  told  by  transplanting  the  western 
type  of  civilization  to  far-away  lands,  with  schools 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      89 

and  hospitals  and  innumerable  humanizing  in- 
fluences. All  this  may  be  blessed.  And  it  will 
be  blessed  and  blest.  But  it  is  the  incidental 
thing.  It  is  sure  to  follow  where  the  Jesus  light 
is  allowed  to  shine  clearly  through  and  out.  It 
is  quite  possible  to  have  these  good  things  with- 
out getting  the  real  Christ.  It  is  quite  impos- 
sible to  have  Christ  Himself  without  such  influ- 
ences coming,  too. 

The  emphasis  must  be  not  on  these  things,  but 
on  Him,  Christ.  Men  need  Him.  He  answers 
the  heart  longing,  and  only  He  can.  He  changes 
the  nature,  and  nothing  else  is  enough.  The 
Church  is  to  take  the  loving,  healing,  personal 
Christ  to  men  in  the  fulness  of  His  power,  and 
to  all  men.  This  is  the  measure  of  its  faith- 
fulness. 

What  Christ  Sees. 

The  tremendous  question  that  crowds  in  here 
is  this,  What  does  this  Man  of  Fire  see  as  He 
stands  among  His  followers?  And  He  tells  us. 
This  is  why  the  vision  is  given.  He  wants  us 
to  see  things  as  they  look  to  His  eyes  of  flame. 

The  Man  and  His  message  are  one  thing  here. 
Chapters  one,  two,  and  three  belong  together, 
and  should  be  held  together  in  our  minds.  We 
have  put  the  Man  and  His  message  as  separate 
talks  to  get  a  clearer  grasp  of  each.  But  they 
are  one. 

Now  we  recall  enough  of  the  message  to  note 
this.     Five-sevenths  of  the  light-holders  are  in 


90  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

bad  shape.  The  lamps  are  smoky,  badly  smoked, 
and  cobwebbed.  The  light  is  dimmed.  It  can't 
get  out  through  the  lamp.  The  crowds  are  stand- 
ing in  the  darkness  and  falling  into  the  ditch  by 
the  side  of  the  road. 

Two-sevenths  let  the  light  clearly  out.  The 
others  are  an  intermingling  of  light  and  light 
obscured,  but  with  the  obscurity  overcoming  the 
other.  The  net  result  is  an  irritating  smokiness. 
And  the  movement  unhindered  would  naturally 
be  toward  a  steady  increase  of  smoky  irritation 
and  obscurity  until  no  light  can  get  through. 
This  is  what  He  lets  us  see  that  He  sees. 

Now  the  instinctive  thing  to  do  with  a  smokj' 
lamp  irritating  nostrils  and  eyes  is  to  put  it  out. 
That  is  the  first  instinct.  The  second  is  to  trim 
the  wick  and  do  whatever  else  it  needs  to  correct 
the  smokiness.  Yet  He  waits.  That  first  natural 
instinct  is  restrained.  The  candlesticks  are  not 
yet  moved  out  of  their  place.  The  light  still  tries 
to  get  out  through  them.  The  human  candle- 
stick may  yet  do  the  needful  trimming  and  clean- 
ing.   With  marvellous  restraint  He  waits. 

It  is  a  tremendous  scene  that  is  stretched  out 
here  before  us, — purity  and  authority  combined 
in  One  who  is  standing  in  the  midst  of  im- 
purity and  failure.  The  purity  is  more  intense 
than  we  can  grasp.  The  authority  is  greater 
than  any  one  can  realize.  The  impurity,  the 
failure,  are  bad  clear  beyond  what  we  can  take 
in.  The  whole  natural  instinct  here  would  be  a 
cleansing,  instant  and  radical,  a  correcting  of  the 
evil.     Yet   He  waits.     The  purity   would   act 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      91 

through  the  authority ;  the  authority  restrains  the 
purity.  Love  quietly,  strongly  holds  both  in 
check.  This  restraint,  this  inaction  is  tre- 
mendous. 

Why  this  inaction?  this  restraint?  And  the 
answer  is  simple,  and  as  sweeping  as  simple. 
His  plan  at  this  stage  shall  have  fullest  oppor- 
tunity. His  followers  will  be  given  full  oppor- 
tunity to  the  last  notch  of  time  and  the  latest 
possibility  of  their  being  yet  true. 

All  the  intensity  of  His  love,  all  the  eagerness 
of  His  expectancy,^  all  the  fulness  of  His  plan 
for  the  earth,  yes  all  the  millions  of  the  race,  all 
the  misery  and  ignorance,  the  sin  and  darkness, 
the  millions  of  babies  being  born  into  wretched- 
ness, and  the  millions  of  non-Christian  women 
being  held  in  slavery,  and  the  countless  numbers 
in  every  land  groping  along  in  a  darkness  that 
not  only  can  be  felt,  but  that  is  felt  to  the  hurt- 
ing point  and  then  past  that  to  the  insensitive 
stupor, — all  this  waits. 

With  a  heart  that  feels  all  that  any  man  is  feel- 
ing and  that  breaks  under  it,  He  waits  that  fullest 
opportunity  shall  be  given  His  followers  to  be 
true.  If  His  Church  is  set  aside  it  will  be  only 
at  the  last  moment  when  her  failure  is  utterly 
hopeless.  If  the  candlestick  is  removed  out  of 
its  place,  it  will  be  only  after  it  has  completely 
removed  itself  out  of  all  touch  with  the  Light. 
A  candlestick  holding  out  no  light  is  an  utterly 
useless  thing  to  the  man  in  the  dark. 

It  is  possible  for  the  Church  to  be  a  magnifi- 

*  Hebrews    x.    13. 


92  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

cent  organization,  an  honoured  institution,  exert- 
ing immense  influence  in  national  politics,  enor- 
mously rich  in  gold  and  in  scholarship  and  in 
traditions,  and  even  in  carrying  forward  an  ag- 
gressive missionary  propaganda,  and  yet  be  faith- 
less to  its  one  mission.  If  the  Church  should  fail 
in  this  its  one  mission,  then  the  waiting  time  is 
over.  The  way  is  clear  for  the  next  step  in  the 
world  plan.  And  a  momentous  step  that  would 
be,  beyond  our  power  to  grasp.  But  the  waiting 
time  still  holds  out. 

This  is  the  simple,  tremendous  plea  of  this 
new  sight  of  the  crowned  Christ  as  He  is  shown 
here.  The  centre  of  the  universe  to  Him  is 
this  earth.  The  centre  of  things  on  the  earth 
is  His  Church.  The  centre  of  things  in  the 
Church  is  its  giving  Jesus  the  Light  out  to  all 
the  earth. 

And  if  this  be  the  way  things  looked  to  His 
eye  at  the  close  of  the  first  century,  how,  think 
you,  do  they  look  at  this  beginning  of  the  twen- 
tieth ?  Has  that  momentum  of  movement  toward 
increasing  smokiness  slacked?  Is  the  waiting 
time  nearly  run  out? 

The  present  is  a  momentous  time.  Even 
men  of  the  world  speak  of  the  world-wide  rest- 
lessness as  pointing  to  some  impending  event 
of  world  size.  And  he  who  is  in  some  sort  of 
simple  touch  with  the  spirit  world  can  feel  the 
air  a-thrill  with  the  possibility  of  world  events 
impending,  even  while  he  wonders  just  what  and 
when. 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      93 

One  in  the  Midst. 

It  is  most  striking  how  it  came  about  that 
John  got  this  sight  of  Christ.  The  change  was 
not  in  Christ's  presence,  but  in  John's  eyes. 
Christ  did  not  come.  He  was  there.  John's  eyes 
were  opened.  Then  he  saw  Him  who  stands 
watching  and  waiting.  Christ  is  here.  The  Man 
of  Fire  and  of  restraining  love  is  here  on  the 
earth  in  the  midst  of  His  Church  looking  and 
longing,  listening,  and  feeling. 

If  only  our  eyes  were  opened  to  see!  There 
standeth  One  in  our  midst  whom  we  recognize 
not.  Wherever  any  company  of  believers  banded 
together  as  a  Church  to  worship  and  pray  and 
break  holy  bread  are  gathered,  under  whatever 
local  name  or  in  connection  with  whatever 
Church  communion.  He  stands  in  the  midst,  this 
crowned  Christ  of  the  Patmos  Revelation. 

Our  eyes  need  treatment.  The  hinge  of  the 
eyelid  is  in  the  will  and  in  the  heart.  A  bended 
or  bending  will  opens  the  eye.  A  brooding  heart 
opens  it  yet  more  in  spirit  vision.  Then  we  shall 
see  Him,  as  He  is  now  in  our  midst,  waiting  our 
obedience. 

Those  forty  days  between  the  resurrection  and 
the  ascension  are  seen  to  be  illustrations  of  this. 
One  can  see  through  this  Revelation  sight  that 
this  is  one  of  the  chief  things  the  Master  is 
teaching  as  He  still  lingers  on  earth  in  His  resur- 
rection body. 

Along  the  old  Emmaus  road,  gathered  about 
the  evening  meal  in  the  twilight,  twice  in  the 


94  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

upper  room  at  Jerusalem,  He  appears  to  little 
groups  of  His  faithful  followers.  Their  hearts 
are  burning  with  the  thought  of  Him,  they  are 
talking  with  both  tongue  and  eyes  about  Him. 
But  that  He  is  in  their  midst  is  the  last  thing  to 
come  into  their  minds.  Then  their  eyes  are 
opened  to  see  Him  in  their  midst.  It  was  a  forty- 
days'  session  in  their  training  school.  Then  He 
said  quietly  as  His  bodily  presence  goes  up  into 
the  blue :  "  Lo !  /  am  with  you  all  the  days  until 
the  end."  Their  mission  and  His  presence  are 
inseparably  linked. 

And  it  is  striking  again  to  note  how  John's 
Gospel  ends.  The  others  describe  the  Ascension. 
John  begins  his  Gospel  with  Jesus  in  the  bosom 
of  the  Father  before  the  world  was,  and  ends 
with  Him  walking  and  talking  with  a  little  group 
of  fishermen  along  the  shore  of  the  waters  of 
Galilee's  Lake. 

This  is  what  the  Church  needs  to-day,  a  sight 
of  Christ  as  He  is  now.  Nothing  else  can  save 
its  life.  And  nothing  less  can  save  its  mission 
from  utter  impending  failure. 

And  yet  while  the  distinctive  message  here  is 
for  the  Church,  it  is  an  individual  message,  too. 
It  is  for  each  of  us.  I  am  the  Church,  as  much 
of  it  as  I  am,  counted  as  one.  You  are  the 
Church.  The  Church  is  made  up  of  you  and  me 
and  the  rest  of  us.  I  must  take  this  message  for 
as  much  of  the  Church  as  I  am.  The  Man  of 
Fire  is  depending  on  me  to  be  a  candlestick 
for  His  light.  It  is  on  me  He  is  patiently  wait- 
ing to  obey  as  fully  as  He  means  I  should. 


A  Sight  of  the  Crowned  Christ      95 

And  on  you. 

A  recent  incident  is  told  of  a  man  whose  name 
is  a  familiar  one  in  the  financial  world,  who  died 
a  few  years  ago.  He  was  the  executive  head  of 
one  of  our  country's  great  railways.  And  a 
man  of  remarkable  largeness  of  insight  and  grasp, 
and  of  unusual  power  of  execution.  He  dealt 
in  hundreds  of  millions  as  easily  as  most  of  us 
deal  in  dollars,  and  his  rugged  honesty  has  never 
been  brought  into  question.  His  greatest  achieve- 
ment bulks  big  in  the  material  structure  of  one 
of  our  great  eastern  cities. 

But  his  gigantic  tasks  ran  his  strength  to  ebb 
tide,  and  then  it  was  seen  that  the  tide  was  run- 
ning out.  As  he  lay  in  the  sick  chamber  a  min- 
ister called,  whose  ministry  had  touched  large 
numbers  of  the  men  in  the  railroad  of  which  the 
sick  man  was  head,  and  in  the  course  of  conver- 
sation tactfully  asked: 

"  Are  you  a  Christian,  Mr.  Blank?  " 

"  Yes,"  was  the  quiet,  prompt  reply  that  rather 
surprised  the  minister. 

"  How  long  have  you  been  a  Christian,  Mr. 
Blank?" 

"  Two  days,"  came  the  answer  as  promptly 
and  quietly. 

Feeling  that  there  was  an  interesting  story 
under  these  answers,  the  minister  gently  pressed 
the  question.    Then  the  story  came  out. 

"  You  know  William,  who  handles  freight  out 
here  at ?  "  the  sick  man  asked. 

"  Yes." 

"  He  showed  me  the  way." 


96  About  the  Crowned  Christ 

"  William "  had  been  a  worthless,  drunken 
man  of  the  "  down  and  out ''  sort.  He  had  been 
converted  at  some  mission  and  been  radically 
changed.  He  had  gotten  employment  at  one  of 
the  freight-handling  stations  of  this  railroad  sys- 
tem. It  was  rough,  hard  work,  but  he  had  gone 
at  it  earnestly  in  his  purpose  to  live  an  honest 
life.  And  in  his  quiet,  earnest  way  he  was  al- 
ways seeking  a  chance  to  speak  to  men  of  Christ 
as  a  personal  Saviour,  until  he  became  known 
throughout  that  part  of  the  system  for  his  simple, 
earnest  piety. 

As  the  sick  man  realized  the  seriousness  of 
things  for  him  he  had  sent  for  this  William. 
The  president  of  the  road  whose  capitalization 
ran  into  hundreds  of  millions  sent  for  the  rough- 
handed  freight  handler.  And  William  in  his 
simple,  earnest  way  had  pointed  the  sick  man 
to  Christ.  And  the  man  of  millions  had  made 
a  new  sort  of  transaction.  Christ  and  he  had 
an  understanding. 

And  as  the  sick  man  told  the  minister  the  story 
he  paused,  and  then  added,  ''/  have  given  my 
strength  to  the  secondary  things." 

This  was  the  judgment  of  this  shrewd  man  of  big 
affairs  as  the  new  light  had  come  into  his  life  at 
its  close.  Happily  he  had  gotten  the  readjustment 
of  values  in  time  for  readjustment  of  personal 
relationships.     But  his  life's  strength  was  gone. 

If  we  might  get  the  readjustment  that  would 
put  secondary  things  in  second  place,  and  put 
wrong  and  useless  things  clear  out,  in  time  to  he 
of  some  use  to  our  blessed  Lord, 


IV.— A  MESSAGE  FROM  THE 
CROWNED  CHRIST 


The  glory  of  love  is  brightest  when  the  glory  of  self 

is  dim, 
And  they  have  the  most  compelled  me  who  most  have 

pointed  to  Him. 
They  have  held  me,  stirred  me,  swayed  me, — I  have 

hung  on  their  every  word, 
Till  I   fain  would  arise  and  follow,  not  them,  not 

them,— but  their  Lord!"* 


*Ruby  T.  Weybum. 


A  MESSAGE  FROM  THE 
CROWNED  CHRIST 

(Revelation,  Chapters  ii  and  iii) 

Patmos  Spells  Patience. 

Patience  is  strength  at  its  strongest,  using  all 
its  strength  in  holding  back  from  doing  some- 
thing. Patience  is  love  at  flood  pleading  with 
strength  to  hold  steady  in  holding  back. 

The  love  in  the  strength  insists  on  waiting  a 
bit  longer  for  the  sake  of  the  one  being  waited 
for.  The  strength  in  the  love  obeys  the  love 
passion  and  takes  fresh  hold  in  holding  back. 

Patmos  spells  out  the  patience  of  our  Lord 
Jesus.  It  tells  the  strength  and  tenderness  of 
His  love.  Olivet  spelled  out  His  plan.  His  great 
sweeping  plan,  through  His  followers,  for  a  race. 
Calvary  spelled  out  His  passion,  passion  of  love, 
passion  of  suffering,  in  dying  for  a  race. 

Calvary,  Olivet,  and  Patmos  are  inseparably 
linked,  the  gentle  slope  of  the  Jerusalem  hillside, 
the  little  mount  to  its  east,  and  the  little  rocky 
isle  in  the  far  ^gean.  Calvary  was  the  passion 
of  love  pouring  out  a  life  for  a  race.  Olivet 
was  the  plan  of  love  for  telling  a  race,  till  every 
one  would  know  the  love  by  the  feel.  Patmos  is 
the  patience  of  love  pleading  with  the  should-be 

99 


lOO        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

tellers  of  the  story  to  carry  out  the  plan,  and 
waiting,  and  then  waiting  just  a  little  longer. 

Olivet  had  heard  the  last  word.  There  the 
Master  had  told  the  disciples  the  plan.  All  the 
race  was  to  be  told  and  taught,  bit  by  bit,  ear- 
nestly, repeatedly,  patiently,  tirelessly,  by  word 
and  act  and  life.  He  Himself  unseen  by  outer 
eyes  would  always  be  with  them.  His  supernatu- 
ral power  making  real  and  living  what  they  told 
and  taught.  This  was  the  plan.  Olivet  was  to 
be  the  executive  of  Calvary,  bringing  home  to 
men  and  making  vital  to  them  what  had  been 
done  there. 

Then  Jesus  went  up  on  the  Cloud.  And  they 
went  out  everywhere.  And  His  power  convinc- 
ingly went  with  them  just  as  He  had  said.  Within 
a  generation  the  news  and  the  power  had  gone 
together  to  the  outermost  rim  of  the  world  they 
knew. 

They  were  expecting  Him  to  return  as  a  result 
of  this  witnessing  of  theirs.  The  next  time  they 
see  His  face  and  hear  His  voice  will  be  as  He 
comes  on  the  Cloud  out  of  the  blue.  So  they 
understand  and  believe.  This  is  their  constant 
expectancy. 

Now  that  generation  has  moved  off  the  scene 
of  action.  Another  generation  has  come  in  its 
place,  and  has  almost  run  its  course  and  moved 
off  the  scene.  And  still  they  are  looking  forward 
to  and  talking  about  His  return. 

But  now  to  this  new  generation  of  His  follow- 
ers something  quite  different  comes.  Instead 
of  Himself  coming  in  glory  there  comes  another 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    loi 

last  message  to  them.  It  fits  perfectly  into  the 
OUvet  message,  but  goes  further  and  says  some- 
thing more. 

The  Olivet  message  is  about  taking  the  light 
of  the  Gospel  message  out  everywhere.  The 
Patmos  message  in  its  pictured  setting  of  candle- 
sticks and  Man  of  Fire  and  blazing  light  recog- 
nized this  as  the  one  thing  to  be  done,  but  says 
there's  something  the  matter  with  the  candle- 
sticks. 

The  Olivet  word  is  about  taking  the  message. 
This  Patmos  word  is  about  the  messengers.  That 
one  is  about  the  service  of  His  followers;  this 
other  about  their  life.  The  life  underlies  the 
service.  Nothing  can  so  hinder  and  hurt  the 
service  as  a  life  not  true  in  itself.  Here  some- 
thing in  the  life  of  the  Church  is  hindering  its 
service.  The  Master's  plan  at  this  stage  is  in 
danger. 

His  broader  plan  extends  beyond  this  Church 
movement.  This  is  one  great  step  to  be  followed 
by  another.  That  broader  plan  had  been  out- 
lined at  the  first  Church  Conference,  held  in 
Jerusalem.  James,  the  presiding  officer,  said 
that  the  carrying  of  the  Gospel  to  all  men  was 
to  be  followed  by  a  national  regeneration  of  the 
Jews ;  and  then  through  a  regenerated  Jewish  na- 
tion there  would  be  a  new  era  of  world-wide 
evangelization,^  and  with  this  the  Conference  was 
in  agreement. 

The  leaders  among  these  early  disciples  are 
eagerly  anticipating  Jesus'  return  to  carry  on  the 

^  Acts  XV.  14-18. 


102        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

next  stage.  They  understand  that  what  they 
are  doing  is  preparing  the  way  for  this  next 
step. 

But  now  instead  of  returning  to  carry  for- 
ward the  broader  plan  here  comes  another 
message.  Apparently  things  are  not  going  satis- 
factorily. The  plan  at  this  stage  is  in  danger, 
while  the  Calvary  passion  back  of  it  still  burns. 
Failure  is  impending.  The  Master  might  sweep 
aside  the  men  that  are  failing,  and  press  on  Him- 
self into  the  next  step  of  His  plan.  For  the  case 
is  urgent.  A  race  is  waiting.  The  darkness 
thickens. 

But  instead  He  waits.  With  patience  and 
strength  and  love  beyond  our  power  to  grasp  He 
waits.  This  is  the  setting  of  the  Patmos  mes- 
sage, to  which  we  now  turn. 


The  Unity  of  the  Message. 

We  must  keep  cur  eyes  on  the  Man  who  is 
talking.  His  overawing  presence  gives  tremen- 
dous meaning  to  His  words.  That  gentle  touch 
of  the  right  hand  has  no  doubt  strengthened  John 
even  as  Daniel  was  strengthened.  And  he  is 
standing  and  looking  as  he  listens.  But  the  sight 
of  that  wondrous  Man  walking  among  the  can- 
dlesticks floods  his  face  and  his  whole  being 
indescribably  as  he  listens  to  the  message 
spoken. 

The  overpowering  sense  of  awe,  of  reality 
and  power,  and  of  the  tremendous  meaning  of 
what  is  being  said  never  leaves.     So  he  listens. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    103 

So  we  must  listen.  So  only  can  we  get  into  the 
meaning  of  these  words.  The  words  will  mean 
only  as  much  as  the  Man  means  in  the  intensity 
of  His  presence.  You  must  keep  your  eye  on 
this  crowned  Christ  as  you  listen. 

The  seven-fold  description  given  us  of  Christ 
is  the  key  to  these  seven  messages.  The  partial 
description  beginning  each  message  is  seen  to 
fit  into  the  particular  condition  of  the  Church 
spoken  to.  Yet  all  these  bits  of  description  must 
be  put  together  to  get  the  full  description.  It  is 
a  seven-fold  description  of  one  person. 

And  so  all  the  messages  must  be  taken  together 
to  see  the  Church  as  He  sees  it,  and  to  get  His 
message  to  it.  It  is  one  message.  A  look  at  the 
seven  promises  made  to  the  overcomers  makes 
it  clear  that  all  seven  are  one  promise.  It  is  not 
that  one  overcomer  receives  one  thing,  and  an- 
other another,  but  each  one  gets  all  of  what  is 
mentioned  in  the  seven.  A  rather  careful,  swift 
look  at  these  promises  makes  this  clear  enough. 

It  is  spoken  to  one  Church  in  seven  groups 
in  seven  different  cities.  There  is  one  call  to 
repentance,  one  warning  of  what  will  happen  to 
the  unpenitent  at  five  successive  stages,  one  plea 
to  hear  seven  times  repeated,  and  one  blessed 
result  to  the  overcomer,  in  a  seven-fold  state- 
ment. 

And  there  is  just  one  evil  to  be  recognized  and 
fought.  That  evil  is  seen  to  grow  from  one  de- 
gree to  another,  from  bad  to  worse  and  worst. 
Its  emphasis  changes  from  one  phase  to  an- 
other.    It  has   shown  itself   differently  in  dif- 


104        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

ferent  parts  of  the  world,  and  in  different  ages 
since,  but  it  is  the  one  evil  power,  always  the 
same  behind  the  different  manifestations. 

There  is  rare  combination  and  adaptation  in 
this  message.  It  was  meant  for  the  Church  of 
that  day,  and  of  every  day  since,  and  for  some 
future  day.  For  it  stands  as  the  one  message 
from  Christ  to  His  Church  between  Olivet  and 
His  return.  It  is  meant  distinctively  for  the 
Church  as  a  whole,  and  yet  it  makes  an  intense 
personal  appeal  to  each  one  in  the  Church. 

It  is  spoken  to  the  little  groups  of  Churches 
in  Asia  Minor  grouping  about  the  city  of  Ephe- 
sus,  which  had  been  founded  by  Paul  and  minis- 
tered to  by  John.  And  without  doubt  it  fitted 
into  the  conditions  and  tendencies  of  those  par- 
ticular seven  Churches. 

But  these  are  representative  of  all.  Probably 
any  group  of  seven  would  be  representative  of  all 
in  varying  degree.  The  mother  Church  at  Jeru- 
salem is  not  named,  nor  the  great  Gentile  mis- 
sionary Church  at  Antioch.  But  these  messages 
with  their  approval  and  criticism,  their  warning 
and  promise,  were  meant  for  all  the  Church  in 
Asia  and  Europe  and  Africa  at  that  time. 

They  are  found  to  fit  into  the  need  of  the 
Church  scattered  throughout  the  world  in  every 
generation  since  then.  Always  there  have  been 
little  groups  that  were  faithful  and  true,  always 
some  suffering  because  of  their  faithfulness  and 
remaining  faithful  in  spite  of  suffering.  And 
always  those  who  have  been  formal,  who  have 
companioned  with  evil,  who  have  been  swamped 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    105 

by  the  evil  with  which  they  companioned,  and 
those  practically  asleep  or  dead. 

This  Patmos  message  will  be  found  to  fit  the 
Church  of  to-day  with  remarkable  accuracy  and 
faithfulness.  And  the  whole  probability  is  in 
favor  of  finding  that  it  will  fit  peculiarly  the 
future  Church,  the  Church  at  the  end  of  this 
present  period. 

This  whole  book  of  the  Revelation  is  pecul- 
iarly a  Church  book.  While  it  is  full  of  instruc- 
tion and  plea  for  our  individual  lives,  yet  it  is 
distinctively  the  Church  book.  It  stands  out 
among  the  books  of  the  New  Testament  as  the 
one  book  addressed  to  the  Church  and  to  the 
whole  Church. 

It  gives  the  great  bulk  of  its  space  to  an  awful 
time  of  persecution  that  is  coming  to  the  Church 
at  some  future  time.  This  is  spoken  of  else- 
where, notably  by  Jesus  in  His  talk  with  the  dis- 
ciples on  Mount  Olivet,  but  it  is  the  chief  sub- 
ject treated  here.  And  it  is  treated  with  great 
detail.  The  name  commonly  applied  to  this  com- 
ing persecution  is  the  great  tribulation. 

It  is  significant  that  the  book  that  clearly  is 
distinctively  a  Church  book  is  taken  up  chiefly 
with  a  description  of  that  future  persecution.  It 
leads  to  the  deep  conviction  that  this  book  of  the 
Revelation  so  fitted  to  the  need  of  the  Church 
when  spoken,  and  in  every  generation  since, 
will  be  found  to  be  peculiarly  fitted  to  that  gen- 
eration of  the  Church  that  is  to  pass  through 
this  great  coming  persecution;  that  is,  to  the 
Tribulation  Church. 


io6         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

It  will  probably  be  the  mainstay  and  comfort 
of  those  who  will  insist  on  being  true  daring 
those  awful  days,  regardless  of  the  suffering 
involved.  No  book  has  been  more  slighted  and 
ignored.  It  has  been  called  by  some  within  the 
Church  of  our  own  generation  ''  the  joke  of  the 
Bible."  It  will  likely  come  to  be  the  book 
most  studied  and  loved  for  its  light  and  help  in 
the  terribly  troublous  times  ahead.  There  will 
be  an  eager,  hungry  searching  for  every  scrap 
of  information,  and  for  any  fresh  ray  of  light 
on  its  meaning. 

The  Seven-fold  Message. 

Now  this  seven-fold  message  lets  us  see  things 
through  Christ's  eyes.  He  is  letting  them  and  us 
see  what  He  sees.  The  Scottish  poet's  thoughtful 
lines  might  well  be  changed  to  get  the  yet  better 
look:  *'Oh!  wad  some  power  the  giftie  gie  us, 
to  see  oursel's  as  "  God  sees  us.  It  would  do 
more  than  free  us  from  blunders  and  notions. 
And  we  are  needing  more. 

Each  one  of  these  seven  messages  begins  by 
our  Lord  drawing  their  eyes  to  Himself.  This 
is  the  thing  needed  most.  And  this  will  give 
meaning  and  force  to  the  message.  They  are 
to  be  looking  at  Him  as  they  listen.  Then  He 
speaks  of  all  the  good  things  He  sees.  Then  of 
the  faulty,  weak,  bad  things,  in  a  few  simple  but 
unmistakably  plain  words.  No  one  could  doubt 
what  He  meant. 

Then  is  the  pleading  call  to  repent,  with  the 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    107 

faithful  warning  of  what  will  surely  happen  if 
they  don't.  Then  the  earnest  plea  that  His  words 
be  listened  to  and  taken  to  heart,  and  the  won- 
drously  gracious  promise  held  out  to  those  who 
steadily  set  themselves  against  the  evil,  and  who 
get  the  victory. 

Let  us  look  for  a  moment  at  each  of  these 
Churches  as  seen  by  those  searching  eyes  of 
flame. 

Ephesus  is  the  centre  of  the  group,  the  natural 
leader,  the  largest  and  most  influential,  per- 
haps the  mother  Church  of  the  group,  where 
Paul  and  John  had  put  in  so  much  time  and 
strength,  and  whence  they  reached  out  to  these 
others. 

Christ  reminds  them  of  His  presence  in  their 
midst  and  His  control  of  the  angel  messengers 
that  minister  to  them.  Then  he  speaks  of  their 
good  deeds,  their  tireless  activity,  steadfast  en- 
durance, intense  zeal  for  the  true  faith,  with 
special  emphasis  upon  their  unwearying  stead- 
fastness even  under  sore  difficulties,  and  their 
hatred  of  those  who  made  compromise  with  evil 
so  hateful  to  Himself. 

But  there  is  something  lacking,  the  tender  per- 
sonal love  for  Himself.  There's  intense  loyalty 
to  Church  and  to  the  faith,  but  a  lack  of  personal 
love  for  Himself.  And  the  startling  thing  is 
that  this  is  said  to  quite  outweight  all  these 
good  things.  They  may  have  these  things  with- 
out the  love,  but  they  cannot  have  the  love  with- 
out having  these  things,  and  at  a  finer  tempera- 
ture. 


io8         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

And  this  defect  is  crucial.  If  persisted  in  it 
is  fatal.  It  will  actually  mean  their  rejection 
as  His  messenger.  This  is  the  critical  thing 
which  we  seem  to  have  such  a  hard  time  getting 
hold  of.  The  essential  qualification  for  true  serv- 
ice is  the  personal  attachment  to  our  Lord  Jesus 
Himself,  that  warm  heart  love  which  the  human 
heart  longs  for  and  gives  to  some  one.  He  longs 
for  this.  This  is  the  essential;  not  Church  or- 
ganization nor  creed,  not  zeal  for  orthodoxy,  but 
warm  love  for  a  person.  Service,  witnessing, 
all  the  rest,  are  valuable  to  Him  in  reaching  His 
world  only  as  they  grow  out  of  a  tender  love  for 
Himself. 

And  the  startling  thing  is  that  this  privilege 
and  opportunity  of  service  is  to  be  taken  away 
not  because  displeasing  to  Him,  but  because  it 
fails  of  the  end  in  view.  The  candlestick  is  only 
removed  because  it  is  no  longer  serviceable; 
it  is  not  giving  out  the  light.  This  earnest,  ag- 
gressive, orthodox,  patiently-enduring  Church  is 
to  be  rejected  as  a  light-holder,  because  it  is  not 
holding  out  the  light.     This  is  tremendous ! 

The  group  in  Smyrna  is  tenderly  reminded  of 
the  suffering  of  their  Lord,  for  they  are  filling 
up  what  is  left  behind  of  His  suffering.  This 
tells  at  once  the  depth  of  their  personal  love  for 
Him,  nothing  could  tell  it  more. 

They  are  poor  in  money  and  so  despised,  but 
rich  in  faith  and  so  precious  to  Him.  They  are 
suffering  at  the  hands  of  the  Jews,  who  were  the 
outspoken,  intense,  fanatical  enemy  of  the  Chris- 
tians.    There  is  no  reproach,  only  earnest  en- 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    109 

couragement  to  keep  steady  even  through  fiercer 
fires  yet  to  come. 

The  description  of  Himself  to  the  Pergamum 
group  is  startling.  He  is  the  one  with  a  sharp 
two-edged  sword.  There  is  something  here  He 
must  fight  against.  They  are  frankly  told  that 
they  have  had  a  hard  place  to  witness  in,  and  ear- 
nestly commended  for  being  true  even  in  the 
midst  of  persecution. 

But  there's  something  wrong,  and  it  is  very 
serious.  It  is  as  wrong  and  bad  as  it  can  be. 
There  is  actually  compromise  with  evil,  part- 
nership with  the  world  in  its  wickedness.  The 
thing  is  put  in  the  intensest  way  possible  by 
characterizing  it  as  adultery.  No  stronger  lan- 
guage could  be  used  to  tell  how  He  sees  the 
evil  they  are  guilty  of.  And  they  are  plainly 
told  that  He  will  fight  against  them.  They  have 
made  themselves  His  enemy  by  joining  His 
enemies. 

The  Thyatira  group  is  reminded  of  the  purity 
of  their  Lord,  who  cannot  stand  impurity  but 
searches  it  relentlessly  out,  and  pursues  it  to 
the  death.  There's  a  faithful  minority  here. 
Their  activity  and  love  and  faith  and  patience 
and  increasing  activity  in  service  are  all  counted 
carefully  over  and   warmly  commended. 

But  the  evil  here  is  much  worse.  It  is  put 
into  the  gravest  language.  "  Thou  sufferest  the 
woman  Jezebel."  This  is  most  significant. 
There  is  no  worse  character  named  in  the  whole 
Old  Testament.  She  not  only  represented  the 
worst  adulterous  uncleanness  in  herself,  but  she 


no         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

was  the  national  leader  energetically  fostering 
unclean  idolatrous  practices  among  the  people. 
Jezebel  pulled  God's  light-holder  nation  down  to 
the  lowest  moral  level  it  ever  reached.  She 
brazenly  dominated  king  and  people,  and  re- 
mained stubbornly  obstinate  to  the  terrible 
end. 

Christ  brings  her  name  in  here.  Again  this 
is  tremendous.  No  more  terrific  parallel  could 
have  been  made.  Here  evil  characterized  as 
adulterous  has  actually  come  to  a  place  of  leader- 
ship in  the  Church.  With  great  longsuffering 
time  has  been  given  that  all  this  might  be 
changed,  but  with  Jezebel-like  obstinacy  it  was 
determined  that  there  would  be  no  change.  And 
the  inevitable  result  that  will  surely  follow  con- 
tinued obstinacy  will  be  a  great  tribulation  or 
deadly  persecution. 

The  Sardis  group  is  told  that  Christ  is  the 
centre  of  all  life  and  help,  in  the  control  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  and  of  the  angel  messengers.  There 
is  nothing  to  commend  here.  There  are  some 
who  insist  on  living  true  lives,  but  they  are  a 
scanty  scattered  few,  not  enough  to  count. 

There  are  some  ragged  remnants  of  good,  but 
even  these  are  sickly  and  nearly  dead.  The 
Church  is  well  organized,  energetic,  standing 
high  among  men,  but  with  an  utter  absence  of 
spiritual  life.  The  personal  lives  of  most  are 
like  dirty  garments.  And  the  warning  is  this: 
He  will  come  as  a  thief,  that  is  unexpectedly, 
disagreeably,  to  take  away  what  they  prize  most 
and  leave  them  stripped  and  naked. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    iii 

The  longest  message  is  to  the  group  in  Phila- 
delphia. Christ  reminds  them  that  He  is  holy 
in  character,  faithful  to  His  promises,  having 
full  control,  and  giving  opportunity  of  service 
as  the  highest  reward  of  faithfulness.  This  can- 
dlestick is  giving  out  light,  for  it  is  given  yet 
further  opportunity  of  shining. 

The  chief  characteristic  of  this  group  is  its 
steady  plodding  faithfulness.  They  are  not 
spoken  of  as  brilliant  or  talented,  but  faithful 
in  the  midst  of  opposition.  He  loves  them  with 
the  sort  of  deep  love  drawn  out  by  love  freely 
given.  And  a  special  promise  is  given,  a  sig- 
nificant promise.  A  great  persecution  is  coming, 
an  awful  testing  time  to  all  the  earth.  But  He 
will  keep  them  through  this  unhurt  because  they 
have  been  keeping  His  word  so  faithfully. 

The  common  reading  here  is,  "  I  will  keep  thee 
from  the  hour  of  trial."  It  is  quite  as  accurate 
to  read  "  through  "  in  place  of  "  from."  And 
there  is  good  reason  for  taking  this  as  the 
sense  here.  The  word  underneath  here  is 
translated  by  several  different  words  in  other 
passages. 

Where  a  word  in  one  language  may  be  trans- 
lated by  any  one  of  several  words  the  general 
sense  of  the  passage  must  decide  which  one  cor- 
rectly expresses  the  meaning.  Here  the  mean- 
ing must  be  gotten  from  the  whole  trend  of  New 
Testament  teaching.  Like  the  Israelites  during 
the  plagues  that  came  to  Egypt  these  faithful  ones 
will  be  kept  untouched  through  this  terrible  time 
that  is  to  come. 


112         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

The  Laodicea  group  is  tt)  be  talked  to  plainly 
by  one  who  is  a  true,  faithful  witness  in  dealing 
with  His  people's  faults,  and  who  has  all  the 
authority  of  God  in  doing  so.  This  is  the  second 
group  that  actually  has  not  one  good  thing  to  be 
commended.  There  is  no  false  teaching,  no 
compromise  with  evil;  they  are  simply  asleep. 
Rich,  influential,  self-satisfied,  grown  fat  and 
sleek, — so  they  seem  to  their  neighbours  and 
themselves.  Wretched,  poor,  blind,  naked, — so 
they  are.  And  the  chastening  threatened  will  be 
of  the  severe  radical  sort  that  strong  love  insists 
upon. 


A  Heart-breaking  Sight. 

Here  then  is  the  picture  of  the  whole  Church 
as  seen  by  the  eyes  of  searching  flame.  There  is 
a  mixture  of  bad  and  good,  active  bad,  active 
good,  and  sleepy  indifference.  There  is  a  Church 
within  the  Church.  But  the  bad  is  bad  enough 
and  big  enough  to  endanger  seriously  the  use- 
fulness of  the  whole  as  a  light-bearer. 

The  glass  of  the  lantern  is  so  smoked  and 
cobwebby  that  it  is  more  useless  than  useful 
to  the  light  inside,  and  the  crowd  outside  in  the 
dark.  The  uselessness  threatens  what  useful- 
ness is  left.  Smokiness  is  contagious.  Cobwebs 
grow  thicker  and  hold  more  dust. 

Two  Churches  are  true  and  pure  in  the  midst 
of  sore  opposition.  Two  are  corrupt  in  the  very 
worst  way.  Three,  including  the  leader,  are  or- 
thodox in  form,  but  indifferent  to  Jesus  Himself, 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    113 

or  asleep,  or  dead;  three  degrees  of  the  same 
thing, — indifference,  sleep,  death. 

In  all  of  these  five  there  are  those  who,  like 
Ezekiel's  companions,  "  sigh  and  cry  over  the 
abominations  that  are  going  on,"  but  they  are 
helpless  to  stay  the  sweep  of  the  tide.  They 
are  the  salt  that  is  saving  the  lump  so  far.  Even 
Sodom  would  have  been  saved  by  ten  righteous. 

It  is  plainly  said  to  the  leader  Church  that  it 
is  no  longer  of  use  as  a  candlestick,  except  a 
change  come.  It  fails  to  give  out  the  light.  It 
is  being  carried  along,  patiently  borne  with  for 
its  own  sake.  It  is  failing  at  this  point  in  the 
mission.  The  smoking  flax  sending  out  its 
irritating  smoke  in  place  of  clear  light  is  not 
yet  quenched.  The  Holy  Spirit  life  within  is 
being  sorely  grieved,  but  is  not  yet  put  entirely 
out. 

And  this  is  only  one.  Four  others  are  plainly 
in  much  worse  fix.  Five-sevenths  are  failing. 
That  bit  of  preservative  salt  would  seem  to  be 
working  to  its  full  capacity. 

This  is  the  picture  given  us  here  by  our  Lord 
Himself.  John  would  never  have  dared  make 
such  a  terrific  arraignment  of  his  own  accord. 
It  is  a  picture  of  the  whole  Church  at. the  be- 
ginning of  the  First  century. 

How  is  it  at  the  beginning  of  the  Twentieth? 
A  thousand  million  people,  two-thirds  of  the 
race,  pretty  freely  supplied  with  the  light  of 
western  oil  and  of  gunpowder,  with  the  help  of 
the  western  sewing  machine,  and  with  the  guid- 
ance of  western  learning  and  skill,  but  to  whom 


114        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

with  minor  exceptions  no  scant  ray  of  this  light 
has  yet  gotten,  these  make  answer.  That  smoki- 
ness  would  seem  to  be  rather  dense. 

The  non-Christian  crowds  in  so-called  Chris- 
tian lands,  the  overwhelming  majority,  to  whom 
the  name  of  Jesus  has  no  more  practical  meaning 
than  other  foreign  names,  Shanghai,  or  Tokyo, 
or  Calcutta, — these  make  answer.  The  light 
doesn't  seem  to  have  been  able  to  get  through 
and  out  much,  even  near  the  candlestick. 

The  Church  itself,  when  it  has  sometimes  for- 
gotten its  statistical  tables  long  enough  to  look 
thoughtfully  into  this  old  Patmos  looking-glass, 
has  now  and  then  made  answer,  in  a  few  of  its 
thoughtful  leaders,  while  the  rank  and  file  push 
on  absorbed  in  their  Ephesian  or  Sardisian  or 
Thyatiran  way. 

There's  a  striking  companion  bit  to  this  in 
Ezekiel's  vision.^  That  messenger  to  the  exiled 
colony  by  the  Chebar  had  first  of  all  the  vision 
of  God  that  completely  overwhelmed  him.  Then 
he  is  taken  in  spirit  to  Jerusalem,  and  shown 
things  as  they  were,  through  God*s  eyes.  The 
heathen  idols  were  set  up  in  the  very  temple  of 
God,  so  actually  stimulating  among  the  people  the 
horribly  gross,  unnamible  impurities  connected 
with  their  worship.  This  was  done  in  the  open, 
with  no  pretence  at  concealment. 

Then  in  the  vision  he  digs  "  into  the  wall " 
to  see  the  hidden  things  that  are  being  done. 
There  he  sees  every  sort  of  creeping,  crawling, 
slimy,  repulsive  animal  pictured  on  the  walls  of 

*  Ezekiel  viii  and  ix. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    115 

this  secret  chamber,  and  the  leaders  of  the  people 
burning  incense  and  worshipping. 

This  he  is  told  is  a  picture  of  the  inner  hearts 
of  the  men  who  are  the  leaders  of  the  nation. 
For  dramatic  intensity  it  would  be  hard  to  equal 
this.  The  imaginations  of  their  hearts  are  as 
the  unclean  snakes  and  beasts  that  are  found 
only  in  the  damp,  unwholesome  slime  and  ooze 
of  swamp  and  stagnant  pond. 

And  this  is  God's  light-bearing  nation  to  all 
the  earth.  And  these  are  the  leaders!  But 
there's  yet  worse.  The  mothers  and  wives  and 
daughters  of  the  nation,  the  real  moulders  of 
the  nation's  life  and  character,  are  seen  pouring 
out  their  very  hearts  over  a  heathen  idol,  with 
all  the  horrible  evil  practices  included  in  its  wor- 
ship. And  then  a  group  of  men  are  shown 
in  the  holy  temple  standing  with  their  backs 
to  God  and  His  temple  and  worshipping  the 
sun. 

Under  these  four  items  are  pointed  out  the 
impurity  and  violence,  the  injustice  and  oppres- 
sion, that  mark  the  people.  It  is  the  inner  heart 
life  of  the  nation  that  is  being  pictured  so  viv- 
idly. But  in  the  midst  of  all  this  are  those  who 
are  broken-hearted  over  these  conditions.  And 
as  the  time  of  judgment  comes  in  the  vision  these 
are  marked  and  spared,  though  they  see  the  work 
of  judgment  on  every  hand. 

Such  is  the  tremendous  scene  depicted  by 
Ezekiel.  It  will  be  seen  at  once  what  a  striking 
parallel  it  presents  to  the  scene  in  this  Revela- 
tion book  with  the  new  light-bearer  to  the  na- 


ii6        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

tions  of  the  earth.  One  would  never  dare  make 
such  an  arraignment  of  his  own  accord.  It  is 
humbling  and  heart-breaking  to  the  last  degree 
simply  to  repeat  what  is  spoken  here  by  our  Lord 
Himself. 

Clearly  the  Patmos  picture  is  not  only  of 
the  Church  then,  but  ever  since,  and  now.  And 
the  simple  law  of  momentum  in  sliding  down  hill 
will  make  it  an  accurate  picture  of  the  Church 
at  the  end,  the  future  Church. 

The  colouring  changes  at  different  times  in  dif- 
ferent places,  the  black  getting  intenser,  pot 
black,  and  the  light  shining  out  more  brightly 
by  contrast.  But  the  picture  remains  essentially 
as  painted  on  Patmos. 

The  warnings  so  faithfully  given  run  a  slid- 
ing scale  outward  and  downward  in  five  degrees. 
If  the  Church  continue  as  it  is,  it  is  told  here 
that  it  will  be  rejected  as  a  light-holder.  Its 
privilege  and  opportunity  as  God's  messenger  will 
be  taken  away.^ 

Then  Christ  will  fight  against  it  as  an  enemy ,^ 
it  will  be  given  over  to  a  time  of  terrible  tribula- 
tion,^ it  will  be  treated  as  prey  to  be  robbed  and 
plundered,*  and  it  will  be  rejected,  spewed  out 
of  the  mouth,  as  personally  disgusting. '^ 

Yet  in  all  this  plain  speech  there  is  no  bitter- 
ness, only  grief,  only  tender  pleading.  The  plain 
bluntness  is  the  language  of  love  that  yearns 
to  save  even  yet,  and  that  waits  with  untold  pa- 
tience hoping  for  a  change. 

*  Rev.  ii.  5        '  Rev.  ii.  12-16.        *  Rev.  ii.  22,  23. 

*  Rev.  iii.  3.  *  Rev.  iii.  16. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    117 


Wooing  Promises. 

But  it  is  noticeable  that,  while  the  warning  is 
to  the  corporate  Church,  the  plea  and  promise 
that  persists  throughout  is  to  the  individual.  He 
that  is  willing  to,  let  him  hear  and  heed  and  be 
controlled  by  the  Spirit's  message. 

There  are  two  groups  that  have  remained 
faithful.  There  are  scattered  through  the  other 
five  those  who  are  faithful.  And  there  are  no 
doubt  many  who  feel  the  pull  to  be  true  but  are 
yielding  to  the  strong  undertow  of  the  rising 
tide  by  which  they  are  being  carried. 

The  coupled  promise  and  plea  that  call  out 
so  pleadingly  to  these  at  the  close  of  each  mes- 
sage are,  "  to  him  that  overcometh."  This  word 
"  overcometh  "  is  very  significant.  It  is  one  of 
the  characteristic  notes  of  these  messages  and 
indeed  of  this  entire  book.  It  is  one  of  that 
sort  of  word  that  sums  up  a  whole  situation  in 
itself. 

There  is  opposition.  There  is  conflict  because 
some  won't  yield  to  the  opposition.  And  the 
result  of  the  conflict  varies.  Some  are  overcome 
by  the  evil ;  they  go  over  to  the  enemy,  body  and 
soul.  Some  wabble.  They  slip  along  the  line 
of  least  resistance,  secretly  holding  on  to  some 
few  ragged  remnants  of  convictions,  but  not  let- 
ting these  aflFect  their  standing  or  comfort  or 
particularly  their  profits. 

Some  overcome  evil.  There  is  struggle  tense 
and   continued,   quickened   breath,   moist  brow, 


Ii8        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

tightened  nerves,  the  stain  of  blood,  a  scar  here 
and  there,  and  heart-breaking  experiences.  But 
they  fight  on,  and  victory  comes.  And  the  evil 
is  less,  weakened  in  its  hold  on  this  companion 
and  that  neighbour.  They  get  the  victory  over 
evil. 

There's  a  wondrous  promise  to  these.  It  is  as 
though  the  treasure  box  is  placed  at  their  dis- 
posal. It  is  a  seven-fold  promise.  Every  over- 
comer  will  receive  all  that  is  contained  in 
these  seven  promises.  Note  this  seven-fold 
promise:  He  that  overcometh  will  have  ever- 
lasting life,^  and  this  is  emphasized  by  the 
reverse  statement,  "  will  not  be  hurt  of  the  sec- 
ond death."  ^ 

He  will  be  admitted  into  the  sweets  of  inti- 
mate fellowship  with  his  Lord,  hidden  from  all 
save  those  in  this  inner  circle.  And  will  re- 
ceive a  new  name,  the  family  name,  that  is  an 
inheritance  in  the  family  of  God,  joint  heir  with 
Jesus  Christ.^  He  will  have  the  privilege  of 
serving  with  the  King  in  the  blessed  Kingdom 
time  coming. 

And  with  this  goes  the  word,  "  I  will  give 
him  the  morning  star."  *  Jesus  calls  Himself 
"  the  bright,  the  morning  star."  ®  The  morning 
star  rises  in  the  dark  of  night  after  midnight  and 
ushers  in  the  new  day.  He  who  is  in  touch  of 
heart  with  Jesus  as  the  night  deepens  to  the 
dawn  will  (probably)  have  an  intimation  in  hia 

*Rev.  ii.  7.  'Rer.  ii.  11.  'Rev.  ii.  17. 

*Rev.  ii.  26-28.  "Rev.  xxii.  16. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    119 

inner  spirit  of  the  glad  coming  of  the  Morning 
Star  that  ushers  in  earth's  new  day. 

The  overcomer  will  be  made  perfect  in  char- 
acter, and  find  his  name  not  only  in  the  family 
book,  but  mentioned  by  Christ  personally  to 
His  Father  before  the  angels.^  He  will  be  ad- 
mitted into  the  innermost  circle  of  the  King 
and  be  reckoned  among  the  dependables.^ 
And  he  will  have  closest  fellowship  with 
Christ  in  the  administration  of  the  wondrous 
kingdom.^ 

It  will  be  seen  that  these  promises  overlap, 
the  same  thing  being  put  now  positively,  now 
negatively,  and  being  repeated  in  differing  words 
to  different  groups.  Each  promise  touches  the 
characteristic  trait  of  the  group  spoken  of.  The 
Ephesians,  who  had  many  things  but  lacked 
the  vital  thing,  are  wooed  with  the  promise  of 
life  itself,  which  is  only  through  touch  with 
Jesus  Himself. 

Smyrna  in  its  suffering  is  cheered  with  the 
prospect  of  suffering  no  more.  The  Pergamum 
overcomer  is  wooed  away  from  intimacy  of 
friendship  with  evil  to  intimacy  of  friendship 
with  the  coming  King.  They  who  resist  the  evil 
Jezebel  rule  in  Thyatira  will  have  the  privilege 
of  ruling  with  the  King.  Those  in  Sardis  who 
hunger  and  thirst  after  a  pure  heart  will  have 
the  longing  fully  satisfied. 

Those  who  have  proven  dependable  in  the 
trying  days  in  Philadelphia  will  have  the  ex- 
quisite pleasure  of  being  depended  upon  in  the 

*  Rev.  iii.  5.  '^  Rev.  iii.  12.  '  Rev.  iii.  21. 


120        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

inner  circle  as  wholly  trustworthy.  Those  in 
Laodicea  who  resist  the  current  and  insist  on  let- 
ting the  knocking  pilgrim  in  for  heart  fellow- 
ship ^  will  find  themselves  in  fellowship  with 
Him  on  the  throne. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  these  promises  are 
one  promise,  and  that  that  is  the  promise  of  ever- 
lasting life,  of  a  purified  perfected  character, 
and  of  the  privilege  of  closest  fellowship  with 
the  King  Himself  in  the  coming  Kingdom  time. 

These  promises  do  not  take  up  the  matter 
of  rewards  for  faithfulness  in  service,  such  as 
our  Lord  speaks  of  in  the  twin  parables  of  the 
pounds  and  talents.  The  things  promised  here 
are  the  results  of  being  saved  by  the  blood  of 
Christ.  The  privilege  of  fellowship  with  the 
King  during  the  Kingdom  time  is  included  in 
salvation.  All  the  redeemed  will  reign  over  the 
earth. 2 

This  is  significant.  Overcoming  would  seem 
to  be  the  decisive  evidence  of  faith  in  Jesus 
Christ,  the  faith  that  receives  everlasting  life. 
It  takes  opposition  to  let  you  know  whether  you 
are  willing  to  accept  Christ.  A  man  does  not 
know  whether  he  really  believes  Christ  until 
he  is  opposed  in  his  beUeving,  and  opposed  to 
the  real  hurting  point.  He  has  just  as  much 
faith  in  Christ  as  he  is  willing  to  declare,  and 
stand  by,  and  insist  upon,  when  he  is  under  fire. 
Opposition  is  the  fire  test.  Faith  isn't  faith 
unless  it  can  stand  the  fire  test. 

*  Rev.  iii.  20,  21,  with  Jeremiah  xiv.  8. 

*  Rev.  V.  10. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ   121 


The  Decisive  Trait  of  Faith. 

The  plain  inference  here  is  that  he  who  doesn't 
overcome  shows  that  he  really  doesn't  believe  in 
his  heart.  And  the  natural  result  is  that  he  does 
not  receive  these  things  promised.  That  is,  he 
is  not  saved  because  he  won't  accept  the  Lord 
Jesus  as  his  Saviour  when  it  comes  to  the  fire 
test. 

There  are  without  doubt  thousands  in  the 
Church  who  will  be  left  behind  on  the  earth  when 
our  Lord  Jesus  catches  up  His  own.  This  does 
not  mean  necessarily  that  they  will  be  lost. 
There  will  be  another  opportunity  of  being  saved 
for  those  living  on  the  earth  at  that  time.  The 
Kingdom  will  be  a  wonderful  time  of  salvation. 
There  will  be  a  continuous  revival  of  the  realest 
sort  going  on  everywhere  all  the  time. 

But  these  would  not  have  the  blessed  privi- 
lege of  fellowship  with  the  King  in  the  King- 
dom, nor  the  blessedness  of  fuller  resurrection 
life  at  this  time.  That  is  reserved  for  those  who 
by  grace  have  believed  on  the  Lord  Jesus,  during 
His  absence  and  continued  rejection,  in  spite  of 
the  fire  of  opposition. 

It  is  notable  that  the  Thyatiran  message  speaks 
of  great  tribulation  coming  to  that  Church  if  it 
continue  unchanged.  And  that  the  Philadelphia 
Church  is  to  be  kept  through  "  the  hour  of  trial, 
that  which  is  to  come  upon  the  whole  earth." 
Throughout  the  Scriptures  mention  is  made  of  a 
time  of  persecution  coming  at  the   end.     The 


122         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

common  term  for  it  is  tribulation.  It  is  called 
the  great  tribulation.  There  will  be  more  to  be 
said  about  this  again. 

It  is  possible  that  it  will  be  found  that  this 
Patmos  message  will  have  special  significance 
during  that  trying  time  at  the  end.  But  it  should 
be  noted  that  it  fits  into  the  spirit  of  opposi- 
tion that  is  always  found  where  there  is  true, 
faithful  witnessing. 

The  tribulation  itself  will  be  the  time  of  in- 
tensest  opposition  carried  to  the  extreme  of  vio- 
lent persecution.  It  will  be  the  climax  of  con- 
ditions always  present,  wherever  there  is  faith- 
ful witnessing.  Faithfulness  to  Christ  always 
arouses  opposition. 

The  test  of  whether  we  really  accept  Christ 
and  believe  Him  is  not  in  anything  we  say.  It 
is  not  even  in  what  we  are  in  our  lives  when 
all  goes  smoothly.  It  is  in  what  we  are  in  our 
lives  when  opposed,  when  it  costs  criticism,  os- 
tracism, petty  persecution,  or  more  outright  per- 
secution. This  is  our  Lord's  test  of  acceptance 
of  Himself. 

We  have  had  many  definitions  of  what  it  means 
to  believe  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  And  these 
have  been  helpful  in  clearing  the  air  and  help- 
ing us  to  a  simple  acceptance  of  Him.  These 
definitions  have  touched  chiefly  the  inner  part  of 
faith,  the  part  we  are  conscious  of. 

Here  is  another  definition.  Here  is  the  last 
word  on  the  subject,  the  authoritative  word, 
from  our  Lord  Jesus  Himself.  It  tells  what 
faith  is  in  its  outward  working,   the  part  the 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    123 

crowd  sees.  The  faith  that  accepts  Jesus  as 
Saviour  accepts  Him  also  as  Lord. 

That  faith  naturally  rings  true  to  Him  under 
all  circumstances.  It  rings  truest  and  clearest 
whenever  opposition  to  Him  is  aroused,  whether 
the  opposition  of  indifference,  of  criticism  and 
sneer,  or  of  persecution. 

There  are  certain  commonly  accepted  things 
that  are  in  themselves  only  good,  but  which  are 
not  conclusive  evidence  that  we  really  have  sav- 
ing faith  in  the  Saviour.  The  act  of  coming 
into  Church  membership  whether  by  confirma- 
tion, by  an  assent  to  questions  regarding  one's 
personal  faith,  or  by  being  baptized,  the  fact 
of  membership  in  the  Church,  the  partaking  of 
the  Lord's  supper,  serving  as  an  official  of  the 
Church  in  pulpit  or  pew,  faithful  attendance,  lib- 
eral support, — these  things  are  only  good. 

But  they  do  not  furnish  conclusive  evidence 
of  one's  acceptance  of  Christ.  It  is  quite  pos- 
sible to  be  carried  along  on  the  common  current 
in  such  things.  There  is  clear  evidence  that 
many  are.  The  decisive  thing,  the  test  thing  is 
this :  how  we  stand  opposition,  the  polite,  sneer- 
ing sort,  the  more  aggressive  sort,  or — if  it  come 
to  that — the  violent  sort.  The  fire  reveals  every 
man's  faith  if  there  be  any  there. 

There  are  two  fire  tests.  One  is  of  our  faith 
in  Christ,  as  revealed  in  the  frictional  fires  of 
opposition.  Whoever  stands  that  test  is  caught 
up  into  His  presence  when  He  comes,  or  goes 
at  once  into  His  presence  if  our  going  precede 
His  coming. 


124        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

The  second  is  of  the  love-spirit,  how  far  it 
has  been  the  very  breath  of  our  life  as  revealed 
by  the  fire  of  His  presence.  For  the  love-spirit 
means  personal  loyalty  to  Jesus,  purity  of  heart, 
holiness  of  life,  steadiness  of  purpose,  and  the 
exquisite  gentleness  of  patience  in  our  conduct 
toward  all  others. 

These  words  of  our  Lord  Jesus  are  very 
searching.  This  Patmos  message  must  have  been 
a  painful  one  for  Him  to  give  John,  and  painful 
for  John  to  repeat.  It  is  painful  for  any  one 
to  repeat  when  its  meaning  is  understood.  It 
should  send  one  off  into  some  quiet  corner  alone 
on  his  knees  with  that  great  "  search  me  "  prayer 
of  the  Psalmist.^ 

Recently  I  was  told  a  simple  incident  of  one 
of  the  truly  great  Christian  men  of  our  genera- 
tion. He  was  at  the  head  of  one  of  the  largest 
concerns  of  our  country  employing  thousands 
of  men,  but  never  knowing  any  labor  troubles.  I 
remember  the  impression  made  on  me  a  few 
years  ago  at  the  time  of  his  death,  by  the  re- 
mark made  to  me  by  two  different  men  of  this 
man's  city,  men  that  I  think  did  not  know  each 
other,  or  maybe  very  slightly.  As  I  spoke  of 
him  each  man  said  in  a  subdued  voice,  "  Oh, 
everybody  in  loved  Mr.  !  " 

This  incident  was  told  by  his  son.  The  two 
were  on  a  train  together.  The  father  rose  and 
went  forward  to  another  part  of  the  train.  As 
he  went  out  a  man  sitting  opposite  came  over 
and  spoke  to  the  son.  His  flashy  manner  of  dress 
*  Psalm  cxxxix. 


A  Message  from  the  Crowned  Christ    125 

and  the  fact  that  he  seemed  to  have  been  drink- 
ing suggested  the  sort  of  man  he  was.  He  said 
to  the  son: 

"Wasn't  that  Mr.  So-and-so?" 

"  Yes/'  the  son  repHed. 

*'  Well,"  the  man  said,  as  though  talking  half 
to  himself,  "  if  there  were  more  men  like  him, 
there'd  be  fewer  like  me." 

And  he  turned  to  his  seat  and  sat  as  though 
absorbed  in  his  thought.  The  son,  in  speaking  of 
it  after  his  father's  death,  said  it  was  one  of  the 
tenderest  memories  he  had  of  his  father. 

The  common  crowd  on  the  street  and  our 
Lord  Jesus  are  united  in  one  thing:  they  want 
more  men  like  Him,  Jesus  our  Saviour.  Then 
there'd  be  fewer  of  the  other  sort. 


v.— AN  ADVANCE   STEP   IN   THE 
ROYAL  PROGRAMME 


"*We  are  watching,  we  are  waiting, 
For  the  bright  prophetic  day; 
When  the  shadows,   weary  shadows, 
From   the   world    shall   roll   away. 

"  We  are  watching,  we  are  waiting. 
For  the  star  that  brings  the  day; 
When  the  night  of  sin  shall  vanish, 
And  the  shadows  melt  away. 

"  We  are  watching,  we  are  waiting, 
For  the  beauteous  King  of  day ; 
For  the  chiefest  of  ten  thousand, 
For  the  Light,  the  Truth,  the  Way. 

"We  are  waiting  for  the  morning, 
When  the  beauteous  day  is  dawning, 
We  are  waiting  for  the  morning, 
For  the  golden  spires  of  day."  * 


'  W.  O.  Gushing. 


AN   ADVANCE    STEP   IN  THE 
ROYAL    PROGRAMME 

(Revelation,  Chapters  iv.  and  v.) 

A  Look  into  Heaven. 

Heaven  is  a  place  of  intensest  and  tenderest 
interest  to  every  one.  It  is  true  that  there  is 
less  emphasis  on  getting  to  heaven  as  a  result 
of  being  saved  than  there  was  a  generation  ago. 
Indeed,  no  emphasis  at  all.  The  whole  thought 
now  is  about  our  life  here  on  the  earth.  We 
think  less  about  dying  and  more  about  living. 

This  is  true.  Yet  every  one  of  us  has  loved 
ones  who  have  slipped  from  our  grasp,  and  gone 
from  our  midst.  We  think  of  them.  The  ten- 
derest memories  brood  over  us,  and  come  like 
a  flood  sometimes. 

We  may  have  the  sweet  sense  of  assurance 
that  these  loved  ones  are  saved.  But  there  is 
an  intense  longing  at  times  to  know  more  about 
them,  where  they  are,  what  they  are  doing,  how 
much  they  know  of  things  down  here.  These 
thoughts  will  come  crowding  in  upon  us. 

Now  here  is  some  light.    All  the  questions  are 

not  answered.     But   there  comes   clear,   sweet 

light  to  comfort  our  hearts  during  the  waiting 

time  until  we  shall  be  joined  with  them  again. 

"9 


130        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

We  are  given  here  in  John's  Revelation  the  first 
clear,  definite  glimpse  into  the  upper  world.  It 
is  told  us  in  the  language  of  earth  of  course. 
It  must  be,  else  we  would  not  understand.  But 
clearly  there  is  a  glory  and  happiness  clear  be- 
yond what  earthly  words  can  tell. 

This  is  the  first  glimpse  into  heaven  given 
us  in  this  old  Book  of  God.  Jacob  wakes  up 
in  his  dream  and  sees  a  ladder  set  up  connecting 
earth  and  heaven,  and  the  angels  going  up  and 
returning  again  while  God  talks  with  him.  It 
means  much  to  him,  but  gives  us  no  answer  to 
our  questions,  except  to  make  plain  that  there 
is  a  very  real  and  wondrous  world  up  there  where 
our  loved  ones  go. 

Moses  is  up  in  the  mount  with  God  for  six 
weeks  nearly,  twice  over,  but  there  is  no  sug- 
gestion of  what  he  may  have  seen;  only  the 
transfiguring  change  in  his  face,  and  the  strongly 
gentling  change  in  his  character. 

Ezekiel  finds  the  heavens  opening  and  sees 
the  vision,  so  like  John's,  of  the  wondrous  Man. 
Stephen  looks  up  steadfastly  into  heaven  and  sees 
the  resplendent  glory  of  God,  and  the  crucified 
Jesus  standing  at  the  right  hand  of  God.  Paul 
is  caught  up  into  heaven,  not  improbably  at  the 
time  that  his  body  lay  bruised  and  bleeding  and 
apparently  lifeless  outside  Lystra.  But  the 
sights  he  sees  and  the  over-awing  glory  are  too 
much  to  be  told.  But  here  John  is  taken  up  in 
vision  into  the  heavens,  into  the  presence  of  God, 
and  sees  much,  and  tells  us  what  he  sees. 

It  was  after  the  vision  of  the  glorified  Man  and 


An  Advance  Step  131 

His  message.  John  is  sitting  thinking  on  all  he 
has  seen  and  heard,  thinking  back  to  Ephesus 
and  the  other  Churches  he  knew  so  well.  He  is 
wondering  perhaps  how  he  can  tell  them  what, 
whom,  he  has  seen;  and  wondering  too  how  he 
can  tell  them  this  message  entrusted  to  him. 

The  holy  spell  is  still  strong  upon  him,  when 
all  at  once  he  noticed  what  looks  like  a  door,  a 
door  opened  above  him  in  the  blue.  And  as  he  is 
looking,  astonished,  that  same  voice  that  had 
been  speaking  with  him  before  speaks  again.  He 
is  bidden  to  "  come  up  hither,"  and  he  will  be 
shown  the  things  that  are  to  happen  some  time 
in  the  future.  At  once  he  is  conscious  of  that 
same  gentle,  enveloping  presence  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  as  before.  At  once  He  is  up  in  heaven. 
And  he  tells  us  the  scene  that  opens  to  his 
eyes. 

There  is  a  throne  set.  What  a  comfort !  There 
is  a  throne.  There  is  a  centre  of  authority  and 
power  to  our  world.  This  Revelation  is  pecul- 
iarly the  book  of  a  throne.  Up  yonder  above 
the  moral  tangle  and  confusion  of  earth  is  a 
reigning  throne. 

There  is  One  sitting  on  the  throne.  That 
throne  is  occupied.  It  has  not  been  vacated. 
Men  down  here  may  push  God  off  the  throne 
of  their  lives,  and  try  to  push  Him  out  of  the 
affairs  of  the  earth.  But  He  sits  on  the  throne 
above.  And  that  throne  dominates  the  life  of  the 
earth.  Nothing  can  be  done  without  per- 
mission. 

John  can't  describe  this  one  sitting  on  the 


132        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

throne.  The  sight  is  too  much  for  his  eyes. 
When  the  seventy  elders  of  Israel  see  God,  all 
that  they  can  remember  is  the  dazzle  of  glory 
in  the  wonderful  pavement  under  His  feet.  It 
seems  like  a  pavement  of  precious  stones  of 
sapphire,  but  as  clear  as  crystal.  So  now  all 
that  John  can  see  is  some  One  who  seems  to  his 
eyes  like  transparent  precious  stones  blazing  with 
light.  This  is  the  only  thing  he  can  think  of 
to  tell  of  what  he  sees. 


Rest  in  the  Midst  of  Unrest. 

There  is  a  rainbow  around  the  throne.  The 
radiance  of  light  shining  out  from  this  One  on 
the  throne  makes  a  rainbow.  If  one  wonders 
how  God  can  look  down  on  the  misery  and  sin, 
the  rebellion  and  wretchedness  that  dominate 
most  of  the  earth,  here  is  the  answer.  His  finger 
is  never  off  the  pulse.  He  knows  all  as  we  never 
can.  And  he  feels  as  we  never  do  the  pain  of 
life,  and  the  discord  of  earth.  The  unceasing  cry 
of  earth  comes  up  in  his  ears. 

But  He  is  controlled  by  a  purpose.  It  is  a 
purpose  of  strong  patient  love.  He  has  made 
a  promise  that  man  shall  have  fullest  opportunity 
unchecked  by  the  natural  sweeping  judgment, 
that  invariable  working  out  of  sin  and  wrong. 
That  throne  keeps  the  order  of  nature  working 
smoothly  and  faithfully  for  man's  sake,  holding 
in  restraint  the  forces  that  would  hinder  and 
destroy.  The  rainbow  is  the  signature  to  His 
promise.     That  rainbow  is  always  before  His 


An  Advance  Step  133 

face.  That  promise  has  never  been  forgotten. 
This  explains  the  quietness  of  the  One  on  the 
throne,  looking  down  on  the  moral  confusion  of 
the  race. 

But  this  rainbow  is  not  like  the  common  rain- 
bows that  we  know.  It  completely  encircles  the 
throne.  Our  rainbows  are  broken  up.  They  are 
never  seen  in  their  completeness.  Our  lookout  on 
things  sees  only  a  part;  it  never  sees  all.  It  is 
never  complete.  The  view  of  things  up  there  is 
complete.  Everything  is  seen  and  is  seen  in  its 
true  relation  to  everything  else.  The  throne  is 
the  one  place  of  perfect  perspective  and  poise. 

And  this  rainbow  is  all  of  one  colour,  a  clear, 
soft  emerald-green.  We  know  that  green  is  the 
most  restful  of  all  colours.  Some  colours  are 
irritating.  Some  persons  of  very  sensitive,  nerv- 
ous temperament  are  even  made  sick  by  certain 
colours.  And  we  are  all  affected  more  than  we 
know  in  a  hurtful  way  by  certain  colours.  But 
green  is  the  colour  of  rest.  It  soothes  the  eyes 
and  nerves  and  even  the  spirit.  The  rainbow 
round  about  the  throne  looked  like  a  quiet,  quiet- 
ing emerald-green.  The  One  on  the  throne  is  at 
perfect  rest  regarding  things  down  here.  He 
knows  all.  His  ears  hear  all,  the  cry  of  distress 
and  despair,  the  defiance  and  arrogance  and  blas- 
phemy. His  eyes  see  His  children  down  here, 
creative  children  all  of  them,  prodigal  children 
so  many  of  them,  and  trusting  children  walking 
in  the  shadows.  He  sees  all.  And  He  feels  all 
with  His  great  feeling  heart. 

Yet  He  is  at  rest.     Do  you  wonder  how  He 


134        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

can  be  ?  When  Jesus  saw  the  multitudes  He  was 
moved  with  compassion;  He  suffered  in  heart 
with  them,  for  they  were  as  shepherdless  sheep, 
torn  and  distressed.  And  the  heart  beating  in 
rhythm  with  His  has  as  hard  a  time  as  He.  If 
He  lead  you  in  service  to  some  foreign  mission 
land,  you  see  and  know  and  feel  as  no  tourist 
party  hurried  through  the  outer  fringes  ever  does 
or  can. 

And  in  Christian  lands  of  the  West,  and  the 
homeland,  in  slum  as  in  polite  circles,  in  com- 
mercial quarters  as  in  the  university  world,  the 
heart  that  is  in  touch  with  Jesus'  heart  sees  and 
hears  and  feels  and  senses  things  as  they  are  un- 
der the  surface  or  sticking  boldly  out  through 
the  surface.  And  feels  at  times  as  though  it  can 
never  again  be  at  rest. 

How  can  He,  on  the  throne,  be  so  quiet,  and 
be  at  rest  ?  And  there  is  an  answer  to  our  burn- 
ing question,  a  simple,  real  answer.  He  knows 
the  end.  He  has  a  purpose  and  a  plan.  The 
present  is  only  one  stage  in  His  great  plan.  This 
is  man's  opportunity,  and  possibly  some  one's 
else  opportunity,  too.  It  is  to  be  followed  by 
something  else  radically  different  down  on  this 
earth. 

He  is  held  steady  during  this  time  by  a  great 
purpose.  It  is  a  purpose  of  great,  tender  love. 
To  His  eye  looking  sleeplessly  down  there  is  rest 
even  as  of  emerald-green.  And  so  there  will  be 
rest  for  him  who  looks  sleeplessly  up  to  the 
throne  of  control,  encircled  in  the  emerald  rain- 
bow of  perfect  peace.     And  we  can  be  of  best 


An  Advance  Step  135 

service  to  Him  by  resting  in  our  hearts,  resting 
in  Him,  even  while  working  in  the  thick  of  things 
as  they  are  down  here. 


They  See  His  Face. 

Then  John  sees  twenty-four  other  thrones 
round  about  the  central  throne.  And  on  these 
there  are  twenty-four  men  sitting.  These  men 
are  wearing  white  garments,  and  have  crowns  of 
gold  upon  their  heads.  This  is  the  part  of  in- 
tense interest.  Who  are  these?  And  what  does 
this  mean? 

What  has  been  said  before  about  picture  lan- 
guage, the  language  of  the  Orient,  of  childhood, 
of  the  common  crowd,  the  universal  language, 
will  help  us  here.  The  Bible  is  an  Oriental  book. 
It  talks  in  picture  language.  This  is  humanly 
what  gives  it  such  freshness  and  peculiar  adap- 
tation. The  radical  change  of  circumstances  and 
speech  and  mode  of  thought  in  different  centu- 
ries makes  all  books  antiquated  after  a  certain 
time.  This  book  has  the  freshness  of  youth,  for 
in  its  simple  picture  language  it  deals  in  prin- 
ciples. But  picture  language  must  be  held  to 
its  simplicity.  And  something  of  familiarity 
with  the  whole  range  of  the  Scripture  is  needful 
to  use  the  key  to  the  simple  picture  language. 

Let  us  look  a  bit  at  the  simple  scene  here. 
These  men  are  elders,  that  is  they  are  leaders. 
They  represent  multitudes  of  others.  Through- 
out the  Bible  twelve  is  the  number  of  complete- 
ness, both  in  things  and  people.     A  complete 


136        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

gathering  or  throng  of  people  is  represented  by 
the  number  twelve.  There  are  twelve  tribes  of 
Israel,  and  so  on.  This  is  so  familiar  that 
it  need  only  be  named  without  further  illustra- 
tion. 

There  are  two  great  divisions  of  this  Bible, 
the  Old  Testament  and  the  New.  These  stand 
naturally  for  the  two  great  divisions  of  time,  be- 
fore Christ  and  after.  This  division  is  strongly 
marked  in  the  Bible,  and  sharply  marked  in  our 
Christian  consciousness.  It  has  been  a  common 
thing  to  wonder  about  the  salvation  and  spiritual 
knowledge  and  privileges  of  people  who  lived  be- 
fore Christ  came  and  died. 

Twice  twelve  make  twenty-four.  These 
twenty-four  elders  represent  the  redeemed  ones 
from  both  of  these  great  divisions  of  time.  That 
is  to  say,  the  picture  tells  us  this.  All  the  people 
from  creation's  earliest  morn  up  to  the  present, 
including  the  one  who  went  out  last  from  some 
sorrowing  family  circle,  all  who  have  had  the 
touch  of  heart  with  God,  are  gathered  in  the 
presence  of  Him  who  sits  on  the  throne.  That  is 
one  simple  thing  that  stands  out  clear  and  sure. 

These  are  represented  as  sitting.  The  slave 
or  servant  never  sat  in  his  master's  presence. 
Friends  sit  together.  Angels  are  never  spoken 
of  as  sitting  in  the  presence  of  God.  When  our 
Lord  Jesus  was  received  up  He  sat  down  at  the 
Father's  right  hand.  We  are  spoken  of  as  seated 
in  the  heavenly  places  in  Christ  Jesus.  Sitting 
together  means  being  on  terms  of  intimacy  and 
fellowship.     Through  the  precious  blood  of  our 


An  Advance  Step  137 

Lord  Jesus  we  are  all  accepted  in  the  Beloved  and 
received  and  trusted  as  He  is. 

These  elders  are  clad  in  white  garments.  That 
is  one  of  the  familiar  things  spoken  of  much 
in  this  end-book.  Part  of  the  promise  to  those 
of  overcoming  faith  is  that  they  shall  be  arrayed 
in  white  garments,  and  walk  with  Christ  in 
white.^  Those  who  are  faulty  in  the  Church  are 
urged  to  get  white  garments.-  The  martyrs 
waiting  their  vindication/  and  the  great  multi- 
tudes who  come  up  out  of  the  tribulation  are 
given  white  raiment.*  The  bride  at  the  joyous 
marriage  supper,  and  the  armies  following  the 
conquering  Christ,  are  clad  in  fine  linen,  bright 
and  pure.^ 

We  are  told  that  this  white  linen  means  a  pure 
life.^  These  garments  have  been  washed  in  the 
blood  of  the  Lamb.'^  These  multitudes  have  been 
cleansed  in  the  blood  of  Christ  and  purified  by 
the  Holy  Spirit  and  made  perfect  in  purity  and 
holiness  as  they  came  up  into  the  presence  of  the 
Father  on  the  throne. 

These  elders  are  wearing  golden  crowns.  This 
language,  too,  is  familiar.  The  acknowledgment 
and  reward  of  faithfulness  and  of  service  is 
spoken  of  commonly  under  this  bit  of  picture 
talk.^  The  angels  are  never  spoken  of  as  being 
crowned.     Christ  was  crowned,  that  is  received 

^Rev.  iii.  4-5.       ^  Rev.  iii.  18.  *  Rev.  vi.  11. 

*  Rev.  vii.  9.  °  Rev.  xix.  8,  14.      "  Rev.  xix.  8. 
'  Rev.  vii.  14 ;  xxii.  14. 

*  Rev.  ii.  10;  iii.  11;  I  Corinthians  ix.  25;  II  Timothy 
iv.  8;  James  i.  12;  I  Peter  v.  4. 


138        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

into  the  presence  of  the  Father,  as  the  full  recog- 
nition of  His  worthiness  and  of  what  He  had 
done,  and  in  vindication  after  the  shameful  re- 
jection by  men. 

These  men  and  women  and  children  in  the 
Father's  presence  have  been  rewarded  and  are 
being  rewarded  for  their  faithfulness  in  obedi- 
ence and  in  life.  All  the  struggles  and  difficul- 
ties, the  hard  road,  the  endurance,  the  patient 
suffering  for  His  name's  sake,  the  faithfulness 
in  doing  the  allotted  tasks,  all  these  have  been 
noted  and  acknowledged.  There  is  the  sweet 
peace  of  the  Father's  approval  in  all  of  these 
before  the  throne. 


Going  to  School  to  God. 

And  these  are  sitting  on  thrones.  When  Jesus 
was  teaching  His  disciples,  in  the  dark  days  of 
bitter  opposition  He  wooed  them  with  this :  "  Ye 
shall  sit  upon  twelve  thrones."  ^  And  a  bit  later 
as  they  sat  round  the  supper  table  on  the  night 
of  His  betrayal,  when  things  are  getting  to  the 
darkest,  again  He  woos  them :  '*  Ye  may  eat 
and  drink  at  my  table  in  my  Kingdom;  and  ye 
shall  sit  on  thrones."  ^  He  that  overcometh  is 
assured  of  sitting  with  Christ  on  His  throne.^ 

All  the  redeemed  ones  of  earth  are  to  have 
part  with  Christ  in  the  coming  Kingdom  time. 
They  reign  with  Him.*  During  this  present  time 
the  countless  hosts  of  angels  have  a  part  in  min- 

^  Matthew  xix.  28.  *  Luke  xxii.  30. 

"Rev.  iii.  21.  *  Rev.  v.  lo;  xx.  4,  6. 


An  Advance  Step  139 

istering  to  man  on  the  earth. ^  Even  so  during 
the  Kingdom  time  to  come  the  countless  hosts 
of  the  redeemed  will  have  the  sweet  privilege  of 
service  with  Christ  and  on  behalf  of  those  on  the 
earth.  And  it  is  quite  possible  that  they  already 
have  a  part  in  such  a  ministry. 

A  little  farther  in  the  description  it  is  seen 
that  these  elders  have  "  each  one  a  harp,  and 
golden  bowls  full  of  incense,  which  are  the  pray- 
ers of  the  saints."  Heaven  is  a  place  of  wonder- 
ful music.  Its  very  atmosphere  must  be  tuned 
to  the  rarest  rhythmic  harmonies.  And  each  one 
has  part  in  the  music  being  made. 

And  yet  more,  they  are  continuing  the  sweet 
ministry  of  intercession  learned  down  on  earth. 
This  means  that  they  are  in  touch  with  earth. 
They  know  the  needs  of  loved  ones  and  of  all, 
and  they  have  the  privilege  of  fellowship  in 
this  with  Him  who  ever  liveth  to  make  inter- 
cession. 

And  there  is  one  other  thing  we  know  here 
at  once  without  being  told.  If  a  friend  tells  me 
that  he  has  a  rose  garden  under  the  care  of  a 
skilled  gardener,  I  know  without  being  told  that 
the  roses  are  growing.  I  at  once  look  through 
my  friend's  words  and  see  bushes  full  of  roses 
of  all  colours,  some  full  blown,  some  half  blown, 
some  bursting  buds,  and  some  just  budding.  For 
there  is  a  garden,  and  a  gardener,  and  sun  and 
rain  and  dew.  I  know  there  must  be  growth 
and  beauty. 

^  Hebrews  i.  14  with  Daniel  vii.  10  and  Psalm  ciii. 
ao-2i. 


I40        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Even  so  we  know  that  the  loved  ones  who  have 
parted  from  us  are  growing.  They  are  in  the 
Father's  presence,  in  intimate  fellowship.  That 
tells  me  of  their  growth.  That  little  one  who 
slipped  away  so  young,  years  ago,  has  been  grow- 
ing in  mental  powers,  in  character  as  well  as  in 
what  down  here  we  call  stature,  and  growing 
most  of  all  in  love.  And  so  at  the  meeting  time, 
in  the  air  or  up  there,  there  will  be  instant  recog- 
nition, as  well  as  instant  delight  over  the  growth 
under  such  wondrous  tutorage. 

This  is  the  glimpse  into  the  upper  world  which 
John  sees  and  is  allowed  to  give  us  here.  The 
redeemed  ones  of  earth  of  all  the  ages  are  in 
the  presence  of  the  Father  and  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  and  of  the  angels,  on  terms  of  intimate 
fellowship,  made  pure  and  perfect  in  character, 
but  always  growing  from  more  to  more,  and 
having  a  share  in  blessed  ministry.  And  they 
listen  to  and  have  share  in  making  music  more 
exquisite  than  our  earthly  language  can  de- 
scribe. 

They  understand  the  wondrous  plans  for  the 
earth,  for  now  they  see  all  things  through  the 
Lord  Jesus'  eyes.  They  have  some  part  with- 
out doubt  in  welcoming  those  who  come  to  join 
them,  even  as  they  will  have  part  in  receiving 
those  who  are  caught  up  at  our  Lord's  return. 
And  they  look  forward  eagerly  to  the  glad  time 
of  righting  that  will  come  then. 

But  let  us  look  a  bit  more  at  what  John  sees. 
Out  of  the  throne  are  seen  proceeding  lightnings 
and  voices  and  thunders.    Three  other  times  in 


An  Advance  Step  141 

this  book  it  speaks  of  lightning  and  voices  and 
thunder.^  These  things  of  course  are  the  fa- 
miHar  accompaniments  of  a  storm.  It  is  notice- 
able that  each  other  time  they  are  named  in  the 
book  it  is  in  connection  with  some  direct  action 
being  taken  by  God  in  the  affairs  of  the  earth. 
And  each  time  there  is  some  added  item  intensi- 
fying the  scene. 

A  physical  storm  is  caused  by  two  areas  of  un- 
equal temperature  coming  together.  The  storm 
is  the  process  of  coming  together  and  equalizing 
of  the  atmospheric  conditions.  The  inference 
here  would  seem  to  be  that  the  time  of  action 
has  come  to  straighten  out  matters  on  the  earth. 
The  two  moral  atmospheres  of  heaven  and  earth 
seem  to  be  coming  into  contact,  and  a  storm 
is  resulting  before  clear  weather  comes.  It  sug- 
gests that  our  Lord  Jesus  is  taking  the  next 
direct  step  in  His  broader  plan. 

God's  Ideal  of  Creation. 

But  let  us  look  a  little  further.  In  the  book's 
picture  language  there  are  "  seven  lamps  of  fire 
burning  before  the  throne."  These  we  are  plainly 
told  *'  are  the  seven  spirits  of  God."  That  is  a 
Hebrew  way  of  saying  "  the  perfect  spirit  of 
God."  This  is  of  intense  interest.  The  Holy 
Spirit  is  represented  as  being  before  the  throne. 

In  the  confidential  talk  with  the  inner  group  of 
disciples  on  the  betrayal  night,  in  John's  Gospel,^ 

*  Rev.  viii.  5;  xi.  19;  xvi.  18,  21. 
^  John  xiv.-xvi. 


142        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Jesus  promises  that  when  He  has  ascended  up 
to  the  Father  He  will  send  down  the  Holy  Spirit 
to  them.  When  the  Spirit  has  come  down  to 
the  disciples  He  will  begin  a  new  ministry  of 
witnessing  to  the  world  through  them. 

In  the  Book  of  Acts  that  promise  is  fulfilled. 
The  Spirit  comes  down  with  remarkable  mani- 
festations on  the  day  of  Pentecost.  The  dis- 
tinctive thing  He  does  is  to  take  possession  of  a 
group  of  men  and  form  them  into  a  new  wit- 
nessing body  called  the  Church.  He  had  dwelt 
in  the  nation  of  Israel  as  a  nation,  and  had  been 
withdrawn  from  that  nation  when  it  proved  finally 
faithless  to  its  mission.  He  had  dwelt  in  indi- 
vidual men  before  and  during  and  after  that 
time. 

At  Pentecost  He  is  sent  down  on  a  new  mis- 
sion. He  is  to  do  in  men  all  that  Jesus  has 
done  for  them  in  His  life  and  death  and  resur- 
rection. But  the  distinctive  thing  of  Pentecost 
is  His  forming  this  new  body  called  the  Church, 
through  which  He  begins  a  new  ministry  of  wit- 
nessing to  the  world. 

All  through  the  Acts  and  Epistles  He  is  con- 
stantly spoken  of  as  here  on  the  earth  working 
in  the  Church  and  through  it.  He  in  the  Church 
is  a  powerful  restraint  upon  the  powers  of  evil 
in  the  world.  In  Thessalonians,^  Paul  has 
spoken  of  a  day  coming  when  that  restraint 
would  be  withdrawn.  The  Holy  Spirit,  the 
"  One  that  restraineth  now,"  is  to  be  taken  away. 
Now  here  the  Holy  Spirit  is  represented  as 
^  II  Thessalonians  ii.  6-7. 


An  Advance  Step  143 

being,  not  in  the  Church,  as  always  in  the  Acts 
and  Epistles,  but  as  being  "  before  the  throne." 
This  is  the  second  significant  thing  to  note  in 
this  scene.  This  also  would  seem  to  suggest  the 
beginning  of  a  new  order  of  things. 

John  goes  quietly  on  with  his  description.  Be- 
fore the  throne  he  sees  a  great  expanse  that  looks 
like  a  sea  of  clear,  bright,  beautiful  crystal.  Be- 
fore the  throne  and  around  about  the  throne  are 
four  living  creatures  or  creatures  of  life.  These 
living  creatures  are  of  intensest  interest.  They 
appear  throughout  the  Scriptures  from  the  Gar- 
den of  Eden  in  Genesis  to  the  very  close  of  this 
Book  of  Revelation. 

They  are  also  called  cherubim  and  seraphim, 
that  is,  cherubs  and  seraphs.  They  are  always 
associated  directly  with  the  immediate  presence 
of  God,^  and  with  His  presence-chamber,  in  the 
tabernacle,^  in  the  temple,^  and  in  Ezekiel's 
vision  of  a  new  temple,*  and  in  the  thought  of 
the  people.''  There  is  one  possible  exception  to 
this,  where  they  are  seen  at  the  entrance  to  the 
Garden  of  Eden.^  The  description  of  them  is 
most  full  in  Ezekiel.  It  varies  in  details,  but 
with  the  essentials  always  the  same. 

*  Ezekiel  i.  4-28;  x.  1-22. 

'  Exodus  XXV.  17-22 ;  xxxvii.  6-9. 

•  I  Kings  vi.  23-26;  viii.  6-7;  II  Chronicles  iii.  10-14; 
y.   7-8. 

*  Ezekiel  xH.  15-26. 

°I  Samuel  iv.  4;  II  Samuel  vi.  2;  xxii.  11; 
I  Chronicles  xiii.  6 ;  Psalm  xviii.  10 ;  Ixxx.  i ;  xcix.  i ; 
Isaiah  vi.  1-3 ;  xxxvii.  i6. 

•  Genesis  iii.  24. 


144        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

The  general  appearance  is  that  of  a  man,  but 
there  are  four  faces  as  of  a  man,  a  Hon,  an  ox 
or  calf,  a  flying  eagle,  and  sometimes  a  cherub 
face.  They  are  full  of  eyes  everywhere,  and  they 
seem  enveloped  in  the  pure  fire  which  everywhere 
is  associated  with  God's  own  presence.  These 
descriptions  combined  suggest  perfection  of 
purity,  of  intelligence,  of  obedience,  and  of 
power. 

In  this  book  of  the  Revelation  they  are  spoken 
of  seven  times,^  that  is,  more  frequently  than 
in  any  other  book,  though  not  so  fully  as  in 
Ezekiel.  Five  times  they  are  leading  or  joining 
in  the  worship  of  God,  by  men  and  angels,  and 
twice  they  are  cooperating  with  the  Lamb  or  the 
angels  in  what  is  being  done  on  the  earth. 

These  beautiful,  intelligent  beings  seem  to  rep- 
resent the  whole  animate  creation,  man,  the  ani- 
mals intimately  associated  in  service  with  man, 
those  that  roam  at  will,  and  the  birds,  and  the 
angels.  It  would  seem  as  though  they  stand  for 
God's  ideal  of  creation,  as  it  was  before  the  hurt 
of  sin  came,  as  He  holds  it  in  His  heart,  and  as 
it  will  be  after  sin  has  gone.  His  ideal  of  a 
perfect  and  perfected  creation  is  always  in  His 
presence  and  before  His  face,  intelligently  and 
gladly  carrying  out  His  will,  reverently  and  joy- 
ously sounding  His  praise. 

It  suggests  that  He  will  not  rest  content  until 
His  ideal  for  the  creation  shall  be  a  sweet,  full 
realization,  all   sin   and   rebellion   removed   and 

'  iv.  6-9;  V.  6,  8,  14;  vi.  I,  3,  5,  7;  vii.  ii ;  xiv.  3; 
XV.  7;  xix.  4. 


An  Advance  Step  145 

all  His  works  uniting  in  joyous,  continuous  wor- 
ship, and  glad,  harmonious  obedience. 


The  Significant  Book. 

All  this  is  interesting;  some  of  it  intense  in 
interest.  But  it  is  only  a  setting.  It  is  inci- 
dental. The  chief  thing  is  yet  to  be  told.  John 
had  been  told  that  he  would  be  shown  the  things 
that  would  come  to  pass  some  time  in  the  future. 
We  come  now  to  the  beginnings  of  these 
"  things." 

The  One  who  is  sitting  on  the  throne  has  a 
carefully  sealed  book  or  document  in  his  hand. 
An  angel  calls  out  loudly  for  any  one  who  is 
qualified  to  do  so  to  step  forward  and  take  the 
document  and  break  its  seals.  And  as  John 
watches  intently  no  one  comes  forward.  No  one 
can  be  found,  either  in  the  heaven,  in  earth, 
or  in  the  region  spoken  of  as  under  the  earth. 

At  this  John  is  greatly  distressed,  and  weeps 
much,  so  he  must  have  understood  at  once  just 
what  this  meant.  And  one  of  the  elders  com- 
forts him  with  the  assurance  that  there  is  One 
who  has  "'  overcome  to  open  the  book,  and  the 
seven  seals  thereof,"'  "  the  lion  of  the  tribe  of 
Judah."  This  word  *'  overcome  "  suggests  that 
this  one  has  been  in  some  great  conflict  and  has 
gotten  the  victory  and  overcome  all  opposition. 
And  this  qualifies  Him  to  take  and  open  the 
document.  He  is  the  only  one  among  untold 
numbers  so  qualified. 

And  now  John  sees  this  One.    He  is  standing 


146         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

in  the  very  midst  of  the  throne  surrounded  by 
creatures  and  elders.  We  easily  recognize  this 
as  our  Lord  Jesus.  He  is  a  lion  in  leadership  and 
strength.  He  is  a  lamb  in  gentleness  of  char- 
acter, and  in  the  sacrificial  experience  He  has 
been  through.  The  marks  of  death  are  plainly 
seen  on  His  person. 

As  He  comes  forward  He  reaches  and  takes 
the  book  out  of  the  hand  of  the  One  on  the 
throne.  He  is  allowed  to  take  it.  His  qualifica- 
tion to  take  the  document  and  break  its  seals  is 
acceptable  to  the  One  on  the  throne. 

And  as  He  takes  the  book  there  is  a  remark- 
able burst  of  praise  and  adoration  that  must  have 
made  all  heaven  ring.  And  those  on  earth  in 
touch  of  spirit  with  the  scene  and  its  purpose 
and  the  Chief  Actor  would  surely  feel  some  thrill 
in  the  spirit  currents  of  earth. 

The  outburst  of  worship  is  led  by  the  four  liv- 
ing creatures  and  the  twenty-four  elders  who  fall 
down  before  the  Lamb  and  sing  a  song.  What 
music  that  must  be  when  the  untold  thousands 
sing  as  only  redeemed  ones  can  sing.  Then 
countless  hosts  of  angels  join  in  and  lift  the 
chorus.  And  then  there  is  the  creation  chorus, 
every  created  thing  in  heaven  and  earth,  under 
the  earth,  in  the  sea,  absolutely  everything  seems 
to  join  in  this  indescribable  music.  And  the  four 
living  creatures  say,  ''  Amen."  And  again  the 
elders  fall  down  and  worship. 

John's  distress  at  the  beginning,  and  now  this 
indescribable  outburst  of  praise,  tell  us  that  this 
is  something  thrilling  and  significant  beyond  ex- 


An  Advance  Step  147 

pression.  What  does  this  mean,  our  Lord  Jesus 
taking  the  sealed  document  preparatory  to  break- 
ing its  seals? 

It  has  been  said  in  a  previous  talk  that  every 
thread  woven  into  the  fabric  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment can  be  found  in  the  fabric  of  this  Revela- 
tion book.  So  that  if  one  goes  to  work  patiently 
he  can  trace  every  allusion  here  to  something 
back  in  these  older  leaves.  This  gives  us  the 
clue  to  the  significance  of  this  remarkable 
scene. 

That  clue  seems  in  this  case  to  be  found  in 
the  book  of  Jeremiah,  chapter  thirty-two.  There 
is  found  an  allusion  to  a  simple  primitive  custom 
of  the  Hebrew  people  in  the  exchange  of  real 
estate  and  in  taking  possession  of  property  to 
which  one  is  entitled. 

The  old  Hebrew  custom  seems  to  have  been  as 
follows :  When  property  was  purchased  the  deed 
to  the  new  owner  was  made  out  in  duplicate,  an 
open  copy  and  a  sealed  copy.  The  open  copy 
was  clearly  for  public  information,  open  to  all. 
The  sealed  copy  as  clearly  belonged  only  to  the 
owner  of  the  property  as  his  evidence  of  owner- 
ship. So  it  identified  him  as  the  one  named  in 
the  open  copy. 

If  a  new  heir  comes  to  take  possession  of  an 
estate,  or  in  case  of  a  dispute  over  ownership, 
the  claimant  who  was  adjudged  the  rightful  heir 
or  owner  would  be  given  the  possession  of  the 
sealed  document  or  deed.  And  as  so  attested 
by  the  judge  or  court,  he  only  would  be  properly 
qualified  to  "  take "  the  sealed  roll,  break  its 


148         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

seals,  read  its  contents,  and  so  formally  take 
possession  of  the  estate,  or  property. 

Now  under  the  symbolism  of  this  old  bit  of 
Hebrew  custom,  our  Lord  Jesus  is  represented 
here  as  stepping  forward  to  take  possession  of 
the  earth,  and  begin  His  reign  over  it.  A 
Hebrew  immersed  in  the  old  primitive  customs 
of  his  people  in  Palestine  would  understand  this 
allusion  at  once,  however  startled  or  sceptical  he 
might  be  as  to  its  significance  in  this  connection. 

Taking  Possession. 

The  language  used  in  the  song  of  praise  when 
our  Lord  Jesus  takes  the  sealed  book  is  signifi- 
cant. They  say,  "  thou  art  worthy,"  that  is, 
thou  art  qualified;  thou  art  the  duly  attested  one 
with  the  right  to  take  possession.  "  For  thou 
wast  slain,  and  didst  purchase  unto  God  with 
thy  blood  men  of  every  tribe,''  and  so  on. 

Man  had  been  given  the  dominion  of  the  earth. 
He  had  by  obedience  to  the  evil  one  transferred 
his  right  to  Him  who  is  repeatedly  called  "  the 
prince  of  this  world."  Our  Lord  Jesus  pur- 
chased men  out  of  their  slavery  back  to  their 
original  Lord, — with  all  that  was  rightfully 
theirs.  He  has  allowed  fullest  opportunity  for 
all  who  will  to  accept  His  Lordship.  Now  He 
is  about  to  take  possession  of  the  earth  on  behalf 
of  men,  and  for  them. 

This  is  the  tremendous  significance  of  what 
John  is  shown  here  as  something  that  will  take 
place  hereafter.    In  the  scene  of  the  candlesticks 


An  Advance  Step  149 

He  is  patiently  waiting,  holding  Himself  in  re- 
straint. Now  the  waiting  time  is  over.  He  is 
making  the  next  move  in  His  broader  plan  for 
the  earth. 

There  is  no  hint  as  to  the  length  of  interval 
between  the  two  scenes,  how  long  He  will  wait. 
There  is  no  suggestion  as  to  when  this  next  move 
will  be  made.  But  we  are  here  plainly  told  that 
at  some  time  that  candlestick  waiting  time  will 
end,  and  He  will  take  a  forward  step  in  connec- 
tion with  His  plans  for  the  earth.  And  it  should 
be  keenly  noticed  that  what  follows  now  in  this 
book  of  Revelation  is  the  run  of  events  that  will 
immediately  follow  that  next  step  of  His. 

Yet  this  step  is  taken  up  in  heaven.  The  first 
action  of  the  new  move  will  be  there.  There 
will  be  nothing  to  be  seen  on  the  earth  to  indi- 
cate the  change.  Things  there  will  go  on  as 
before,  eating  and  drinking,  buying  and  selling, 
marrying  and  giving  in  marriage,  all  unconscious 
of  the  tremendous  events  being  worked  out. 

But  now  the  waiting  time  still  waits.  Our 
opportunity  is  still  open.  If  we  might  only  be 
simple  enough  to  be  true  to  our  absent  Lord 
Jesus  during  this  waiting  time. 

A  bishop  of  the  American  Episcopal  Church, 
widely  known  for  his  saintly  character,  his  cul- 
ture, and  long  years  of  tireless  service,  was  vis- 
iting in  the  South.  In  the  town  there  lived  a 
judge  of  wide  repute  for  his  scholarly  learning 
as  well  as  for  his  culture  and  uprightness.  Now 
he  was  seriously  ill,  and  had  requested  an  inter- 
view with  the  bishop. 


150        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

He  asked  the  bishop  to  talk  to  him  about  per- 
sonal religion.  And  the  clergyman  talked  to  this 
thoughtful,  scholarly  judge  in  choice  philo- 
sophical language  about  the  fatherhood  of  God, 
the  character  of  Christ,  and  the  essential  har- 
mony of  man's  true  nature  with  God.  The  judge 
listened  attentively  for  some  time. 

Then  he  apologetically  interrupted  his  visitor, 
and  said: 

"  Bishop,  I'm  dying.  Won't  you  please  talk 
to  me  just  like  you'd  talk  to  my  black  boy, 
Jim?" 

And  the  bishop  could,  and  did.  He  told  him 
in  simplest  talk  that  he  was  a  sinner.  Jesus  cHed 
to  save  sinners.  His  blood  washes  away  our 
sins.  We  must  take  Christ  as  a  Saviour,  just 
trust  Him,  as  simply  as  a  child  trusts  its 
mother. 

So  he  talked.  And  the  Judge  listened.  And 
the  tears  came,  and  the  peace.  He  came  as  a 
child,  and  trusted,  and  he  knew  the  peace  that 
passeth  understanding.  It  was  the  simple  telling 
of  the  simple  story  of  the  Saviour  who  died,  and 
the  simple,  child-like  acceptance  of  that  Saviour. 
The  scholarly  bishop  helped  the  learned  judge 
best,  in  the  crisis  of  his  life,  by  talking  as  simply 
as  to  a  child. 

If  we  might  only  be  simple  enough  to  be  true 
to  this  Jesus  who  died,  during  the  remnant  of 
waiting  time  that  remains. 


VI.— A  CLEARING-UP  STORM   IN 
THE  REALM 


"  God  Almighty !  King  of  nations !  earth  Thy  footstool, 
heaven  Thy  throne! 

Thine  the  greatness,  power,  and  glory,  Thine  the 
kingdom,  Lord,  alone! 

Life  and  death  are  in  Thy  keeping,  and  Thy  will 
ordaineth  all: 

From  the  armies  of  Thy  heavens  to  an  unseen  in- 
sect's fall. 

"Reigning,    guiding,    all-commanding,    ruling    myriad 

worlds  of  light; 
Now  exalting,  now  abasing,  none  can  stay  Thy  hand 

of  might! 
Working  all  things  by  Thy  power,  by  the   counsel 

of  Thy  will. 
Thou  art  God !  enough  to  know  it,  and  to  hear  Thy 

word :    *  Be    still ! ' 

"In  Thy  sovereignty  rejoicing,  we  Thy  children  bow 
and  praise. 
For  we  know  that  kind  and  loving,  just  and  true, 

are  all  Thy  ways. 
While  Thy  heart  of  sovereign  mercy,  and  Thy  arm 

of  sovereign  might, 
For  our  great  and  strong  salvation  in  Thy  sovereign 
grace  unite." 

— Frances  Ridley  Havergal. 


A  CLEARING-UP  STORM   IN 
THE  REALM 

(Revelation,  Chapters  vi.-viii.) 

The  Area  of  the  Storm. 

Goodness  arouses  evil.  Faithfulness  to  Christ 
stirs  opposition.  This  is  a  commonplace.  A 
piece  of  white-hot  metal  plunged  into  cold  water 
makes  a  great  fuss.  Two  areas  of  sharply  dif- 
ferent temperatures  in  the  atmosphere  above  us 
coming  suddenly  together  make  a  storm. 

Purity  entering  an  atmosphere  of  impurity  and 
insisting  on  staying,  and  on  keeping  pure,  creates 
a  lively  disturbance.  The  tempter  was  aroused 
to  his  subtlest  effort  when  Jesus  appeared.  There 
is  no  such  demoniac  activity  recorded  as  when 
Jesus  walked  among  men. 

So  crowning  a  king  arouses  opposition,  if  there 
be  opposition.  And  the  active  taking  of  the  reins 
of  government  has  intensified  the  opposition 
when  it  was  strong  enough  to  make  a  stand.  The 
striking  illustration  of  this  in  the  Bible  is  King 
David.  After  Saul's  death  the  men  of  Judah 
anointed  David  king.  That  was  the  signal  for 
an  immediate  attack  by  the  chief  of  the  forces 
of  Saul's  house.  And  this  was  succeeded  by 
a  long  war,  before  David  was  acknowledged  as 
153 


154        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

king  over  all  Israel.  The  clearing-up  storm  in 
his  realm  lasted  a  good  while  before  good 
weather  came. 

Here  in  this  Revelation  scene  we  have  been 
looking  at  our  Lord  Jesus  is  represented  as  step- 
ping forward  to  take  possession  of  His  realm. 
It  is  natural  to  expect  a  storm.  This  will  be 
a  signal  to  the  opposition  to  rally  all  its  power. 
But  there  can  be  no  question  about  the  outcome 
of  such  a  set-to.  That  storm  proves  to  be  a 
clearing-up  storm  in  the  realm.  It  is  to  be  fol- 
lowed by  such  fine  moral  weather  as  has  not  been 
known  before.  But  the  storm  itself  proves  to 
be  a  terrific  one  for  the  earth  while  it  lasts. 

The  greater  part  of  this  little  end-book  is  taken 
up  with  a  description  of  that  storm.  But  be- 
fore we  turn  to  this  book  itself  and  its  storm, 
we  want  to  get  our  bearings  a  bit,  so  as  to  un- 
derstand better  what  is  here.  Revelation  is  the 
knot  in  the  end  of  a  big  bunch  of  threads.  We 
shall  understand  the  knot  better  by  knowing 
more  about  the  threads  before  they  are  tied  into 
the  knot. 

The  storm  area  proves  to  be  very  large.  It 
takes  in  the  whole  earth.  The  Bible  is  a  big 
book  in  its  outlook  and  grasp.  It  deals  with 
the  whole  earth,  and  the  whole  race.  The 
thoughtful  Bible  student  comes  to  have  a  broad 
outlook,  as  well  as  a  close  lookout  about  his 
own  front  and  back  doors. 

It  is  fascinating  to  study  the  geography  of  the 
Bible.  We  talk  about  the  world  growing  smaller. 
That  refers  of  course  to  the  rapidity  of  transit. 


A  Clearlng-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     155 

It  is  only  within  a  few  hundred  years  that  we 
have  learned  of  the  earth  being  round.  The 
Bible  map  includes  practically  the  whole  world 
as  we  have  come  to  know  it. 

The  centre  of  the  world  as  seen  on  this  map 
may  seem  a  little  surprising.  We  Americans 
feel  that  the  centre  of  things  is  here.  The  Eng- 
lishman knows  that  it  is  in  London;  and  lately 
the  Germans  have  had  the  same  exckisive  sort 
of  knowledge  about  Berlin.  The  Chinese  has 
long  called  his  country  "  the  Middle  Kingdom," 
in  the  sense  of  its  being  the  central  kingdom 
about  which  the  rest  of  the  world  revolves.  But 
here  the  centre  is  seen  to  be  on  the  boundary 
line,  practically,  between  Orient  and  Occident, 
reaching  out  an  embracing  arm  to  each. 

We  have  a  broad  division  of  the  earth  into 
East  and  West.  The  dififerences  between  the 
two,  in  civilization,  mode  of  thought,  religion, 
language,  and  so  on,  are  so  radical  as  to  make 
it  seem  that  there  was  no  point  of  contact.  At 
least  this  has  been  emphasized  much  by  western 
writers  on  the  East.  We  are  disturbed  just  now 
here  in  the  far  West  over  the  Oriental,  Chinese 
Japanese  and  Indian  crossing  the  far  boundary 
line  between  Orient  and  Occident  and  coming 
into  the  United  States  and  Canada. 

Yet  East  and  West  have  always  overlapped 
at  the  middle  boundary  line.  There  is  a  great 
mixture  of  races  in  the  strip  where  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  West  and  the  western  edge  of  the 
East  come  together.  It  is  the  strip  running 
roughly  north  and  south  where  Russia's  west- 


156        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

ern  border  and  Turkey's  touch  Germany  and 
Austria  and  Greece,  including  the  never-at-rest 
Balkan  Peninsula.  Constantinople  sits  on  the 
dividing  line  between  East  and  West,  with  the 
worst  of  both  civilizations  within  her  confines. 
Here  the  hemispheres  touch  and  their  life  cur- 
rents intermingle  and  flow  together. 

Scientific  research  seems  to  find  good  evi- 
dence that  all  our  European  civilization,  which 
of  course  means  American  too,  may  have  been 
brought  over  by  Eastern  immigrants  from  cen- 
tral Asia  long  ages  ago,  Asia  coming  into  Eu- 
rope. Perhaps  we  Westerners  would  not  despise 
the  Easterners  so  contemptuously  and  patroniz- 
ingly if  we  knew  how  much  we  are  probably 
indebted  to  them  for  our  civilization  as  well  as 
for  our  Hebrew  and  Christian  faith,  our  Bible, 
and  the  Christian  restraining  bulwarks  of  our 
common  life. 

The  old  common  point  of  contact  between 
Orient  and  Occident  was  the  strip  of  land  form- 
ing the  western  edge  of  the  Orient  at  the  eastern 
end  of  the  Mediterranean.  Palestine  has  been 
for  centuries  the  common  roadway  of  all  nations, 
East  and  West.  No  bit  of  earth  has  been  so 
tramped  and  trampled  by  the  feet  of  all  na- 
tions and  races.  This  has  been  the  battlefield 
of  the  nations  through  long  centuries.  The  ends 
of  the  earth  have  met  here.  It  is  interesting 
that  the  waters  that  wash  its  western  shore 
are  called  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  that  is,  the 
middle-of-the-earth  sea. 

Here  then  is  the  centre  of  the  map.    It  is  the 


A  Clearlng-up  Storm  In  the  Realm     157 

centre  of  all  things  in  the  Bible.  And  it  has 
proven  to  be  at  the  centre  of  human  action 
through  history,  attested  by  the  very  name  given 
to  the  chief  body  of  water  there. 

Jerusalem,  the  capital  city  of  this  Palestine 
strip,  was  the  centre  of  a  world  power  in  the 
early  ages.  It  has  been  the  world  capital.  And 
it  has  in  turn  been  fought  over  and  conquered 
by  every  world  power.  No  city  has  been  a 
world  centre  of  action  during  as  long  a  stretch 
of  time,  and  to  as  many  different  nations. 

Out  from  this  centre  the  action  of  the  Bible 
reaches  north  to  Russia,  south  to  Africa  (Ethio- 
pia), east  to  China  (Sinim,  Isaiah  xlix.  12),  and 
west  to  Spain.  That  practically  includes  the 
world  of  our  day.  America  is  of  course  merely 
a  transplanted  seedling  of  Europe. 

Those  great  Hebrew  leaders  called  prophets 
had  a  world  outlook.  They  were  world  mes- 
sengers. It  is  intensely  interesting  to  take  a 
piece  of  paper,  and  pencil  a  rough  map  of  the 
nations  named  in  their  messages,  notably  Isaiah,^ 
Jeremiah,^  Ezekiel,^  and  Daniel.*  Beginning  at 
Jerusalem  and  Israel  they  reach  first  this  way, 
then  that,  up  and  down,  back  and  forth,  until 
the  whole  world  of  action  of  that  day  has  been 
touched.  They  were  men  of  world  size.  They 
had  a  world  outlook  and  a  world  message. 

But  then  God's  man  always  has.  The  world 
outlook  of  Jesus  was  tremendous.     And  every 

*  Isaiah  xiii.-xxiv.  "  Jeremiah  xlvi.-li. 
'  Ezekiel  xxv.-xxxii.,  xxxviii.-xxxix. 

*  Daniel,  throughout,  notably  vii.-xii. 


158        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

true  disciple  of  Jesus  Christ  has  the  world  out- 
look. Grace  broadens  as  well  as  refining.  It  is 
one  of  the  endless  outworkings  of  sin  that  tends 
toward  that  narrowing  provincialism  which 
everywhere  hinders  so  much,  and  so  intensely. 

Now  in  this  world  map  in  the  Bible  geog- 
raphy two  cities  stand  out  beyond  all  others, 
Jerusalem  and  Babylon;  Jerusalem  the  centre 
of  God's  people  and  of  God's  plans,  Babylon 
the  centre  of  the  opposing  worldly  power.  These 
are  the  two  outstanding  cities  of  the  Bible 
world. 

Between  these  two  there  is  an  enmity  and 
warfare  that  is  practically  continuous.  Jerusa- 
lem comes  to  be  the  typical  of  God's  people  and 
power  and  kingdom.  Babylon  stands  out  like- 
wise as  typical  of  the  power  and  kingdom  al- 
ways and  innately  opposed  to  God  and  to  His 
people.  The  conflict  between  the  two  seems 
irrepressible  and  irreconcilable.  It  is  never  out 
of  view. 

Babylon  has  been  the  centre,  under  successive 
dynasties,  of  a  world  empire,  including  not  only 
part  of  Asia,  but  reaching  west  to  Europe  and 
south  to  Africa.  It  sat  practically  in  the  con- 
necting strip  of  Orient  and  Occident,  ruling  over 
both.  In  the  dim  dawn  of  history  a  God- 
ignoring,  and  so  really  a  God-defying  and  man- 
exalting  movement,  centred  in  the  city  called 
Babel.  And  from  that  time  on  that  city,  and 
its  successor  Babylon,  have  seemed  as  though 
possessed  with  a  spirit  of  antagonism  to  God 
and  His  people.     It  is  as  though  it  were  the 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm    159 

earthly  headquarters  of  the  blasphemous  unseen 
evil  forces. 

This  is  a  simple  bit  of  geography  lesson  in 
the  Old  Testament.  This  is  the  map  that  lies 
ever  open  in  these  older  pages,  with  its  two 
capital  cities  marked  large.  And  this  indicates 
the  area  of  the  storm,  and  the  two  central  points 
where  its  outburst  will  centre. 


Studying  the  Weather  Forecast. 

It  is  interesting  to  find  a  weather  forecast  of 
this  storm.  The  old  Hebrew  prophets  were 
close  students  of  national  and  world-wide 
weather  conditions,  and  much  given  to  making 
forecasts  of  impending  storms.  Even  in  the 
New  Testament  there  is  this  distinct  prophetic 
or  foretelling  strain  running  throughout.  The 
father  of  John  the  Baptist  is  told  of  his  son's 
birth;  and  Mary,  of  the  unusual  birth  of  her 
divine  Son.  The  disciples  are  told  of  the  com- 
ing of  the  Holy  Spirit.  And  Agabus  tells  of  a 
great  famine  coming.  In  these  instances  the 
fulfilment  follows  soon  after  the  event  is  fore- 
told. 

The  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  foretold  by 
Christ,  had  at  least  a  part  of  its  fulfilment  in 
the  terrible  Titus  siege  of  70  a.d.  Our  Lord  said 
that  He  would  return  to  earth  in  great  gloiy, 
and  that  there  would  come  a  great  tribulation 
to  all  the  earth,  and  repeated  the  old  prophecy 
of  a  restoration  of  the  Hebrew  kingdom.  These 
have  not  yet  occurred. 


i6o        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

But  the  book  of  the  Revelation  is  distinctively 
the  prophetic  book  of  the  New  Testament.  It 
deals  almost  entirely  with  events  that  are  yet  to 
come.  It  would  be  natural  that  it  would  fit  into 
the  prophetic  parts  of  the  Old  Testament.  So 
that  one  who  is  somewhat  familiar  with  the 
prophetic  books  of  the  Old  naturally  comes  more 
intelligently  to  this  prophetic  book  of  the  New. 

It  is  true  that  most  of  us  have  a  sense  of  be- 
wilderment about  prophecy.  We  seem  to  feel 
that  it  requires  great  scholarship  and  profound 
study,  and  that  an  understanding  of  it  is  not 
possible  to  the  common  run  of  Christians.  And 
so  we  largely  leave  it  out  as  not  understandable. 

Yet  prophecy  is  simply  God's  plans  for  the 
future,  together  with  a  revelation  of  other  events 
which  are  not  in  His  plan,  but  which  He  sees 
will  happen  in  the  future.  In  it  He  tells  us  what 
He  means  us  to  understand.  And  more  than 
this,  our  understanding  will  have  practical  bear- 
ing on  our  attitude  toward  evil  and  compromise. 
It  will  affect  our  faith,  making  it  steadier,  espe- 
cially when  evil  seems  triumphant  and  over- 
bearing. It  will  make  our  prayer  more  intelli- 
gent and  conlBdent. 

There  are  certain  things  we  all  know.  As 
we  read  back  into  these  pages  we  know  that  the 
break-up  of  the  Jewish  nation,  which  began  with 
the  Babylonian  Captivity,  came  to  a  terrible  cli- 
max in  a  complete  break-up  after  the  rejection 
of  Christ.  We  know  that  the  other  nations 
commonly  called  Gentiles  (i.e.,  the  nations)  have 
had  supremacy  in  the  earth.    Israel  was  at  one 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  In  the  Realm     i6i 

time  acknowledged  as  the  great  world  power, 
with  many  subject  nations,  in  Solomon's  time. 

But  Gentile  supremacy  begins  back  in  the 
time  of  these  Old  Testament  pages.  There  is 
to-day  practically  no  belief  that  this  will  ever 
be  changed,  except  perhaps  by  a  stray  Jew  here 
and  there,  who  still  holds  to  his  old  Bible,  and 
except  by  those  Christians  who  discern  God's 
plan,  and  believe  both  in  Him  and  in  it. 

In  the  absence  of  an  understanding  of  that 
plan  of  God,  it  has  been  common  to  apply  all 
the  glowing  prophetic  Hebrew  promises  to  the 
Church.  The  result  has  been  that  Israel  and 
the  Kingdom  have  been  confused  in  our  minds 
with  the  Church.  And  this  has  become  the  com- 
monplace in  the  common  Church  consciousness. 

It  is  quite  possible  for  the  person  of  average 
good  sense  to  get  something  of  a  simple,  broad 
grasp  of  the  prophetic  books.  It  involves  read- 
ing repeatedly  so  as  to  get  familiar  with  the 
contents,  and  rapidly  so  as  not  to  get  too  much 
absorbed  in  details. 

It  is  needful  to  use  a  common-sense  interpre- 
tation in  getting  at  the  meaning.  It  is  a  simple 
law  that  one  principle  of  interpretation  should 
be  applied  uniformly  and  consistently  to  all  parts 
of  any  one  document.  If  I  say  arbitrarily,  "  this 
part  is  rhetorical;  it  doesn't  mean  just  what  it 
says,  but  something  else;  and  this  other  part 
means  just  what  it  says,"  clearly  I  am  reading 
my  own  ideas  and  prejudices  into  the  book. 

It  is  much  slower,  and  takes  more  pains  and 
patience,  to  keep  at  it  until  all  parts  gradually 


1 62        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

clear  up  to  us,  first  this  bit,  then  that,  until 
part  fits  part,  and  all  hang  together.  But  there 
is  great  fascination  in  it,  and  one's  reverence 
for  this  revelation  of  God's  Word  grows  deeper. 

Of  course  there  is  rhetorical  language  here  as 
everywhere.  **  The  Lord  is  my  shepherd "  is 
clearly  rhetorical.  For  God  is  not  a  shepherd, 
and  I  am  not  a  sheep,  but  a  man.  But  under 
this  simple,  clearly  rhetorical  language  the  ten- 
der, personal  relationship  God  bears  to  me  is 
beautifully  expressed.  That  such  language  is 
rhetorical  is  clear  to  every  mind  alike. 

And  there  is  a  picture  language  here,  such 
as  speaking  of  purity  of  character  as  "  white 
garments."  The  honest,  earnest,  unprejudiced 
seeker  after  truth  quickly  recognizes  these,  and 
learns  to  become  skilled  in  discerning  what  is 
meant.  We  come  to  see  that  Israel  means 
Israel,  not  the  Church.  Jerusalem  means  that 
city  in  Judea,  and  so  on. 

Of  course  it  is  needful  that  there  be  an  open- 
mindedness,  a  humble,  teachable  spirit,  willing  to 
accept  the  real  truth,  no  matter  how  it  may  shake 
up  one's  prejudices  and  prearranged  schemes  of 
thought.  And,  above  all,  there  should  be  a  con- 
stant prayer  fulness  of  spirit,  to  learn  just  what 
our  God  is  seeking  to  have  us  know.  Of  course 
there  are  depths  here  for  the  scholarly,  profound 
minds.  But  we  ordinary  folk  can  get  a  simple, 
clear  grasp  of  God's  plan  and  revealed  insight 
into  the  future  if  we  go  at  it  in  this  thought- 
ful, prayerful  way.  And  it  will  be  a  great  help 
to  us  to  do  so. 


A  Clearlng-up  Storm  In  the  Realm     163 


Three  Great  Unfulfilled  Events. 

Let  us  take  a  swift  glance  at  these  prophetic 
books  of  the  Old  Testament.  It  helps  to  remem- 
ber the  natural  way  in  which  these  prophetic 
books  grew  up.  These  prophets  were  preachers 
and  teachers.  Here  are  some  people  going  up 
to  the  temple  service  one  day  in  Jerusalem.  As 
they  get  near  the  temple  they  notice  a  little  knot 
of  people  standing  yonder  at  a  corner  listening 
to  a  man  talking  earnestly.  Isaiah,  fresh  from 
the  presence  of  God,  is  talking  out  of  a  burning 
heart  to  the  crowd. 

A  visitor  from  another  part  of  the  land  says 
curiously  to  his  companion,  **  What's  that  ?  ''  The 
other  replies :  "  Oh,  it's  only  Isaiah  talking  to 
the  people.  He  is  a  good  man,  that  Isaiah,  a 
well-meaning,  earnest  man,  but  a  little  too  in- 
tense, I  fear."  And  they  pass  on  to  the  temple 
service.  By  and  by  Isaiah  stops.  The  moving 
congregation  scatters.  He  slips  quietly  down 
to  his  house,  and  under  the  Spirit's  holy,  brood- 
ing presence  writes  down  a  part  of  what  he  has 
been  saying.  So  there  grew  up  the  rolls  to 
which  his  name  is  attached. 

In  some  such  simple,  natural  way  these 
prophetic  books  grew  up,  always  under  the  Holy 
Spirit's  guidance  and  control.  They  are  full  of 
intense  fire,  and  of  the  homely  talk  of  street 
and  market  and  fireside.  There  are  two  sorts 
of  these  prophets,  the  preachers  like  Elijah 
and   Elisha  and  those  who   wrote  as   well   as 


164        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

spoke,  and  whose  names  are  preserved  in  these 
books. 

There  are  seventeen  of  these  little  books. 
They  fall  easily  into  four  groups.  The  first 
group  contains  those  belonging  in  the  time  before 
the  nation  was  exiled.  It  is  a  period  of  about 
one  hundred  and  fifty  years,  roughly,  beginning 
in  the  prosperous  reign  of  Uzziah  and  running 
up  to  the  time  when  the  nation  was  taken  captive 
to  Babylon.  Isaiah  is  the  most  prominent 
prophet  of  this  period,  and  with  him  are  Hosea, 
Micah,  and  Amos,  all  of  whom  may  have  been 
personally  acquainted;  and  also  Zephaniah  and 
Habakkuk. 

The  second  is  the  exile  group,  Jeremiah 
preaching  in  Judah,  before  and  during  the  siege, 
and  to  the  remnant  left  behind  in  the  land ;  and 
Ezekiel  and  Daniel  bearing  their  witness  among 
the  exiles  in  the  foreign  land. 

The  third  group  is  made  up  of  those  who  wit- 
nessed after  the  people  are  allowed  to  return 
to  their  own  land  again.  The  writer  of  the 
second  part  of  Isaiah  probably  preached  to  the 
people  as  the  opportunity  came  to  return  to 
Jerusalem.^     Haggai  and  Zachariah  stirred   up 

^  The  book  of  Isaiah  falls  naturally  into  two  parts, 
chapters  i.-xl.,  and  xH.-lxvi.  The  historical  allusions 
in  each  make  it  quite  clear  that  these  two  parts  belong 
in  two  periods  far  apart.  One  hundred  and  eighty- 
years  intervene  between  the  close  of  the  time  stated  in 
Isaiah's  first  chapter  as  the  period  of  his  ministry  and 
the  beginning  of  the  return  from  exile  into  which  the 
second  part  fits. 

But   the    full   inspiration   of   the   second   part   is  in 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     165 

the  returned  people  to  rebuild  the  temple.  Joel 
and  Malachi  witnessed  probably  a  little  later 
in  the  same  period. 

The  fourth  is  the  foreign  group.  Obadiah 
sends  a  message  to  the  neighbouring  nation  of 
Edom;  and  Jonah  and  Nahum  are  sent  with 
messages  to  Nineveh.  If  one  will  try  to  make 
a  picture  of  these  people  and  events  by  reading 
the  historical  books,  and  then  watch  and  listen 
as  the  prophets  talk,  it  will  do  much  to  make 
these  prophetic  books  full  of  the  native  atmos- 
phere in  which  they  grew  up. 

Now  there  are  three  things  that  gradually 
come  to  stand  out  in  these  prophetic  books. 
Much  of  what  is  being  said  is  of  immediate  ap- 
plication. It  refers  plainly  to  affairs  being  lived 
out  then.  Then  certain  things  are  plainly  ful- 
filled in  the  coming  of  Christ.  And  again  there 
is  a  great  deal  that  clearly  has  never  been 
fulfilled  but  is  still  future.  It  is  the  latter  part 
that  naturally  is  of  intensest  interest. 

Now  in  this  latter  part,  dealing  with  the  fu- 
ture, three  things  stand  out  clear  and  sharp  above 
the  rest.  There  is  to  be  judgment  upon  Israel 
for  their  iniquities.  The  changes  on  this  are 
rung  again  and  again.  And  this  stands  out  as 
much  in  the  preaching  of  the  Captivity  time, 
and  of  the  Return,  as  before  the  Captivity.  But 
in  the  midst  of  severest  judgment  there  will  be 

no  wise  affected.  This  rarely  Spirit-controlled  man 
modestly  or  unconsciously  withholds  his  name  from  his 
writings.  And  they  are  grouped  by  the  old  Hebrew 
compilers  with  those  of  Isaiah. 


1 66        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

a  remnant  spared.  The  tree  is  cut  down,  but 
the  stump  is  spared;  and  there  is  life  in  the 
stump.  But  above  these  there  stand  out  these 
three  things. 

The  -first  thing  stands  out  big.  It  is  the  thing 
the  nation  never  forgot.  The  beUeving  Hebrew- 
still  clings  to  it.  The  wailers  at  the  wall  of 
Jerusalem  to-day  never  forget  it.  It  is  this: 
there  is  to  be  a  future  time  of  great  glory  for 
the  nation  of  Israel  in  their  own  loved  land} 
The  kingdom  is  to  be  restored,  but  with  a  glory- 
indescribably  greater  than  ever  known.  This  is 
the  bright  golden  thread,  thick  and  strong,  run- 
ning through  from  end  to  end. 

It  will  come  through  that  spared  remnant. 
The  old  stump  will  put  out  a  new  shoot.  It 
will  be  through  the  coming  of  a  great  king, 
who  will  prove  to  be  their  greatest  king,*  and 
will  reign  not  only  over  Israel,  but  over  all 
nations  as  tributary  to  Israel,  with  Jerusalem 
as  the  capital  city  both  of  Israel  and  of  the 
whole  earth.*  At  its  beginning  there  will  be  a 
gathering  of  Israel  from  among  all  the  nations 
where  they  have  been  scattered.*  To  assist  these 
scattered  pilgrims  to  get  to  their  own  land,  the 
tongue  of  the  Egyptian  sea  on  the  southwest  is 
to  be  destroyed ;  and  the  waters  of  the  Euphrates 
on  the  extreme  east  are  to  be  so  scattered  or 
dried  up  that  men  can  walk  over  dry-shod. 

When  the  great  king  comes  there  will  be 
genuine  penitence  among  the  people  over  their 

Msaiah  ii.  2-4.  *  Isaiah  xi.  1-9;  xxxii.  1-6. 

'  Micah  iv.  1*8.  *  Isaiah  xi.  11-16;  xxvii.  12-13, 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     167 

past  sins,^  and  they  will  become  a  wholly  changed 
people.^  Israel  will  be  a  nation  converted  by 
the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit  through  the  con- 
version of  the  people  individually.  There  will 
be  at  this  time  a  resurrection  of  God's  people 
who  have  died.^ 

The  new  reign  and  kingdom  is  to  be  one  of 
great  spiritual  enlightenment  to  all  nations.* 
There  will  be  everywhere  a  new,  remarkable 
openmindedness  to  God  and  His  truth. ^  And 
there  will  be  the  same  visible  evidence  of  the 
presence  of  God  at  Jerusalem  as  when  the  pillar 
of  fire  and  cloud  was  with  them  in  the  wilder- 
ness. That  wondrous  presence-cloud  is  to  be 
always  in  view." 

This  sounds  to  our  ears  like  the  highly  col- 
oured visionary  dream  of  some  over-enthusiastic 
Hebrew.  Yet  this  is  a  calm  statement  of  what 
is  found  here.  And  be  it  keenly  marked,  it  is 
a  picture  which  the  godly  Hebrew  of  the  old 
time  never  lost  sight  of.  This  is  the  first  thing 
that  stands  out  in  these  prophetic  pages. 

The  second  thing  stands  out  distinctly.  Pre- 
ceding this  wondrous  kingdom  the  earth  will  be 
visited  by  terrible  judgments^  There  is  an 
awfully  dark  shadow  before  the  blaze  of  light 
breaks  out.  A  terrific  storm  will  come  before 
the   sun   shines   out   in   its   new   strength.     All 

*  Zechariah  xii.  10-14. 

*  Jeremiah  xxxi.  8-19,  33,  34. 

*  Isaiah  xxvi.   19 ;  Daniel  xii.  2. 

*  Micah  iv.  1-2.      "  Isaiah  xxv.  7.      *  Isaiah  iv.  2-5. 
'Isaiah  xxiv.  1-13,  17-20;  ii.  12-19;  Micah  vii.  15-17- 


1 68         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

nations  will  combine  to  make  war  against  the 
Jew.  Their  forces  will  be  gathered  at  Jerusa- 
lem.^ At  the  head  of  the  coalition  will  be  a 
power  called  Babylon.-  There  will  come  a  ter- 
rific battle,  victory  for  the  coalition  will  seem 
assured.  The  sufferings  of  the  Jews  will  be 
indescribable. 

Then  there  will  come  a  day  never  after  to  be 
.  forgotten.  In  the  midst  of  the  indescribable 
horrors  of  that  battle,  when  things  are  at  their 
worst  for  the  Jew,  then  comes  the  deliverance. 
Suddenly  Jehovah  will  appear  out  of  the  heavens, 
with  a  great  company  of  holy  ones.  His  feet 
will  stand  upon  Mount  Olivet  to  the  east  of 
Jerusalem.  There  will  be  a  terrible  earthquake, 
and  an  equally  terrific  shake-up  of  the  heavenly 
bodies.  The  luminaries,  sun,  moon,  and  stars, 
will  be  darkened.^  There  will  be  terrible  judg- 
ments visited  not  only  upon  the  earth,  but  upon 
the  evil  spirit  powers.*  Repeated  emphasis  is 
put  upon  the  judgment  to  be  visited  upon 
Babylon. 

All  this  will  sound  like  a  veritable  fairy  tale 
to  many  who  are  not  familiar  with  this  Book 
of  God ;  the  unlikeliest  thing  imaginable.  Yet 
this  is  the  thing  seriously  set  forth  throughout 
these  old  prophetic  pages.  I  have  given  a  few 
references  in  footnotes.  But  these  few  scat- 
tered passages  of  themselves  will  not  give  an 
adequate  conception  of  what  these  pages  hold. 

^  Zechariah  xii.  1-9;  xiv.  1-2.         *  Isaiah  xiii.  1-13. 

'  Zechariah  xiv.  1-8. 

*  Isaiah  xxiv.  21-22 ;  xxvii.  i. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     169 

There  is  all  the  fascination  of  a  novel,  and 
immensely  more  and  deeper  fascination  than  any 
novel,  in  reading  these  prophetic  pages  repeat- 
edly in  the  way  already  spoken  of  till  their  mere 
contents  become  somewhat  familiar.  Then  tak- 
ing paper  and  pencil,  running  through  again,  and 
drawing  off  patiently  and  carefully,  item  after 
item  of  these  prophecies  plainly  not  yet  ful- 
filled, and  then  slowly  and  painstakingly  put 
them  together  in  what  would  be  a  simple,  logical 
order. 

It  will  be  helpful,  in  reading,  to  remember 
that  it  is  a  common  thing  with  these  writers 
to  speak  of  a  future  thing  as  already  past.  It 
is  a  bit  of  the  intensity  that  sees  the  thing  that 
is  yet  to  come  as  already  accomplished.  And 
one  should  discern  between  the  immediate  thing 
that  may  likely  occur  in  that  generation  and  the 
far-distant  thing.  A  careful  noting  of  the  lan- 
guage will  make  the  difference  clear. 

This  is  the  second  thing  that  stands  out,  the 
visitation  of  judgments. 

Then  there  is  a  third  thing.  This  terrible 
visitation  of  judgments  comes  in  connection 
with,  and  at  the  close  of,  a  time  of  great  perse- 
cution of  the  Jew  by  the  nations.  Jeremiah 
speaks  of  it  as  the  time  of  Jacob's  trouble,^  and 
the  Man  of  Fire  tells  Daniel  that  there  will  be 
a  time  of  trouble  such  as  never  was  since  there 
was  a  nation  even  to  that  same  time}  This  per- 
secution of  the  Jew,  and  the  visitation  of  judg- 
ments on  the  earth  as  a  deliverance  from  it, 

'Jeremiah  xxx.  7-8.  ^Daniel  xii.  i. 


170         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

are  connected  with  the  setting  up  of  the 
Kingdom. 

These  are  the  three  things  that  stand  domi- 
nantly  out  in  these  prophetic  pages  as  distinctly 
future,  the  great  Jew  persecution  unprecedented 
in  intensity,  the  visitation  of  terrible  judgments 
on  the  earth,  and  the  coming  of  a  glorious  king- 
dom. And  the  three  are  connected.  We  know 
that  no  events  have  yet  taken  place  that  at  all 
satisfy  the  language  used  of  these  three  con- 
nected events. 

This  is  the  simple  outline  of  expected  coming 
events  with  which  the  thoughtful  reader  of  God's 
Word  is  supposed  to  be  familiar.  The  reverent 
student  of  God's  promises  and  plans  and  revela- 
tions would  naturally  have  all  this  clear  and  fresh 
in  his  mind  as  he  turns  to  open  the  pages  of  the 
prophetic  book  of  the  New  Testament. 


Forecast  of  the  Great  Storm. 

Now  it  is  of  intense  interest  to  note  that  our 
Lord  Jesus  speaks  of  these  same  three  things, 
at  much  length,  and  with  much  emphasis;  the 
persecution,  the  visitation  of  judgments,  and 
the  kingdom.  It  came  to  me  as  a  great  surprise 
and  with  startling  force  when  I  realized,  after 
gathering  out  this  summary  from  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, that  the  three  things  that  stand  out  so 
sharply  there  are  the  very  things  Jesus  speaks 
of  here  with  such  fulness  and  emphasis. 

He  puts  special  emphasis  on  the  time  of  per- 
secution as  of  unprecedented  horror  and  ferocity. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     171 

He  plainly  indicates  that  this  will  be  directed 
not  only  against  the  Jew,  but  against  His  own 
followers.  Three  times  this  talk  of  His  on 
Olivet  just  before  His  death  is  given  at  much 
length.^  That  talk  is  given  to  a  little  group  of 
Jewish  disciples  who  have  broken  with  the  Jew- 
ish leaders,  and  who  become  the  great  leaders  of 
the  Church  formed  at  Pentecost. 

He  speaks  of  that  terrible  experience  as 
"  great  tribulation,"  ^  "  such  as  there  hath  not 
been  the  like  from  the  beginning  of  the  creation 
which  God  created  until  now,  nor  ever  shall 
be."  ^  We  shall  find  it  spoken  of  in  this  book 
of  Revelation  as  "  the  tribulation,  the  great 
one."  ^  It  has  come  to  be  spoken  of  commonly 
as  ''  the  tribulation "  and  "  the  great  tribula- 
tion." 

With  all  this  fresh  in  mind,  a  run  back  through 
the  Old  Testament  brings  out  that  it  is  spoken 
of  there  much  more  than  we  may  have  realized. 
The  warning  to  Israel,  at  Sinai,  as  they  made 
the  covenant  of  allegiance  with  God,  of  the  bitter 
punishment  that  would  come  if  they  were  un- 
true, has  seemed  many  times  as  though  couched 
in  very  intense,  almost  extreme  language.^  But 
it  is  found  to  fit  into  these  later  descriptions  of 
this  great  tribulation  to  come.  That  warning  is 
repeated,  in  as  intense  words  and  with  a  greater 
fulness,  by  Moses  in  his  series  of  farewell  talks 

*  Matthew  xxiv.-xxv ;   Mark  xiii ;   Luke  xxi. 

'  Matthew  xxiv.  21,  29.  '  Mark  xiii.  19. 

*  Revelation  vii.  14  literally. 
**  Leviticus  xxvi.  I4-39* 


172         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

in  the  Plains  of  Moab,^  and  it  runs  through  the 
song  he  left  for  their  use.^ 

The  experiences  of  the  people  of  Israel  in 
Egypt  are  found  to  be  an  illustration  of  the 
coming  experience  at  the  end,  great  persecution 
and  suffering,  then  great  deliverance  through  a 
visitation  of  judgment  upon  their  persecutors, 
and  great  revelation  of  God's  glory  following. 
And  the  experience  of  the  three  young  Hebrew 
exiles  in  Babylon  comes  to  mind.  They  went 
through  the  fire,  seven  times  heated,  and  they 
had  a  marvellous  deliverance,  and  then  high 
promotion.^ 

Certain  Psalms  shine  with  new  light  in  the 
light  of  this  terrible  truth.  Chief  among  these 
is  the  Ninety-first.  Quite  likely  it  grew  up  out 
of  the  experience  of  Israel  at  the  last  before 
leaving  Egypt.  It,  of  course,  has  its  practical 
use  in  one's  daily  life.  But  the  vividness  and 
intensity  of  its  meaning  will  probably  never  be 
realized  as  during  the  coming  tribulation  days. 
Nor  will  the  exultant  note  running  through  the 
nine  Psalms  immediately  following  it  be  appre- 
ciated as  by  those  experiencing  deliverance  when 
the  tribulation  is  over.  The  Forty-sixth  Psalm, 
and  the  Psalms  of  praise  immediately  following 
it,  likewise  seem  to  get  new  light. 

It  is  quite  probable  that  very  much,  all  through 
this  Book  of  Psalms,  will  be  understood  and 
appreciated  fully  only  by  the  generation  of  God's 
people  that  go  through  the  tribulation  and  know 

*  Deuteronomy  xxviii.  15-68.      *  Deuteronomy  xxxii. 
'  Daniel  iii. 


A  Clearing  up  Storm  In  the  Realm     173 

the  deliverance  follov/ing.  Much  of  the  old  Book 
of  God  is  quite  meaningless  to  the  Christian  who 
has  had  no  tribulation  experience.  That  is,  I 
mean  who  has  never  known  opposition  in  his 
Christian  faith,  or  who  has  slipped  easily  along 
when  there  is  opposition. 

The  outstanding  features  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment of  this  great  experience  are  terrible  perse- 
cution of  the  Jew,  deliverance  at  the  very  worst 
pitch  of  extremity,  by  a  visitation  of  judgment 
on  their  enemies,  and  by  Jehovah  coming  in  per- 
son for  their  deliverance ;  and  then  the  great 
Kingdom  following. 

The  outstanding  features  spoken  of  by  our 
Lord  Jesus  in  His  Olivet  talk  agree  with  this, 
but  go  much  more  into  detail,  especially  about 
the  tribulation.  The  tribulation  will  be  preceded 
by  wars,  rumors  of  wars,  famines,  earthquakes, 
and  persecution.  There  will  be  many  false  relig- 
ious teachers,  many  Christians  untrue  to  their 
faith,  and  a  great  increase  of  wickedness.  This 
is  a  sort  of  foreshadowing. 

The  tribulation  itself  will  find  all  this  enor- 
mously intensified.  It  will  begin  with  some  as- 
tonishing act  of  blasphemy  in  the  temple  in 
Jerusalem,  run  its  terrible  course,  and  close 
with  a  series  of  judgment-events,  earthquake, 
heavens  shaken,  and  great  distress,  ending  in  the 
visible  appearance  of  the  Lbrd  Jesus  Himself, 
out  of  heaven  on  the  clouds.  And  this  will  be 
a  signal  for  great  penitential  mourning  among 
the  people  on  the  earth. 

This,  then,  is  the  simple,  broad  outline  with 


174         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

which  the  thoughtful  reader  of  God's  Word 
would  naturally  be  familiar  as  he  turns  to  this 
prophetic  book  at  the  end  to  get  our  Lord's  last 
message  to  His  followers. 


Getting  a  Broad,  Clear  Outlook. 

As  we  turn  now  again  to  the  book  of  Revela- 
tion it  will  help  us  to  remember  the  general  plan 
followed  in  its  writing.  It  is  like  a  series  of  dis- 
solving views  of  the  same  scene,  each  of  which 
lets  us  see  the  same  thing  from  a  different  point 
of  view. 

This  is  a  simple  teaching  rule  for  getting  a 
clear  grasp  of  what  is  being  taught.  We  are 
familiar  with  it  in  the  Bible.  The  story  of  crea- 
tion is  told  in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis,  and 
then  told  again  in  the  second  chapter  with  de- 
tails not  given  in  the  first,  the  two  together  pre- 
senting the  complete  story.  The  historical  books 
of  Chronicles  present  one  view  of  the  kingdom 
of  Israel,  the  official.  The  books  of  the  Kings 
give  another  look  at  the  same  period;  and  the 
prophetic  books  a  wholly  dififerent  view  as  seen 
by  these  rarely  spiritually  minded  men  of  God. 
Daniel  is  shown  four  visions  of  future  events, 
all  covering  the  same  general  stretch  of  events, 
but  with  a  fuller  description,  here  of  one  part 
and  there  of  another.  The  four  Gospels  are  a 
familiar  illustration  of  the  same  principle  in 
teaching  and  story-telling.  This  is  the  plan  fol- 
lowed here. 

I  was  impressed  anew  with  the  practical  value 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  In  the  Realm     175 

of  this  method  one  day  in  St.  Petersburg.  We 
had  gone  to  look  at  the  panorama  of  the  siege 
of  Sebastopol,  then  on  exhibition  in  a  huge, 
round  building.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the 
British  and  French  allied  themselves  with  Tur- 
key and  Sardinia  in  an  attempt  to  restrain  the 
encroachments  of  Russia  on  Turkish  territory. 
The  famous  charge  of  Balaklava,  immortalized 
by  Tennyson,  is  remembered  as  the  most  stir- 
ring event  of  that  war.  Its  chief  event  was  the 
siege  of  Sebastopol  on  the  Crimea  peninsula,  in 
the  Black  Sea. 

At  the  panorama  we  stood  as  though  on  a 
high  central  point  in  the  city  of  Sebastopol,  with 
the  view  spreading  out  in  all  directions.  To 
the  north  lay  the  harbour  with  the  Russian  ships 
securely  bottled  in  by  the  attacking  fleets.  To 
the  west  a  body  of  French  soldiers  were  re- 
treating, hotly  pursued  by  Russian  troops,  while 
in  the  distance  British  troops  are  hurrying  to 
the  relief  of  the  French. 

Then  we  looked  east,  where  the  fighting  was 
going  on  at  close  range,  the  wounded  being  car- 
ried away  and  the  reserves  hastening  up  to  take 
their  places.  And  again  we  turned  to  the  south, 
where  the  battle  raged  fiercest.  The  face  of  the 
commanding  officer  stood  out  so  vividly.  And 
we  almost  shrank  from  the  fierceness  of  the  fire. 
And  the  smell  of  powder  almost  seemed  stifling. 

And  as  I  stood  brooding  afresh  on  the  horrors 
of  inhuman  war,  I  was  tremendously  impressed 
that  only  by  such  successive  views  could  I  get 
such  a  grasp  of  that  memorable  siege.     I  had 


176         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

a  more  intelligent  and  vivid  understanding  of 
it  than  ever  before. 

And  so  it  is  that  we  may  get  a  simple,  clear, 
and  real  grasp  of  the  tremendous  tribulation 
time  that  is  coming,  that  it  is  presented  to  us 
in  this  fashion,  first  one  distinct  view,  then  an- 
other, and  another,  till  some  understanding  of 
the  whole  begins  to  get  hold  of  us. 

We  have  seen  the  Lord  Jesus,  in  the  vision  in 
chapters  four  and  five,  as  He  comes  'forward 
to  take  an  advance  step.  We  have  seen  the  tre- 
mendous outburst  of  praise  in  heaven  as  He 
steps  forward.  This  step  and  scene  are  in 
heaven.  The  earth  is  wholly  unaware  of  it 
at  that  moment. 

Now  all  that  follows  is  connected  directly 
with  that  advance  step.  This  is  the  significant 
thing  to  get  clearly  fixed  in  mind.  At  the  pres- 
ent time  our  Lord  Jesus  is  still  walking  among 
the  candlestick  Churches  watching  and  waiting. 
We  are  still  in  that  waiting  time.  The  Holy 
Spirit  still  dwells  in  the  Church  on  earth. 

At  some  time  in  the  future,  no  one  knows, 
nor  can  know,  just  when,  the  Lord  Jesus  will 
rise  up  in  readiness  for  an  advance  move.  He 
will  withdraw  the  Holy  Spirit  from  the  Church 
up  into  His  presence  again  "  before  the  throne.'* 
Then  in  connection  with  this  advance  step  there 
will  occur  on  the  earth  the  things  spoken  of  in 
these  pages  following.  This  is  the  tremendous 
fact  to  keep  clear,  the  immediate  connection 
between  these  happenings  on  earth  and  His  new 
move  in  heaven. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     177 

We  come  now  to  these  happenings  on  earth. 
There  are  seven  distinct  views  given  here  in 
this  section,  chapters  six  to  the  end  of  the  book. 
There  is  a  great  detail  in  description  which  it 
would  be  both  instructive  and  interesting  to 
study  out.  But  we  want  to  get  at  the  essential 
things.  And  so  we  will  give  our  time  and 
thought  to  these  essentials. 

Our  Lord  Jesus  is  represented  as  about  to 
take  possession  of  His  realm.  The  first  step  is 
a  dispossessing  of  the  claimants  in  possession. 
This  furnishes  the  key  to  what  follows.  The 
descriptions  are  of  the  process  of  cleaning  out 
the  evil  forces.  At  the  close  of  this  we  find  Him 
taking  possession  (in  chapter  twenty)  and  reign- 
ing over  the  earth. 

These  descriptions  make  it  clear  at  once  that 
this  is  the  tribulation  so  much  spoken  of  in  these 
preceding  pages.  What  follows  fits  so  into  what 
has  been  spoken  of  that  the  identification  seems 
complete.  The  thing  our  Lord  Jesus  is  revealing 
here  talHes  with  what  He  had  told  John  before 
on  Olivet. 

There  comes  first  a  general  description  of  the 
whole  period  (chapters  vi.-vii.).  Then  follows  a 
description  of  how  these  happenings  will  come. 
It  will  be  through  the  withdrawal  of  restraint 
and  so  the  loosening  out  of  evil  (chapters  viii.- 
ix.).  During  this  whole  period  there  will  be  a 
special  faithful  witnessing  on  earth,  in  the  midst 
of  the  riot  of  evil,  to  God  and  His  truth  (chap- 
ter xi.). 

A  detailed  outline  of  the  run  of  events  fol- 


178         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

lows,  giving  much  additional  information,  pictur- 
ing the  rise  and  characteristics  of  the  leader  of 
the  tribulation  time,  and  the  manner  of  its  close 
(chapters  xii.-xiv.).  There  follows  this  a  de- 
scription of  the  judgments  and  the  supreme  con- 
test with  which  the  period  closes  (chapters  xv.- 
xvi.).  There  is  a  description  of  the  organized 
system  of  evil,  and  then  of  the  fall  of  the  capital 
of  the  system  (chapters  xvii.-xviii.)  And  then 
follows  the  actual  coming  of  our  Lord  Jesus,  the 
setting  up  of  the  kingdom,  and  subsequent  events 
(chapters  xix.-xxii.). 

A  General  Look  at  the  Storm  and  Its  Close. 

We  turn  now  to  the  first  of  these.^  It  begins 
with  a  crowned  One  seated  on  a  white  horse 
going  forth  conquering  and  to  conquer.  This 
description  agrees  with  the  much  fuller  descrip- 
tion of  the  Lord  Jesus  near  the  end  of  the  book, 
as  he  goes  to  the  earth  for  the  decisive  close  of 
the  tribulation.^ 

This  gives  fresh  emphasis  to  the  fact  that 
what  follows  is  the  direct  result  of  His  advance 
step.  At  once  there  follows  on  earth  a  time 
of  war,  famine,  death,  and  of  persecution  to  the 
death  of  God's  people.  There  is  no  hint  as  to 
how  long  this  goes  on.  It  is  brought  to  a  close 
with  an  earthquake  and  an  equally  terrific  dis- 
turbance of  the  heavens,  the  sun,  moon,  and 
stars,  something  unknown  before. 

The  utmost  consternation  is  created  on  earth. 

*  Chapters  vi.-vii.  '  Chapter  xix. 


.  A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     179 

All  conditions  of  men,  crowned  kings,  merchant 
princes,  men  of  autocratic  power  financially  and 
politically  and  socially,  join  with  the  humblest 
in  hiding  themselves  in  the  great  holes  made  by 
the  earthquake.  They  feel  that  the  time  of  judg- 
ment has  come,  and  they  are  not  ready  for  it 

The  description  of  their  terror  tallies  remark- 
ably with  the  prophetic  language  used  by 
Isaiah/  even  as  the  whole  description  fits  into 
our  Lord's  Olivet  talk.  This  is  seen  to  be  a 
general,  rapid  vision  of  the  whole  tribulation 
period. 

Then  there  follows  what  clearly  seems  to  be 
a  parenthesis  fitting  in  just  before  the  great 
earthquake.  The  earth  and  sea  have  been  ter- 
ribly torn  up  by  the  earthquake.  This  paren- 
thesis begins  with  a  command  that  the  earth  and 
sea  be  not  hurt  until  certain  things  have  taken 
place. 

This  fits  the  two  events  of  the  parenthesis  in 
just  before  the  ruinous  earthquake  takes  place. 
The  two  events  are  of  a  radically  different  sort 
from  what  has  just  been  told.  They  are  thus 
put  by  themselves,  and  the  run  of  evil  and  of 
judgment  upon  it,  put  by  itself,  so  keeping  these 
two  quite  clear,  following  the  general  plan  of 
the  book. 

There  are  two  events  in  this  parenthesis. 
There  is  what  is  called  the  "  sealing  "  of  a  cer- 
tain number  of  the  Hebrew  tribes  on  the  earth. 
Twelve  thousand  of  each  tribe  are  sealed,  making 
a  total  of  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand. 

*  Isaiah  ii.  10-22. 


i8o        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

The  word  "  seal "  is  used  in  two  senses  in  the 
Bible,  as  a  means  of  fastening  up  a  writing  or 
roll,  and,  in  the  New  Testament,  commonly  for 
the  presence  of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  a  human  life. 

The  seal  in  this  second  sense  was  a  mark  of 
-ownership.  Paul  tells  us  that  we  are  sealed  with 
the  Holy  Spirit,^  so  indicating  that -we  belong 
to  the  Lord  Jesus,  who  gives  us  this  evidence  of 
His  ownership.  If  this  simple,  natural  meaning 
be  taken  here,  it  would  mean  that  at  this  time 
the  Holy  Spirit  has  been  poured  out  upon  the 
Jew.  The  spiritual  regeneration  spoken  of  so* 
frequently  in  the  prophetic  pages  takes  place  at 
this  time. 

The  significance  of  the  numbers  should  be  no- 
ticed. Twelve  is  the  number  commonly  used 
in  the  Bible  for  corporate  completeness,  to  indi- 
cate that  a  group  is  complete.  Twelve  times 
twelve  would  simply  represent  a  fully  completed 
corporate  number.  That  is  to  say,  upon  the 
entire  body  of  Jews  then  living  on  the  earth 
the  Holy  Spirit  is  poured  out,  thus  marking  them 
•once  again  as  God's  peculiar  people,  restored 
fully  to  favour  after  the  long  national  rejection. 

The  second  event  is  of  equally  intense  interest, 
indeed  to  us  of  non-Jewish  birth  it  has  yet 
greater  interest.  John  is  up  in  heaven.  It  is 
from  that  point  of  view  that  he  sees.  Now  he 
is  suddenly  startled.  All  at  once  there  appears 
before  his  eyes  a  group  he  had  not  seen  before. 
He  describes  it  as  a  great  multitude,  actually 
<countless,  out  of  all  the  peoples  of  the  whole 

*  II  Corinthians  i.  22 ;  Ephesians  i.  13 ;  iv.  30. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     i8i 

earth,  a  great  polyglot  polyracial  world  company. 

They  are  clothed  in  white,  holding  the  con- 
queror's palm  in  their  hands,  and  singing,  making 
wondrous  music.  John  is  getting  another  taste 
of  the  music  of  heaven.  And  their  singing  is  a 
signal  for  a  fresh  outburst  of  praise  by  the 
angels,  the  elders,  and  the  living  creatures.  All 
this  seems  to  occur  suddenly,  this  appearance  of 
this  new  company  before  the  throne. 

John  gazes  spellbound,  wondering  who  these 
are,  and  where  they  come  from,  and  what  this 
means.  And  he  is  told  that  these  are  they  that 
come  out  of  the  tribulation,  the  great  one,  down 
on  the  earth.  Then  in  a  few  exquisitely  tender, 
heart-touching  words  their  happiness  is  de- 
scribed. 

These  two  events  occur  just  before  the  ter- 
rible earthquake  and  the  shake-up  of  the  earth's 
heavenly  bodies.  Just  before  the  judgment  that 
closes  the  tribulation  this  double  event  takes 
place,  the  conversion  of  the  Jews,  and  the  catch- 
ing away  out  of  the  tribulation  distress  on 
earth,  up  into  the  presence  of  the  throne,  of  the 
followers  of  our  Lord  Jesus. 

We  remember  that  that  great  Jew,  Paul,  was 
converted  by  the  appearance  of  'Jesus  in  the 
heavens  above  him.  We  remember  that  in  the 
Olivet  talk  Jesus  says  that  His  followers  will 
so  be  gathered  up  to  Himself  at  the  time  of  His 
second  coming.  These  two  events,  taking  place 
here,  tell  us  what  has  happened  down  on  the 
earth.  In  his  vision  John,  being  in  heaven,  sees 
these  things  as  they  appear  from  above. 


1 82        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

This  is  the  first  view  of  the  tribulation.  It 
begins  with  the  moment  when  our  Lord  Jesus 
up  in  heaven  begins  action,  describes  the  char- 
acteristics of  the  tribulation  on  earth,  and  closes 
with  the  national  regeneration  of  Israel,  and 
the  catching  up  from  earth  of  Christ's  true 
followers. 


Evil  Let  Loose. 

The  second  view  runs  through  chapters  eight 
and  nine.  Chapters  ten  and  eleven  to  the  close 
of  verse  thirteen  make  a  distinct  parenthesis. 
And  then  this  view  is  picked  up  again  at  eleven, 
fourteen,  and  runs  to  the  close  of  that  chapter. 
But  this  final  bit  in  chapter  eleven  is  merely  a 
connecting  link  with  what  comes  later.  Prac- 
tically the  whole  of  this  view  is  in  chapters  eight 
and  nine. 

It  closes  with  an  earthquake,  so  connecting  it 
with  the  final  event  in  the  first  view.  It  begins 
with  a  period  of  prolonged  silence,  which  would 
seem  to  answer  to  the  hush  in  the  great  volume 
of  praise  in  the  first  view,  when  the  Lamb  takes 
the  sealed  roll.  So  it  carries  us  back  to  the  same 
starting-point  as  there. 

There  is  first  a  striking  scene  before  the 
throne,  where  John  sees  a  golden  altar.  On  this 
there  is  being  oflFered  incense,  which  is  said  to 
be  added  to  the  prayers  of  all  the  saints.  In- 
cense and  prayers  rise  together  before  God. 
Then  an  angel  pours  some  of  the  fire  of  this 
prayer-altar  into  the  earth,  and  a  storm  follows. 


A  Clearing  up  Storm  in  the  Realm     183 

So  these  two  views,  first  and  second,  have  an- 
other common  starting-point,  the  beginning  of  a 
storm. 

This  is  a  very  suggestive  scene.  The  prayers 
of  all  the  saints,  both  in  earth  and  heaven,  have 
a  decided  restraining  influence  over  evil  down 
on  earth  at  the  present  time.  At  the  close 
they  will  become  a  decisive  influence  in  the 
cleaning-up  process  on  earth,  and  the  bringing 
in  of  the  new  order. 

Then  follows  a  fourfold  description  of  dis- 
tressing events  on  earth,  which  are  caused  by 
fiery  influences  coming  out  of  the  heavens.  The 
language  used  seems  to  make  clear  that  it  is 
through  a  loosening  out  of  the  powers  of  evil 
that  the  tribulation  comes. 

In  the  picture  language  of  the  vision,  "  a  great 
mountain  burning  with  fire  was  cast  into  the 
sea,"  with  injurious  results  to  water,  to  life, 
and  to  shipping.  A  mountain  is  a  common 
figure  in  the  Bible  for  a  great  ruling  power.  So 
Israel  is  called  by  Isaiah.^  The  seventeenth 
chapter  of  Revelation  speaks  of  seven  kingdoms 
as  seven  mountains.^  In  Jeremiah,  Babylon, 
which  is  spoken  of  repeatedly  and  typically  as 
being  the  embodiment  of  evil  and  of  opposition 
to  God,  is  called :  ^*  O  destroying  mountain  .  .  . 
which  destroyest  all  the  earth,  (I)  will  make  of 
thee  a  burnt  mountain."  ^  It  speaks  here  also 
of  "  a  great  star,*  burning  as  a  torch,"  that  fell 

*  Isaiah  ii.  2.  *  Revelation  xvii.  9-10. 
'  Jeremiah  li.  25. 

*  Revelation  viii.  10,  see  also  ix.  i ;  Isaiah  xiv.  12-15. 


184        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

upon  the  rivers  and  makes  them  bitter  as 
wormwood.  These  two  things  seem  to  suggest 
clearly  that  the  great  hurt  done  to  sea  and 
vegetation,  to  all  life,  and  through  the  obscur- 
ing of  the  heavenly  lights,  is  a  result  directly 
of  the  powers  of  evil  having  been  loosened 
out. 

The  long  restraint  upon  evil  through  the  pres- 
ence of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  the  Church  is  now 
withdrawn  in  the  withdrawal  of  the  Spirit.  His 
withdrawal  is  practically  an  answer  to  the  tacit 
prayer  both  of  world  and  Church.  That  prayer 
is  being  answered.  The  "  One  "  who  restraineth 
has  been  withdrawn.  This  it  is  that  makes  the 
tribulation  on  its  negative  side.  The  awful  char- 
acter of  the  demons  from  the  pit  is  so  utterly 
beyond  human  experience  up  to  that  time  that 
there  seem  no  adequate  words  to  describe 
them. 

The  Gospels  are  full  of  the  awful  activity  of 
demons  on  earth  in  possessing  men.  In  our  own 
land  there  is  not  wanting  plenty  of  evidence  of 
men  horribly  possessed  by  demons.  In  the  older 
countries  of  Europe  this  experience  is  much 
more  marked.  But  it  is  in  heathen  lands  that 
it  is  most  marked,  where  even  the  very  air  seems 
charged  with  evil  forces,  as  though  these  unseen 
demons  swarmed  about. 

Yet  all  this  sort  of  thing  is  now  under  re- 
straint. What  it  will  mean  to  have  that  restraint 
withdrawn,  and  the  horrid  hordes  here  described 
free  to  do  as  they  will,  no  imagination  can  de- 
pict.    This  is  well  called  the  first  woe,  and  an 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     185 

awful  woe  it  will  be.  Mercifully  there  is  a  time 
limit  set  on  this  demon  activity. 

Following  this  comes  the  loosing  out  of  an- 
other horde  of  demons,  as  difficult  of  description, 
and  yet  more  terrible.  They  seem  countless, 
yet  there  is  a  limit  to  their  numbers.  The  su- 
preme Hand  is  never  wholly  withdrawn.  These 
have  power  to  kill  as  well  as  to  torment.  This 
is  the  second  woe.  It  is  most  strikingly  no- 
ticeable that  neither  of  these  things  has  influ- 
ence to  make  men  penitent. 

The  last  item  of  this  view  is  given  in  chapter 
xi.  14-19.  The  announcement  is  made  that  the 
sovereignty  of  the  world  is  transferred  to  our 
Lord  and  His  Christ.  The  temple  of  God  is  seen 
open,  and  some  further  action  takes  place,  but 
the  detail  of  it  is  reserved  for  another  view. 
Such  is  the  terrible  sight  in  the  second  view  of 
the  tribulation  time.  Evil  is  loosened  out,  ap- 
parently unrestrained,  and  yet  under  restraint. 
This  it  is  that  makes  the  tribulation  on  its  posi- 
tive side. 

The  parenthesis  in  the  description  of  this  view 
has  been  spoken  of.  It  runs  through  chapters 
ten  and  eleven  to  the  close  of  verse  thirteen,  and 
contains  two  chief  things.  The  first  is  a  little 
group  of  three  items.  There  is  a  fresh  descrip- 
tion of  our  Lord  Jesus  as  He  is  seen  standing 
with  one  foot  on  the  sea  and  the  other  upon 
the  earth,  and  holding  a  little  open  book.  Then 
seven  thunders  roar  out.  John  is  about  to  write, 
but  is  told  not  to.  That  terrific  storm  coming 
is  far  greater  than  can  be  told.    Then  comes  the 


1 86         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

solemn  declaration  that  there  will  be  no  further 
delay,  but  that  at  once  shall  be  finished  up  this 
terrible  time  of  judgment.  Then  follows  a  per- 
sonal word  to  John.  These  three  items  make  up 
chapter  ten. 


God's  Faithful  Witnesses. 

Then  comes  the  second  thing,  in  chapter  eleven 
on  to  verse  thirteen,  which  proves  to  be  the  third 
view  of  the  tribulation.  It  shows  that  during  the 
whole  of  this  tribulation  time  there  will  be  a 
special  faithful  witness  being  borne  to  God  and 
His  truth.  As  the  Holy  Spirit  is  being  with- 
drawn from  the  Church,  these  two  men  begin 
their  special  ministry  of  witnessing. 

The  place  of  that  witness  will  be  Jerusalem. 
But  recent  events  will  have  brought  a  greatly 
diversified  population  to  that  city  from  all  parts 
of  the  world.  So  that  the  witness  becomes 
world-wide  in  its  immediate  reach,  and  probably 
in  the  reports  of  it  that  go  out. 

While  there  is  good  reason  for  thinking  that 
these  two  witnesses  may  be  Enoch  and  Elijah, 
the  two  men  of  Bible  record,  one  before  the 
Flood  and  one  after,  who  were  distinctively 
God's  witnesses,  and  were  taken  away  without 
death,  yet  it  is  best  not  to  stop  over  a  matter 
that  has  been  and  is  apt  to  be  a  matter  of  mere 
idle  speculative  talk.^    The  thing  worthy  of  note 

^  In  regard  to  Elijah,  see  Malachi  iv.  5-6.  John  the 
Baptist  came  in  the  spirit  and  power  of  Elijah,  and 
of  him  our  Lord  said,  "  this  is  he  who  was  to  come." 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     187 

is  that  as  the  Holy  Spirit's  distinctive  witness 
is  withdrawn  there  will  be  these  two  special  wit- 
nesses sent  to  Jerusalem  for  a  witness  that  will 
be  world-wide  in  its  extent  and  influence.  Such 
is  God's  gracious  patience  and  longsuffering. 

These  two  men  are  clothed  in  mourning  as  a 
part  of  their  witness.  They  have  miraculous 
power  in  protecting  themselves  against  attack, 
and  in  withholding  rain,  and  sending  plagues 
among  the  people,  and  in  turning  water  into 
blood,  to  give  force  and  effect  to  their  testi- 
mony. Their  witness  continues  through  twelve 
hundred  and   sixty  days. 

John  had  already  been  told  that  Jerusalem 
would  be  trodden  under  foot  by  the  nations  for 

Yet  the  events  of  judgment  spoken  of  in  Malachi  did 
not  take  place  when  John  the  Baptist  and  Jesus  came. 
The  events  spoken  of  prophetically  in  connection  with 
His  coming  are  divided  into  two  groups,  those  of 
graciousness,  finding  fulfilment  at  the  first  coming,  those 
of  judgment  followed  by  graciousness,  at  the  second 
coming.  So  John  the  Baptist  fulfils  the  Elijah  part  at 
the  first  of  these  two;  in  all  probability  Elijah  himself 
at  the  second  part,  i.e.,  "before  the  great  and  terrible 
day  of  Jehovah  come." 

In  regard  to  Enoch,  the  passage  in  Jude,  verse  14, 
is  of  significance.  The  language,  "  Enoch  prophesied. 
...  the  Lord  came,  etc.,"  is  probably  spoken  in  the 
sense,  familiar  in  the  Bible,  of  a  future  action  seen 
as  already  done.  Here  Enoch  is  spoken  of  as  prophe- 
sying or  preaching,  not  to  the  people  before  the  Flood, 
but  to  a  certain  class  of  men  belonging  to  Jude's  gen- 
eration, that  is  to  the  Church  generation.  The  likeli- 
est meaning  of  the  words  is  that  Enoch,  the  seventh 
and  so  on,  will  prophesy,  saying,  "behold  the  Lord 
Cometh,"  and  so  on  to  close  of  verse  15. 


1 88         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

forty-two  months.  We  are  apt  to  think  that 
it  has  been  trodden  under  foot  or  desecrated  by 
the  nations  for  an  immensely  longer  period.  But 
prophecy  never  gives  any  reckoning  of  time  for 
Israel,  except  when  Israel  is  an  organized  na- 
tion. It  is  concerned  with  telling  Jewish  national 
events. 

At  this  time  the  Jews  have  their  national  or- 
ganization again  in  Palestine.  For  forty-two 
months  after  the  nation  has  been  newly  set  up 
the  city  will  be  so  trodden  under  the  desecrating 
feet  of  the  nations.  This  is  the  first  hint  of 
time  we  have  had.  The  witnessing  and  the  dese- 
cration of  the  holy  city  will  continue  side  by 
side  for  three  and  a  half  years. 

At  the  end  of  this  period  evil  will  be  given 
full  swing  over  these  witnesses.  They  are  killed 
and  their  bodies  left  lying  in  the  streets,  while 
the  international  crowds  make  merry  because 
their  tormentors,  as  these  two  are  called,  are 
gone.  Then  before  the  terror-stricken  gaze  of 
these  crowds  the  two  men  come  to  life,  and  are 
caught  up  into  the  heavens.  Is  this  the  mo- 
ment when  all  are  caught  up?  Quite  possibly. 
Then  comes  the  terrible  earthquake  as  at  the 
end  of  the  other  two  views. 

The  one  distinctive  thing  told  here  is  that 
during  the  tribulation,  in  the  midst  of  all  the 
blasphemous  reign  of  unrestrained  wickedness, 
there  will  be  the  unbroken,  faithful  witnessing. 
This  seems  to  explain  why  the  account  comes  as 
a  parenthesis  in  the  account  of  the  awful  riot 
of  evil.    During  the  worst  of  the  evil  there  will 


A  Clearlng-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     189 

go  on  unbroken  the  faithful,  gracious  testimony 
of  God's  truth  and  love. 


The  Lawless  Leader. 


The  fourth  view  takes  the  longest  sweep  of 
any,  thus  far,  goes  into  much  more  detail,  and 
gives  much  fresh  information.  It  runs  through 
chapters  twelve  to  fourteen.  In  the  intensely 
picturesque  language  of  a  woman  arrayed  in  the 
most  glorious  splendour  and  dignity  and  power 
imaginable  the  nation  of  Israel  is  depicted. 

This  woman  is  with  child.  In  more  intensely 
dramatic  language  Satan  is  pictured  as  standing 
before  the  woman  waiting  to  destroy  her  child 
as  soon  as  born.  The  child  is  born,  a  man- 
child,  who  is  to  rule  all  the  nations  with  auto- 
cratic sway.  He  is  caught  up  to  heaven,  and  his 
mother  flees  into  the  wilderness  from  the  ser- 
pent.   This  is  the  opening  action  of  this  view. 

The  meaning  lies  open  on  the  face.  Israel 
gave  birth  to  the  man  Jesus,  who  foiled  all  the 
attacks  of  Satan  and  ascended  to  heaven.  The 
old  prophetic  characteristic  of  connecting  events 
far  apart  without  reference  to  intervening  time 
is  marked  here.  The  long  interval  between  the 
break-up  of  the  Jew  nation  and  its  taking  shape 
again  as  a  nation,  which  has  lasted  nineteen 
hundred  years  roughly,  comes  between  the  last 
word  of  verse  five  and  the  first  word  of  verse 
six. 

The  prophetic  writing  takes  no  reckoning  of 
Israel,  except  as  a  nation.     The  woman  fleeing 


190        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

into  the  wilderness  is  Israel  organized  again  as 
a  nation  suffering  persecution.  She  is  so  per- 
secuted for  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  days,  but 
divinely  protected  and  preserved.  Such  is  the 
first  act  of  the  drama  pictured  here.^ 

Then  we  are  told  why  the  woman  flees,  that 
is,  the  explanation  of  this  special  persecution 
of  the  Jew  this  time.^  Satan  has  had  his  head- 
quarters somewhere  in  the  heavens,  below  God's 
throne,  but  above  the  earth.  Now,  after  a  con- 
flict, he  is  cast  out  of  heaven,  down  to  the  earth. 
Here  is  a  third  event  that  comes  approximately 
at  the  beginning  of  the  tribulation  time,  Satan 
is  cast  down  to  the  earth. 

The  Holy  Spirit  is  withdrawn  from  the  Church 
up  to  heaven,  so  removing  the  restraint  upon 
evil.  Satan  is  cast  out  of  heaven  and  comes 
down  to  earth.  Thus  there  is  a  double  intensi- 
fying of  evil  on  the  earth,  the  withdrawal  of 
restraint,  and  the  presence  of  the  evil  one  him- 
self. And  as  the  witness  of  the  Holy  Spirit  is 
withdrawn  the  special  witness  of  the  two  men  in 
Jerusalem  begins. 

The  defeat  of  Satan  in  this  heavenly  conflict 
draws  out  a  burst  of  praise  from  the  upper  hosts. 
It  is  because  of  the  great  victory  of  our  Lord 
Jesus  in  His  death  that  this  victory  is  gotten. 
They  overcome  because  of  the  blood  of  the 
Lamb,  and  the  word  of  their  testimony,  and 
they  loved  not  their  lives  unto  death, — a  three- 
fold cord  that  could  never,  and  can  never,  be 
broken  or  successfully  resisted. 

'  Revelation  xii.  1-6.  '  Revelation  xii.  7-17. 


'A  Clearlng-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     191 

This  explains  the  special  persecution  at  this 
time  of  the  reshaped  Jewish  nation.  It  is  the 
outburst  of  the  rage  of  the  freshly  defeated 
Satan.  But  the  Jew  is  protected.  The  armies 
that  would  swallow  the  Jew  up  are  swallowed  up 
by  the  great  earthquake  that  closes  the  tribula- 
tion time. 

The  length  of  this  persecution  is  put  in  two 
different  ways,  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  days, 
and  "  time,  times,  and  half  a  time."  This  lat- 
ter phrase  seems  to  be  an  old  Oriental  or  He- 
brew way  of  saying  a  year,  two  years,  and  half 
a  year.  The  same  length  of  time  is  expressed 
in  yet  another  way  in  the  eleventh  chapter,  forty 
and  two  months.  The  time  is  thus  put  in  three 
different  ways,  that  we  may  know  surely  that  it 
means  just  plain  three  and  a  half  years  of  our 
common  time.  It  is  significant  that  the  dragon 
makes  war  with  **  the  rest "  of  the  woman's 
seed.  This  can  only  mean  the  Church,  which 
of  course  was  born  in  the  Jewish  nation.  This 
is  the  first  run  of  events  in  this  view.^ 

Then  follows  a  description  of  the  awful  leader 
of  evil  during  the  tribulation  time.^  It  is  sig- 
nificant that,  as  Satan  is  cast  out  of  heaven  down 
to  the  earth,  this  leader  appears  among  men. 
He  has  great  intelligence  and  power  and  is  the 
very  embodiment  of  blasphemy.  He  is  described 
as  a  strange  mixture  of  wild  beasts,  having  the 
chief  characteristic  strength  of  each,  the  cunning 
of  the  leopard,  the  feet  of  the  bear,  and  the  mouth 
of  the  lion. 

*  Revelation  xii.  '  Revelation  xiii. 


192         About  the  Crovvned  Christ 

He  is  the  personal  representative  on  earth 
among  men  of  Satan.  There  is  something 
strangely  uncanny  in  the  suggestion  that  he  is 
some  former  leader,  who  died,  and  is  now  raised 
from  the  dead.  There  seems  to  be  nothing  too 
daring  for  Satan  to  attempt  in  his  impious  oppo- 
sition to  God.  This  leader  comes  into  great 
prominence  and  power.  All  the  world  wonders 
after  him.  And  they  worship  Satan,  who  is  rec- 
ognized as  giving  his  power  to  this  notorious 
leader. 

He  comes  to  be  accepted  as  the  world  ruler, 
and  is  commonly  worshipped  by  the  people.  And 
he  not  only  persecutes  God's  people,  but  over- 
comes them.  A  limit  of  time  is  set  to  his  sway. 
It  is  the  same  as  already  noted  for  Jerusalem 
being  desecrated,  for  Gods  two  witnesses,  and 
for  the  persecution  of  the  Jew,  i.e.,  forty  and 
two  months,  three  and  a  half  years. 

It  is  striking  that  in  the  midst  of  the  descrip- 
tion of  his  terrible  reign  there  comes  a  word  that 
sounds  like  an  echo  from  those  messages  to  the 
Churches.  ''If  any  man  hath  an  ear,  let  him 
hear."  ^  Then  the  word  goes  on  warning,  plead- 
ing, and  encouraging.  In  the  midst  of  these 
blasphemous  conditions  every  man  must  do  as 
he  personally  decides.  He  may  yield  to  this  evil 
and  become  a  captive  of  evil,  bound  hand  and 
foot.  He  may  try  to  use  the  world's  weapons 
in  fighting  God's  battle,  but  will  find  himself 
outmatched  in  their  use.  He  may  rise  to  the 
true  level,   and   steadfastly  cling  to   his   faith, 

*  Chapter  xiii.  9-10. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  In  the  Realm     193 

and  endure,  and  by  faith  be  victorious  in  the 
end. 

The  description  goes  on  to  tell  of  the  blas- 
phemous worship  demanded  of  all.  This  leader 
has  an  assistant  or  lieutenant  to  whom  he  depu- 
tizes great  power.  He  makes  an  image  to  his 
chief,  and  demands  all  to  worship  at  this  shrine. 
He  has  supernatural  power,  that  is,  deviUshly 
supernatural.  He  performs  great  miracles,  even 
calling  down  fire  from  heaven.  He  gives  breath 
to  the  image  and  makes  it  speak.  And  he  pun- 
ishes with  death  any  one  who  refuses  this  blas- 
phemous worship  to  the  leader  and  his  image. 
And  every  one  is  required  to  have  a  mark  on  his 
hand  or  his  forehead  as  indicating  his  loyalty 
to  the  leader.  Whoever  refuses  is  unable  to 
buy  or  sell.  It  is  the  boycott  principle  carried 
to  the  last  extreme. 

While  God's  two  witnesses  are  doing  miracles 
by  divine  power  this  lieutenant  is  doing  them 
by  devilish  power.  So  the  fearful  account  goes 
on.  One  can  easily  imagine  the  vast  crowds 
swayed  by  the  idolatrous  worship,  and  the  in- 
tense suffering  and  distress  among  those  who 
insist  on  being  steadfast  and  true  in  their  faith. 

Now  in  the  midst  of  all  this  terrible  scene 
John  is  suddenly  and  tremendously  startled  by 
something  else.^ 

In  the  vision  John  is  in  heaven  looking  down 
on  these  scenes  on  the  earth.  Now  his  atten- 
tion is  attracted  by  a  scene  that  suddenly  takes 
place  before  his  eyes  in  heaven.    It  is  a  scene 

*  Revelation  xiv.  1-5. 


194        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

of  wondrous  winsomeness  and  beauty.  It  stands 
out  in  sharpest  contrast  with  what  is  going  on 
on  the  earth. 

There's  a  great  company  standing  around  the 
Lord  Jesus,  before  the  throne.  They  are  sing- 
ing a  wonderful  song  to  the  accompaniment  of 
harps,  which  they  have.  The  volume  of  music  is 
like  the  voice  of  many  waters,  or  like  great 
thunder.  There  is  a  simple,  fine  description  of 
the  character  of  these  singers.  They  are  pure, 
and  they  are  obedient.  In  their  purity  they  are 
as  undefiled  virgins,  the  highest  possible  state- 
ment of  purity.  And  they  follow  the  Lamb  un- 
questioningly  whithersoever  He  goeth  with 
fullest  obedience. 

Who  are  these,  and  where  have  they  come 
from  so  suddenly,  at  this  moment,  into  the  pres- 
ence of  the  One  on  the  throne  ?  The  description 
tells  just  what  has  happened.  When  things  are 
at  their  devilish  worst  down  on  the  earth  the 
Lord  Jesus  has  caught  up  His  own  from  the 
earth.  And  they  have  become  like  Him  in  char- 
acter, for  now  they  see  Him  face  to  face  as  He 
is. 

This  recalls  the  scene,  essentially  the  same, 
back  in  the  first  view,  in  chapter  seven,  where  the 
great  multitudes  are  suddenly  seen  before  the 
throne  with  palm  branches,  songs,  and  white 
garments.  It  is  the  same  company  as  there. 
But  there  is  a  difference  in  telling  the  numbers. 
There  they  are  too  many  to  be  counted.  Here 
they  are  said  to  be  a  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand.     It  is  symbolical,  a  picture  number, 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     195 

the  number  of  full  corporate  completeness  as 
with  the  Spirit-baptized  Jews  in  chapter  seven. 

The  believers  caught  up  out  of  the  great 
tribulation  have  been  joined  by  the  trusting 
hearts  of  all  time  who  have  been  waiting  in  the 
Father's  presence  for  this  glad  day.  The  num- 
ber is  now  complete  of  all  from  creation's  ear- 
liest dawn,  who  by  grace  have  followed  fully, 
regardless  of  hindrance  or  opposition.  This 
great  climax  is  thus  seen  by  John  in  sudden 
and  sharp  contrast  with  the  climax  of  hellish 
evil  on  the  earth. 

Then  John  is  shown  the  steps  by  which  this 
climax  is  reached.^  Verses  six  to  the  close  of 
this  chapter  seem  clearly  to  be  a  detail  of  what 
has  gone  before,  describing  the  steps  by  which 
this  climax  is  reached,  and  then  reaching  fur- 
ther to  the  judgment  upon  the  evil.  During  the 
iniquitous  scenes  being  enacted  on  earth  an 
angel  is  seen  flying  in  mid-heavens  calling  to  the 
people  on  earth,  in  warning,  to  give  their  wor- 
ship and  reverence  to  God  only.  The  gracious 
wooing  of  God  never  ceases. 

Another  angel  follows,  calling  out  that  the 
great  system  of  iniquity,  in  which  they  are  en- 
meshed, is  doomed,  A  third  gives  solemn  warn- 
ing that  those  who  yield  to  the  terrible  pressure, 
and  engage  in  the  blasphemous  worship,  will  be 
surely  and  terribly  punished.  Again  there  comes 
another  echo  of  the  strain  of  pleading  in  the 
Church  messages.  In  the  midst  of  just  such 
conditions  as  prevail   then,   the   saints  can  be 

'  Revelation  xiv.  6-20. 


ig6        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

steady  in  keeping  the  commandments  of  God 
and  the  faith  of  Jesus. 

And  down  into  the  awful  persecution  being 
waged  comes  an  encouraging  voice  from  heaven. 
There  is  special  blessing  from  God  on  all  those 
who  remain  true,  even  unto  death.  There  will 
be  sweetest  rest  for  them,  and  their  faithful 
witnessing  and  suffering  shall  be  all  noted  and 
acknowledged  and  rewarded  as  they  come  up  into 
the  Father's  presence. 

And  then  follows  the  blessed  harvest  of  the 
righteous  whose  wonderful  arrival  in  heaven 
has  already  been  told  in  the  opening  scene  of 
this  chapter.  And  then  follows  the  awful  har- 
vest of  evil  down  on  the  earth,  the  visitation  of 
judgments  coming  at  the  very  end  of  the  perse- 
cution. 

So  closes  this  long  remarkable  view  of  the 
tribulation.  It  connects  back  with  the  nation 
of  Israel.  Its  beginning  is  connected  practically 
with  the  casting  of  Satan  down  to  earth.  It 
gives  a  description  of  the  leader  and  the  nature 
of  the  persecution,  and  a  brief  statement  of  the 
steps  with  which  it  ends.  And  it  states  in  three 
different  ways  that  the  length  of  time  involved 
is  three  and  a  half  years. 

A  Bitter  Cup  to  Its  Dregs. 

The  fifth  view  ^  is,  not  of  the  whole  tribula- 
tion time  as  with  these  others,  but  of  only  a 
part,  the  closing  part.  It  speaks  of  the  visita- 
tion  of   judgments,    the   great   climactic   battle, 

^  Revelation  xv.-xvi. 


A  Clearing-up  Stomi  in  the  Realm     197 

and  the  earthquake,  with  which  the  period  is 
brought  to  its  end. 

It  connects  at  the  point  in  the  fourth  view  ^ 
where  those  who  have  been  suffering  in  the  tribu- 
lation are  seen  standing  before  the  throne  singing 
with  harps.  It  is  said  that  they  are  singing  the 
song  of  Moses,  who  had  the  experience  of  tribu- 
lation and  deliverance  in  Egypt,  and  the  song 
of  the  Lamb,  who  went  through  the  worst 
tribulation  experience  in  His  contest  with  Satan 
and  sin  on  our  behalf. 

It  connects  also  with  the  close  of  the  second 
view,^  where  the  temple  is  seen  opened  and  the 
ark  of  the  covenant  is  seen.  That  covenant  is 
now  to  receive  further  fulfilment.  God  never 
forgets  His  promises  and  agreements.  Seven 
angels  have  seven  golden  bowls  full  of  the  wrath 
of  God.  In  this  way  is  told  the  visitation  of 
judgments  now  described  as  taking  place  at  this 
time. 

In  the  first  view  the  picture  is  of  seals  being 
broken  or  opened,  which  indicates  the  execution 
of  a  document.  The  trumpets  of  the  next  view 
indicate  a  commanding  call  to  action;  the  seven 
thunders,  not  written,  a  great  storm.  These 
bowls  or  vials  indicate  the  administration  of  a 
dose  of  bitter-tasting  medicine.  The  visitation  of 
judgments  by  God  is  commonly  spoken  of  in 
Scripture  in  this  language.^ 

^  Revelation  xiv.  1-5.  ^  Revelation  xi.  19. 

'  Psalm  xi.  6;  Ix.  3;  Ixxv.  8;  Job  xxi.  20 ;  Isaiah  H. 
17,  22,  23;  Jeremiah  xxv.  15-17;  Ezekiel  xxiii.  31-33; 
Habakkuk  ii.  16;  Zechariah  xii.  2. 


198        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Then  follows  the  description  of  the  judgments 
upon  men's  persons,  and  everything  concerning 
their  life.  Men's  bodies  are  diseased,  the  water 
is  unfit  to  drink,  the  food  supply  cut  short ;  they 
suffer  with  terrible  heat,  and  then  darkness.  But 
there  is  no  penitence.  The  Euphrates  is  said  to 
be  dried  up,  suggesting  that  it  is  the  great  river 
at  or  near  the  world's  centre  of  action.  So,  it  is 
said,  the  way  is  prepared  for  the  kings  that  come 
from  the  east. 

And  the  prophetic  bit  in  Isaiah  comes  to  mind 
about  men  passing  over  the  Euphrates  at  the 
time  of  the  great  gathering  of  the  Jews.^  As 
though  aroused  by  all  this  to  bitterest  opposition 
there  is  increased  demon  activity,  and  through 
it  a  great  gathering  of  all  nations,  at  a  place 
named  in  Palestine,  for  a  great  battle. 

Then  a  terrible  climax  comes  in  the  earth- 
quake, with  which  the  first,  second,  and  third 
views  closed.  It  is  the  worst  earthquake  ever 
experienced.  It  centres  in  *'  the  great  city," 
Babylon,  the  capital  of  the  whole  system  of 
wickedness.  With  the  storm  is  a  terrible  hail. 
The  description  tallies  with  that  in  the  close  of 
the  fiT-st  view,-  and  with  the  vivid  prophetic  bit 
in  Isaiah  ii.  10-22. 

There's  no  suggestion  of  how  much  time  all 
this  takes.  The  judgments  visited  on  Egypt  at 
the  deliverance  of  Israel  are  described  at  much 
greater  length,  running  into  ten  items.  Yet  all 
could  have  occurred  within  five  weeks,  allowing 
for  brief  intervals.     Whether  these   judgments 

'  Isaiah  xi.  15-16.  *  Revelation  vi.  15-17. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     199 

occur  in  succession,  or  all  at  once,  or  partly  in 
both  ways,  they  could  all  come  within  a  very 
short  time.  This  fifth  view  depicts  the  final 
scene.  It  gives  the  visitation  of  judgments  end- 
ing the  tribulation  period,  describes  a  great 
pitched  battle,  in  which  all  nations  are  involved, 
and  ends  with  the  earthquake.  This  is  the  third 
of  the  three  great  woes.^ 

The  sixth  view  is  of  the  great  system  of  wick- 
edness in  the  world,  through  which  the  tribula- 
tion comes,  and  which  is  judged  at  its  close.^ 
The  description  is  full  of  details  of  great  interest 
and  instructiveness,  but  we  can  only  have  time 
at  present  for  the  essential  thing  being  taught. 
The  Spirit  takes  John  into  a  wilderness.  To  the 
Spirit's  eye  wherever  wickedness  has  sway, 
whether  vulgar  or  polished,  political  or  commer- 
cial, cunning  or  brazen,  it  is  a  wilderness. 

Here  is  shown  a  woman  gorgeously  clothed, 
prodigally  bedecked  with  jewels,  and  having  a 
cup  in  her  hand,  made  of  gold,  but  full  of  vile 
filth.  Upon  her  forehead  appears  a  description : 
"Mystery  [or  explanation  of  mystery],  Baby- 
lon the  great,  the  mother  of  harlots  and  of 
the  abominations  of  the  earth.*'  This  woman  is 
riding  upon  a  strange  beast ;  it  is  scarlet-colored, 
with  seven  heads  and  ten  horns,  and  full  of  blas- 
phemous names.  This  is  the  startlingly  suggest- 
tive  picture. 

Who  is  this  woman?  And  what  is  this  beast 
upon  which  she  is  seated?  The  whole  descrip- 
tion taken  together  suggests  that  she  is  meant 

*  Revelation  xi.  14.  *  Chapters  xvii.  and  xviii. 


200        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

to  stand  for  the  whole  system  of  wickedness 
which  has  had  such  sway  in  the  world  from 
earliest  time  until  the  end.  And  the  beast  repre- 
sents typically  the  dominant  governmental  pow- 
ers. The  two  have  always  worked  together. 
There  has  been  a  consistent  unity  of  spirit  and 
of  characteristic,  and  a  persistent  devilishness 
marking  the  wickedness  in  the  world  throughout 
the  ages. 

It  has  been  as  though  there  were  an  unseen 
spirit  power  tirelessly  at  work  behind  all  the 
varied  manifestations  of  evil.  The  dominant 
characteristic  always  has  been  blasphemy  of  God. 
It  has  controlled  thrones  and  royal  power,  and 
has  had  unlimited  gold  at  its  command.  And  it 
has  always  been  an  enemy,  subtle  or  open,  cun- 
ning or  violent,  of  God  and  His  people. 

That  system  or  genius  of  evil  is  represented 
in  the  Old  Testament  as  finding  expression  in 
one  great  political  power  after  another,  but 
chiefly  in  the  power  of  Babylon.  Babylon  stands 
typically  in  these  older  pages,  not  merely  for  the 
great  empire  of  the  Euphrates,  but  for  the  un- 
seen spirit  of  evil  lying  behind  that  power,  and 
making  use  of  it  to  carry  through  its  own  foul 
purposes. 

But  that  unseen  evil  spirit  power  has  found 
more  than  one  agency  to  dominate  and  use. 
Babylon  long  since  passed  off  the  stage  as  a 
political  factor.  But  the  power  of  evil  has  not 
ceased.  It  is  distressing  to  note  another  great 
organization  behind  and  through  which  the  power 
of  evil  has  worked.     What  is  the  system  that 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     201 

has,  for  the  past  sixteen  centuries,  been  sup- 
ported by  the  various  great  civil  governments? 

There  is  only  one  answer.  It  is  the  organiza- 
tion known  as  "  the  Christian  Church."  And 
the  term  Church  must  be  taken  here  in  its  full- 
est, broadest  meaning.  Its  great  main  stem  his- 
torically is  the  Roman  Catholic  Church.  The 
first  great  split-off  was  the  Greek  Orthodox 
Church.  The  Church  of  England  was  a  later 
break-off.  These,  with  the  various  government- 
ally  supported  Churches,  and  those  free  of  such 
support,  and  various  ancient  primitive  bodies, — 
these  all  together  make  up  the  organization 
known  as  ''  the  Church." 

The  two  symbolical  characteristics  of  this 
woman  and  the  two  dominant  characteristics  of 
this  historical  Church  are  the  same.  The  Church 
has  been  and  is  supported  almost  wholly  by  the 
civil  governments,  and  used  by  them  in  further- 
ing their  policies.  And  it  has  been  active  in 
persecuting  to  death  the  people  of  God  who 
would  not  yield  to  its  domination.  It  has  been 
marked  by  intolerance  of  all  not  yielding  to  its 
wishes,  and  especially  of  the  Jew.  That  intoler- 
ance has  been  carried  not  only  to  the  extreme  of 
blood,  but  a  riot  of  bloodshed.  This  is  utterly 
heart-breaking  to  realize  and  to  repeat. 

The  woman  is  said  to  be  "  drunken  ( i )  with 
the  blood  of  the  saints,  and  (2)  with  the  blood 
of  the  martyrs  of  Jesus."  The  twofold  state- 
ment is  seen  to  cover  the  two  great  periods,  be- 
fore Christ  and  since.  And  it  covers  also  the 
two  great  powers  through  which  the  spirit  of 


202        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

evil  has  chiefly  worked  in  those  two  periods. 
But  the  name  given  first  in  the  plains  of  Shinar, 
and  used  characteristically  of  the  God-defying 
power  of  evil,  is  given  here,  Babylon.  It  will  be 
Babylon  again  at  the  very  end  after  the  Church 
system  is  overthrown. 

It  is  plainly  said  that  the  beast  represents  the 
great  civil  or  governmental  power  in  its  final 
stage,  the  shape  it  will  be  in  at  the  end  when 
these  events  occur.^  The  chief  dominating  po- 
litical power  of  the  world  will  have  passed 
through  a  succession  of  changes,  seven  kingdoms 
successively  following  each  other.  At  the  end 
there  will  be  a  combination  of  some  sort,  with 
ten  great  subdivisions,  and  one  great  head  over 
all. 

But  at  the  last,  the  civil  power  will  discard  the 
Church,  and  persecute  it.  The  spirit  of  evil  thus 
gets  embodiment  typically  in  the  great  Babylon 
power,  then  in  the  Church,  and  at  the  very  last, 
in  a  coalition  of  civil  powers  heading  up  in  a 
new  Babylon. 

Then  follows  announcement  of  the  fall  of 
Babylon.  The  city  is  regarded  here  as  the 
earthly  capital  of  the  organized  system  of  un- 
seen evil  spirit  power  at  work  in  the  world.  The 
city  and  the  system  are  inseparably  allied.  The 
name  Babylon  is  used  in  the  Bible  for  both  sys- 
tem and  city. 

If  the  question  be  asked  what  city  is  meant 
here,  there  can  be  but  one  answer.  From  the 
twelfth  of  Genesis  on  the  Bible  never  touches 

*  Revelation  xvii.  8-12. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     203 

history,  except  as  history  touches  Israel  as  a 
nation.  A  thoughtful  review  of  the  book  makes 
this  clear.  And  this  book  of  Revelation  is  a 
gathering-up  of  Bible  threads,  and  only  these. 
There  is  only  one  city  in  the  Bible  record  that 
answers  to  the  description  here,  "  the  great  city 
which  reigneth  over  the  kings  of  the  earth." 
"  Babylon  the  great." 

But  the  old  Babylon  lies  in  ruins.  And  its 
ruined  condition  has  been  quoted  as  the  fulfil- 
ment of  the  famous  passage  in  Isaiah  xiii.  19-22. 
It  should  be  carefully  noted  that  the  present 
conditions  at  the  site  of  old  Babylon  do  not  seem 
to  satisfy  fully  the  language  of  that  passage. 
It  would  seem  to  be  another  illustration  of  the 
rare  use  of  language  in  the  Bible,  which  adapts 
a  passage  accurately  to  one  event,  and  then  to  a 
second  event,  a  long  time  afterward. 

This  would,  of  course,  involve  the  rebuilding 
of  the  old  capital  of  the  Euphrates.  The  rever- 
ent student  quietly  notes  the  movements  taking 
place  in  that  part  of  the  world,  but  restrains  mere 
curious  speculation,  as  he  continues  fervently 
to  pray,  *'  Thy  kingdom  come." 

This  eighteenth  chapter  of  Revelation  seems 
like  an  echo  of  that  intense  twenty-first  of  Isaiah, 
and  indeed  of  a  strain  sounding  all  through  the 
prophetic  books.  One  familiar  with  the  old  writ- 
ings is  not  surprised  to  find  this  echo;  he  ex- 
pects it.  No  echo  of  God's  voice  or  purpose  is 
ever  lost.  God  never  loses  any  of  the  threads  out 
of  His  hand. 


204        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Hallelujah!  He  Comes. 

The  seventh  view  presents  the  climax.  It  in- 
cludes from  chapter  nineteen  to  chapter  twenty- 
two,  verse  five.  It  presents  in  full  the  great  scene 
that  closes  this  tribulation  period;  touches  the 
kingdom  in  a  bare  word  so  as  to  fit  it  into  its 
place  in  the  scheme  of  events  being  outlined; 
and  then  gives  the  final  wind-up  after  the  King- 
dom time  is  over.  We  want  to  look  now  at  the 
portion  connected  immediately  with  what  has 
just  gone  before,  the  description  of  the  wondrous 
close  of  the  tribulation,  in  chapters  nineteen, 
verse  one,  to  twenty,  verse  three. 

John  hears  a  great  outburst  of  worship  and 
praise  in  heaven.  It  resembles  the  outburst 
back  in  chapter  five,  when  the  Lamb  took  the 
book.  But  it  is  seen  to  be  yet  greater  than 
that.  Its  joy  and  delight  seem  wholly  un- 
bounded. Again  the  living  creatures  and  the 
four  and  twenty  elders  lead  the  song  that  bursts 
out. 

John  tries  to  tell  how  great  was  the  volume  of 
adoring  song  that  fills  all  heaven.  It  is  like 
the  voice  of  a  great  multitude,  like  the  waters 
that  he  had  heard  many  a  time  breaking  in 
deafening  roar  on  the  rocky  coast  of  Patmos, 
like  the  mighty  thunders  which  he  had  heard  so 
much  in  these  visions. 

And  the  song  they  sang  explains  the  exuber- 
ance of  their  singing,  "  Hallelujah:  for  the  Lord 
our  God,  the  Almighty  reigneth."  At  last  He 
reigneth.     In  the  earlier  parts  of  the  book  God 


A  Clearlng-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     205 

is  spoken  of  as  **  He  who  is  and  who  was,  and 
who  Cometh."  ^  As  later  events  are  described 
that  last  part  "  who  cometh "  is  significantly 
dropped.^  Clearly  at  these  points  being  de- 
scribed He  has  come.  Now  the  great  realiza- 
tion bursts  out  from  countless  voices,  the  Lord, 
our  God,  the  Almighty  reigneth! 

And  John  is  bidden  to  write  the  words  whose 
refrain  has  filled  such  a  place  in  hymns  and 
devout  speech,  "  Blessed  are  they  that  are  bid- 
den to  the  marriage  supper  of  the  Lamb."  And 
the  one  who  seems  to  be  serving  as  John's  guide 
puts  peculiar  emphasis  on  all  that  is  being  re- 
vealed by  saying,  "  these  are  true  words  of 
God.' 

John  is  so  overwhelmed  that  he  falls  down 
to  worship  this  one.  And  then  he  finds  that 
this  is  one  of  his  own  redeemed  brothers  of  the 
earth.  And  as  He  quietly  bids  John  give  his 
worship  to  One  only,  He  adds  very  significant 
words :  *'  the  testimony  of  Jesus  is  the  spirit  of 
prophecy."  The  whole  genius  and  soul  of  all 
this  wealth  of  prophecy  is  to  point  men  to  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  God  to  us. 

And  now  comes  the  event  toward  which  the 
ages  have  looked.  The  heavens  open.  And  our 
Lord  Jesus  appears  coming  in  glory  to  earth.  At 
last  He  comes.  There's  a  wonderful  description. 
He  comes  as  a  conqueror,  riding  forth  to  judge 
the  earth  righteously,  and  to  make  war  on  evil. 
His  eyes  are  as  a  flame  of  fire,  and  upon  His 

*  Revelation  i.  4,  8 ;  iv.  8. 

*  Revelation  xi.  17 ;  xvi.  5. 


2o6        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

head  many  diadems.  He  has  a  name  indicating 
that  He  is  all  alone  in  the  experiences  He  has 
been  through,  and  in  His  character.  He  comes 
as  King  of  kings  and  Lord  of  lords,  to  rule  all 
the  earth  with  a  new  absolutism,  to  right  all 
wrongs,  and  visit  the  indignant  wrath  of  God 
upon  all  sin. 

As  He  appears  an  angel  gives  warning  of 
what  is  coming.  In  words  that  are  an  echo  of 
Ezekiel's,  long  centuries  before,  he  calls  to 
all  the  scavenger  birds  of  the  earth  that  haunt 
battlefields  to  come  to  a  great  feasting  time.^ 
And  John  sees  the  vast  armies  of  the  nations  of 
the  earth  all  gathered  together  for  a  last  mighty 
battle,  under  the  leadership  of  the  great  leader 
of  lawlessness  and  his  lieutenant. 

And  the  utter  impotence  of  their  struggle 
against  God  is  revealed  in  the  quietness  and 
brevity  with  which  their  defeat  and  capture  are 
told.  Satan's  great  earth  leader  and  his  chief 
who  deceived  the  people  with  his  miraculous 
power,  both  are  taken  and  forever  put  away. 
And  then  Satan  himself  is  chained  and  fastened 
securely  in  the  abyss.  Such  is  the  tremendous 
consummation  quietly  told  in  a  few  lines.  And 
then  follows  the  setting  up  of  the  glorious  king- 
dom on  earth. 

Whatever  the  immediate  circumstances  under 
which  the  Second  Psalm  was  penned,  it  will  be 
readily  seen  how  it  fits  into  this  situation  at  the 
end. 

*  Ezekiel  xxxix.  17-20. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     207 

"Why  do  the  nations  tumultuously  assemble, 
And  the  peoples  meditate  a  vain  thing? 
The  kings  of  the  earth  set  themselves, 
And  the  rulers  take  counsel  together, 
Against  Jehovah  and  against  His  Anointed,  saying, 
'  Let  us  break  their  bonds  asunder, 
And  cast  away  their  cords  from  us.'" 

But  their  efforts  seem  so  puny,  and  the  result 
so  one-sided,  that 

"He  that  sitteth  in  the  heavens  will  laugh: 
The  Lord  will  have  them  in  derision." 

And  we  remember  that,  in  these  Revelation 
pages,  it  is  always  with  the  sword  of  His  mouth 
that  the  Lord  Jesus  is  said  to  fight,  as  we  read 
on: 

"Then  will  He  speak  unto  them  in  His  wrath. 
And  vex  [or  trouble]  them  in  His  sore  displeasure; 

[saying] 
*Yet  /  have  set  my  King 
Upon  my  holy  hill  of  Zion.*" 

Then  the  Son  speaks: 

"  I  will  tell  of  the  decree : 

Jehovah  said  unto  me,  'thou  art  my  Son; 

This   day  have   I   begotten   thee. 

Ask  of  me  and  I  will  give  thee  the  nations  for  tkiotf 
inheritance, 

And  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth  for  thy  pos- 
session. 

Thou  shalt  break  them  with  a  rod  of  iron; 

Thou  shalt  dash  them  in  pieces  like  a  potter's  vessel.'  *" 

And  the  writer  of  the  Psalms  closed  with  a 


2o8         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

word  of  earnest  counsel  to  the  kings  of  earth: 

"  Now  therefore  be  wise,  O  ye  kings : 
Be  instructed,  ye  judges  of  the  earth. 
Serve  Jehovah  with  fear, 
And  rejoice  with  trembling  [awe], 
Kiss  the  Son,  lest  He  be  angry,  and  ye  perish  in  the 

way, 
For  His  wrath  will  soon  be  kindled. 
Blessed  are  all  they  that  take  refuge  in  Him." 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  these  seven  views  describe 
(i)  the  general  characteristics  of  the  tribula- 
tion time;  (2)  the  way  in  which  it  comes,  that 
is,  by  the  withdrawal  of  restraint  and  so  the 
loosing  of  evil;  (3)  the  faithful  witness  being 
borne  throughout  the  period;  (4)  the  great  evil 
leader  and  the  character  of  the  persecution  he 
wages;  (5)  the  visitation  of  judgments  upon 
earth  with  the  great  gathering  of  nations  to 
battle  against  God;  (6)  the  world  system  of  evil; 
and  (7)  the  coming  of  our  Lord  Jesus  to  judge 
evil  and  set  up  the  kingdom. 

Still  He  Waits. 

It  will  at  once  be  noted  that  these  things  group 
up,  naturally  and  easily,  under  three  headings. 
First,  there  is  a  terrible  persecution  of  God's 
people.  This  will  end  in  a  visitation  of  judg- 
ments, including  great  plagues.  There  will  be 
a  gathering  of  the  armies  of  all  nations,  and  a 
great  battle.  It  will  end  in  a  decisive  defeat  for 
them  by  the  personal  coming  of  the  Lord  Jesus,- 
and  will  be  accompanied  by  a  terrific  earthquake 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     209 

and  an  equally  terrific  shake-up  of  the  heavenly- 
bodies  connected  with  the  earth,  sun,  moon,  and 
stars.  Then  comes  the  establishment  of  the 
Kingdom  of  God  upon  earth.  These  three  things 
stand  dominantly  out. 

It  comes  as  a  surprise  to  one  who  has  not  been 
thinking  especially  about  it,  to  find  how  these 
three  things  are  the  same  three  that  stood  out 
so  prominently  at  the  close  of  the  study  of 
future  items  in  the  old  prophetic  books.  It  is 
natural  that  it  should  be  so,  of  course,  since  the 
Book  of  God  is  one  in  its  essential  unity. 

But  there  is  a  great  fascination  in  finding  the 
parts  to  come  together  so  simply  and  naturally. 
As  we  gather  up  the  Old  Testament  pages  these 
three  things  sift  out  and  group  together  as  dis- 
tinctly not  yet  fulfilled,  and  so  future.  As  we 
listen  to  our  Lord  Jesus  talking,  again  these  same 
three  items  are  emphasized  by  Him.  And  now 
the  same  three  are  found  here. 

Dr.  A.  F.  Schauffler  tells  of  a  striking  experi- 
ence he  had  in  connection  with  his  mission  work 
in  New  York  City.  A  letter  came  to  him  from 
a  stranger  in  Germany.  It  said :  ''  I  know  you 
are  a  city  missionary.  I  am  sending  a  trunk  in 
your  care.  Inclosed  in  this  letter  you  will  find 
a  piece  of  paper  cut.  A  man  will  come  and  pre- 
sent to  you  a  piece  of  paper  matching  this  piece. 
Please  give  him  the  trunk."  And  enclosed  in 
the  letter  was  a  piece  of  paper  cut  in  zig- 
zags. 

Letter  and  paper  were  laid  away  to  await  de- 
velopments.    Some  weeks  later  a  stranger  came 


2IO        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

in  and  presented  a  queerly  cut  piece  of  paper, 
saying :  "  I  think  you  have  a  piece  that  matches 
this."  Dr.  Schauffler  got  out  his  piece  of  paper, 
laid  the  two  side  by  side,  found  that  they 
matched,  and  said  to  his  visitor :  "  There's  your 
trunk." 

Even  so  these  prophetic  pages  of  the  New 
Testament  are  found  to  fit  exactly  the  pages  of 
the  Old,  written  centuries  before.  It  is  not  sur- 
prising, however.  One  hand  cut  the  paper  into 
two  pieces  in  Germany,  and  naturally  they  fitted 
when  put  together  in  New  York.  One  Hand  has 
guided  the  men  writing  in  both  Old  and  New. 

When  Jeremiah  was  first  called  to  his  work 
as  God's  messenger  he  was  shown  in  vision  the 
branch  of  an  almond  tree.  The  almond  tree  is 
the  earliest  of  all  trees  to  wake  from  its  win- 
ter's sleep  at  the  first  hint  of  spring  warmth 
coming.  And  so  it  was  called  the  "  watching  " 
or  "  watcher ''  tree.  Then  God  said  to  Jeremiah : 
"  Even  so,  I  eagerly  watch  over  my  word  to 
bring  it  to  life  and  fruitage  at  the  very  earliest 
opportunity."  ^  And  so  the  word  of  this  watch- 
ing God  and  its  fulfilment  match,  regardless  of 
the  thing  we  call  time,  even  running  into  cen- 
turies. 

And  it  is  very  helpful  for  those  of  us  who  have 
had  a  sort  of  dread  of  prophecy  as  of  a  vague 
something  that  we  can't  understand,  to  find  after 
all  how  simple  it  is.  Just  three  great  items  stand 
out  of  these  prophetic  pages  that  are  waiting  ful- 
filment. 
*  Jeremiah  i.  11-12. 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm     211 

Such  is  the  seven-fold  view,  which  is  taken  up 
almost  wholly  with  the  clearing-up  storm  in  the 
King's  realm.  But  all  this  is  still  future.  We 
are  still  in  that  waiting  time.  Our  Lord  Jesus 
still  stands  among  the  candlesticks.  Still  He  is 
waiting  for  His  Church  to  be  faithful.  He  still 
waits  for  each  of  us  who  is  a  bit  of  His  Church. 
He  is  depending  on  us  to  be  faithful,  by  His 
grace,  day  by  day,  during  this  waiting  time.  And 
while  He  waits  all  His  limitless  power  is  at  our 
disposal,  as  we  follow  His  leading.  We  may 
take  as  much  as  we  need.  But  the  taking  must 
be  with  the  life. 

A  dear  missionary  friend  told  of  a  simple  ex- 
perience that  meant  much  to  him.  We  were 
walking  together  in  the  town  in  Korea  where 
his  mission  work  is.  His  school  was  the  centre 
of  the  recent  troublous  times  in  Korea,  and 
the  storm  seemed  to  rage  about  his  own  person 
at  its  outburst.  As  we  talked  all  his  native 
teachers  and  several  of  his  older  students  were 
in  prison.  The  experience  he  told  me  was  of 
earlier  days  in  this  country,  but  had  come  back 
to  his  memory  as  a  great  refreshment  during 
the  troublous  times. 

He  was  a  professor  in  a  small  college  in  our 
Middle  West.  Special  funds  were  being  raised 
for  extension.  He  was  to  ask  a  certain  man 
of  wealth  for  a  large  donation.  He  planned 
and  prayed  much,  and  at  last  went  to  see  the 
man  in  another  city  by  appointment.  He  had 
a  keen  sense  of  the  responsibility  of  his 
task. 


212        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

As  he  entered  the  building  where  the  man's 
office  was  he  was  greeted  cordially  by  a  young 
man  whom  he  remembered  as  a  former  student, 
to  whom  he  had  been  friendly  in  some  time  of 
minor  need.  But  he  had  not  connected  him  in 
his  mind  with  this  wealthy  man,  whose  son  he 
was.  Now  as  the  former  student  learned  of  his 
professor  friend's  errand,  he  said  with  all  the 
confidence  of  a  son  on  good  terms  with  his 
father : 

"  Come  right  in ;  father's  here." 

As  they  stepped  into  the  man's  office  the  son 
said,  simply: 

"  Father,  this  is  an  old  friend  of  mine.  He's 
all  right.    Give  him  whatever  he  wants.'' 

And  the  father,  busy  at  his  desk,  with  barely 
a  look  at  the  appointed  visitor,  reached  one 
hand  over  for  his  checkbook,  and  simply 
said: 

"  How  much  do  you  want  ?" 

My  friend,  taken  completely  by  surprise  at 
the  unexpected  turn  of  events,  managed  to  name 
the  large  sum  he  had  been  thinking  and  praying 
over  so  much.  And  before  he  could  quite  re- 
cover from  his  surprise,  he  found  himself  outside 
walking  up  the  street  with  the  coveted  check  in 
his  pocket,  praising  God  for  such  an  answer  to 
his  prayers.  It  had  been  years  before,  but  as 
we  walked  and  talked  it  all  came  back  with  a 
fresh  flush  of  feeling. 

The  present  is  a  waiting  time.  It  may  seem 
to  some  as  though  they  are  in  the  wilderness. 
Clear  and  distinct  comes  a  quiet  voice: 


A  Clearing-up  Storm  in  the  Realm    213 

"  What'll  you  have  ?  Whatever  you  choose  to 
ask,  for  My  Son's  sake." 

May  we  reach  out  to  take  as  much  as  He  is 
reaching  down  to  give.  But  the  taking  must  be 
with  the  life. 


VIL— THE  CROWNED  CHRIST 
REIGNING 


"  On  this  side  of  the  river  and  on  that  was  the  tree 
of  life,  bearing  twelve  fruits," 


"  A  garden  is  a  lovesome  thing,  God  wot ! 
Rose  plot, 
Fringed  pool, 
Ferned  grot — 
The  veriest  school 
Of  peace ;  and  yet  the  fool 

Contends  that  God  is  not — 
Not  God!  in  gardens!  when  the  eve  is  cool? 

Nay,  but  I  have  a  sign; 
'Tis  very  sure  God  walks  in  mine." 


THE  CROWNED  CHRIST 
REIGNING 

(Revelation,  Chapters  xx:4-xxii.) 

Day  Is  Coming. 

It's  a  long  lane  that  has  no  turning.  Every 
valley  leads  up  a  hillside  to  a  hilltop.  Every 
storm  ends  in  sunshine  at  the  last.  Every  night 
runs  out;  the  dawn  will  break;  the  new  day 
comes ;  the  shadows  flee  before  the  new  shining. 
The  battle  for  right  will  end  in  victory,  and  in  a 
decisive  victory.  There'll  be  no  draw  here. 
Faith  wins  at  last.  It's  been  a  long  night  of 
fighting.     Sometimes  it  seems  endless. 

The  man  in  the  thick  of  the  fight,  with  moist 
brow,  and  clenched  hand,  and  quick  breath  and 
throbbing  heart,  sometimes  sobs  out  the  prayer, 
"  O  Lord,  how  long  before  the  night  is  over, 
and  the  dawn  breaks  ? "  And  quietly  through 
the  smoke  and  din  of  the  conflict  a  still,  small 
voice  says,  "  Steady,  my  child,  steady ;  the  day 
is  surely  coming,  and  with  day  victory;  steady, 
steady  a  bit  longer." 

Now  here  in  vision  the  fight  is  over,  the  vic- 
tory won.  And  God's  visions  always  become 
realities.  The  vision  is  yet  for  the  appointed 
time,  and  it  panteth  breathlessly  toward  the  real- 
217 


2i8         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

ization,  and  will  not  fail  nor  delay.  Though  it 
tarry,  wait  for  it ;  it  will  certainly  come  on  time ; 
it  will  not  be  late.^ 

In  the  seventh  view  the  kingdom  follows  im- 
mediately that  decisive  conflict  and  the  putting 
of  Satan  out  of  the  way  for  the  time  being.  The 
redeemed  ones  at  once  begin  their  blessed  service 
of  fellowship  with  the  King  in  reigning  over 
the  kingdom.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  fact 
that  at  this  time  there  has  been  a  resurrection 
of  believers.  And  these  resurrected  ones  join 
with  those  caught  up  without  death  in  adminis- 
tering the  kingdom.  This  kingdom  is  said  to 
last  for  a  thousand  years,  that  length  of  time 
being  named  only  here,  and  here  six  times. 

There  is  much  talk  in  our  day  about  the  king- 
dom. All  Christendom  has  been  repeating  for 
nineteen  centuries  the  petition,  "  Thy  kingdom 
come."  It  will  be  of  intense  and  practical  in- 
terest to  see  just  what  the  kingdom  is,  as  pic- 
tured in  the  Bible.  It  is  barely  mentioned  in 
this  place  in  Revelation,  to  fit  it  into  its  place  in 
the  scheme  of  future  events  being  outlined. 

But  it  is  the  chief  theme  in  these  old  prophetic 
pages,  around  which  all  others  group.  Imme- 
diate historical  events  furnish  the  setting,  but 
there  is  a  continual  swinging  to  the  coming 
future  greatness.  The  yellow  glory-light  of  the 
coming  kingdom  is  never  out  of  the  prophetic 
sky.  Jeremiah  is  the  one  most  absorbed  in  the 
boiling  of  the  political  pot  of  his  own  strenuous 
time,  but  even  he,  at  times,  lifts  his  head  and 

*  Habakkuk  ii.  3- 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning      219 

gets  such  a  glimpse  of  the  coming  kingdom 
as  causes  him  to  mix  some  rose  tincture  with 
the  jet  black  ink  he  habitually  uses. 


The  Kingdom  Picture. 

Let  us  look  briefly  at  the  kingdom  picture  of 
these  older  pages.  Its  capital  is  Jerusalem, 
which  becomes  the  world  capital.  It  will  be  the 
joy  of  the  whole  earth.  Israel  will  be  the  first 
nation  of  the  earth,  to  which  all  others  will  be 
tributary.  But  it  will  be  not  the  Israel  of  these 
old  pages,  nor  the  Jew  as  he  is  known  charac- 
teristically throughout  history.  Israel  will  be  a 
new  nation,  made  new  in  character  by  the  power 
of  the  Holy  Spirit.  The  winsome  picture  of  the 
baptized  crowds  at  Pentecost  gives  an  inkling  of 
the  spirit  that  will  sway  the  new  nation.^  They 
will  be  a  nation  of  radiant  faces  and  thrilled 
hearts. 

The  effect  of  this  upon  all  other  nations  is 
marked.  Through  Israel's  regeneration  and  new 
leadership,  every  other  nation  is  to  know  a  new 
spirit  life.  The  outpouring  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
upon  Israel  is  to  be  followed  by  an  outpouring 
upon  all  flesh.  Pentecost  is  merely  a  beginning 
of  what  is  to  be  universal.  There  will  be  a 
widespread  voluntary  coming  to  Israel  for  re- 
ligious instruction.  She  becomes  the  world's 
teacher  until  the  knowledge  of  God  covers  the 
whole  earth  as  the  waters  cover  the  sea.  But 
all  this  will  be  purely  a  voluntary  movement 

*  Acts  ii.  44-47 ;  iv.  32-34. 


220         About  the  Crov/ned  Christ 

among  the  nations.  There  will  be  war  no  longer, 
but  universal  peace. 

There's  one  part  of  the  picture  specially  com- 
forting. That  vast  majority,  the  poor,  will  be 
specially  guarded  and  cared  for.  There  will  be 
no  hungry  people,  nor  cold,  nor  poorly  clad ;  no 
unemployed  begging  for  a  chance  to  earn  a  dry 
crust,  and  no  workers  fighting  for  a  fair  share 
of  the  fruit  of  their  toil.  But  there  are  yet 
tenderer  touches  on  the  canvas.  Broken  hearts 
will  be  healed,  prison  doors  unhung,  broken 
family  circles  complete  again. 

A  recent  issue  of  The  Sunday  School  Times 
tells  a  simple,  touching  incident  of  a  mission 
hall  in  Korea.  A  Korean  woman  living  in  the 
country  heard  of  the  wonderful  things  happen- 
ing there,  and  came  to  town  to  find  out  for  her- 
self, and  get  some  help.  But  she  didn't  know 
where  the  hall  was,  nor  what  name  it  was  called. 
So  she  inquired  on  the  streets  for  the  place  where 
they  cured  the  broken  heart.  And  at  once  she 
was  directed  to  the  mission  hall.  That  sort  of 
thing  will  become  a  blessed  commonplace  in  the 
beginning  of  the  kingdom  time. 

Then  there  are  certain  radical  changes  in 
nature.  Splendid  rivers  of  waters  are  to  flow 
through  or  by  Jerusalem,  suggesting  radical 
changes  in  the  formation  of  the  land  there.  That 
fortress  city,  on  the  hilltop,  Jerusalem,  becomes 
as  the  world's  metropolis,  a  mighty  city,  with 
rivers  floating  a  world's  commerce.  The  light 
of  sun  and  moon  will  be  greatly  intensified,  so 
influencing  the  fertility  of  the  earth.     Before 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     221 

their  healing  light  and  heat,  in  the  newly  tem- 
pered atmosphere,  all  poisonous  growths,  the 
blight  of  drought,  and  suffering  of  untempered 
heat,  will  disappear. 

And  with  this  goes  a  change  in  the  animal 
creation.  Hate  will  be  gone.  And  so  beasts 
that  are  dreaded  because  of  their  ferocity  and 
treachery  and  poisonous  power  will  be  wholly 
changed.  There  will  be  mutual  cessation  of 
cruelty  to  animals  by  man,  and  of  danger  to 
man  by  animals,  for  all  hate  and  violence  will 
be  gone. 

And  some  one  raises  his  eyebrows  sceptically 
and  says,  ironically,  **  What  fairy  tale,  what 
skipper's  yarn,  is  this?"  Well,  I  frankly  con- 
fess that  I  don't  know  anything  about  this  mat- 
ter, except  what  I  find  in  this  old  Book  of  God. 
But  I  confess,  too,  that  I  try  studiously  to  get 
a  common-sense,  poised,  Spirit-enlightened  un- 
derstanding of  what  this  Book  does  tell.  And 
then  I  accept  it,  and  go  by  it,  regardless  of  proba- 
bilities or  improbabilities.  It  may  seem  like  a 
fairy  tale,  yet  it  is  only  the  picture  of  the 
coming  kingdom  soberly  set  forth  in  these  old 
pages. 

As  we  turn  to  the  Gospel  pages  we  find  the 
kingdom  to  be  the  chief  thing  Jesus  is  talking 
about.  The  Gospel  days  are  sample  days  of  the 
kingdom  in  the  personal  blessings  bestowed. 
Read  through  these  accounts  of  blind  eyes 
opened,  the  lame  walking,  the  maimed  made 
whole,  the  dumb  singing,  the  distressed  in  what- 
ever way  relieved,  the  ignorant  instructed,  the 


222         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

sinful  wooed,  and  the  bad  of  heart  and  life  be- 
ing blessedly  changed. 

All  this  is  a  taste  of  the  kingdom.  Jesus  was 
wooing  men  to  accept  King  and  kingdom.  To- 
day, as  in  all  Church  time,  bodily  healing  is  a 
privilege  for  those  who  can  take  it,  and  a  gift 
for  the  rare  few  who  can  be  entrusted  with  it. 
In  these  Gospel  pages  it  was  freely  bestowed  on 
multitudes,  and  the  gift  exercised  with  power  by 
many.    Even  so  it  will  be  in  the  kingdom  time. 

Most  of  the  parables  are  found  to  be  connected 
in  their  first  meaning  with  explaining  about  the, 
kingdom.  The  kingdom  will  follow  the  law  of 
growth  that  is  common  in  nature,  sowing,  wait- 
ing, cultivating,  and  reaping.^  Its  influence  will 
spread  gradually  until  all  feel  its  presence  and 
power.^  It  must  meet  and  deal  with  the  ob- 
stacles presented  by  different  men's  temperaments 
and  dispositions  and  temptations.^  There  will 
be  opposition,  gradually  overcome,  but  never 
fully."*  Many  will  be  carried  along  by  the  cur- 
rent of  the  day.  It  will  be  a  good  current,  for 
righteousness  will  be  the  common  thing  then. 
But  in  their  hearts  many  will  long  for  some- 
thing else,  something  different.^ 

But  to  many,  the  new  blessed  kingdom  mes- 
sage will  come  as  a  treasure  accidentally 
stumbled  upon,  not  being  looked  for,  but  now 
valued  as  very  precious.®    To  others  it  will  come 

^  Mark  iv.  26-29.    Matthew  xiii.  31-32. 

*  Matthew  xiii.  33.  "  Matthew  xiii.  3-9.  18-23. 

*  Matthew  xiii.  24-30.         °  Matthew  xiii.  47-50. 

"  Matthew  xiii.  44. 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning      223 

as  the  thing  they  have  been  eagerly  seeking  for, 
and  which  satisfies  the  deepest  yearnings.^  One 
who  has  had  any  touch  with  the  pathetic  yearn- 
ing of  years  found  in  non-Christian  lands  can 
better  appreciate  the  results  of  this  kind  in  these 
glad  coming  days. 

The  characteristic  spirit  of  the  kingdom 
stands  sharply  out  in  contrast  with  the  dominant 
spirit  of  our  own  time.  The  kingdom  is  said  to 
belong  peculiarly  to  those  who  are  "  poor  in 
spirit,"  in  whom  self-assertion  and  pride  have 
quite  gone  out,  leaving  them  humble  and  lowly 
in  heart.  The  meek  will  inherit  the  earth,  and 
will  take  down  all  the  walls  and  fences,  for  all 
conditions  of  life  are  radically  changed.  The 
penitent  man  or  woman  will  be  freely  received 
regardless  of  their  past,  while  the  proud  will 
find  the  doorway  too  low  for  their  unbending 
heads.2 

Rewards  in  the  kingdom  will  not  be  given  as  a 
matter  of  merit,  as  in  our  present  endless  cut- 
ting and  rivalry,  but  will  be  thought  of  wholly 
as  evidence  of  the  graciousness  of  the  King.' 
And  yet  more  striking,  the  rewards  given  will 
be  the  privilege  of  serving,  some  more,  some  less, 
according  as  they  have  become  skilled  in  serv- 
ing.* He  who  serves  most  truly  will  be  given 
preferment.®  The  thing  prized  above  all  else 
will  be  glad  obedience  to  the  King. 

It  will  be   seen  that  the  kingdom   is  to  be 

*  Matthew  xiii.  45-46.  '  Matthew  xxi.  31. 

•  Matthew  xx.  1-16.  *  Luke  xix.  11-27. 

"  Matthew  xx.  25-28. 


224         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

a  time  of  world-wide  evangelization.  Indeed 
this  is  the  purpose  of  the  kingdom.  There  are 
two  periods  of  world-wide  evangelization  in  our 
Lord's  planning.  The  present  is  the  Church 
time  of  such  evangelizing.  This  is,  of  course, 
the  true  main  objective  of  the  Church.  This  is 
the  reason  for  the  Church's  existence,  to  take  the 
message  of  a  crucified  risen  Christ  to  all  men, 
that  so  the  way  may  be  prepared  for  His  return, 
and  through  that  for  the  next  period  of  evan- 
gelizing. 

The  kingdom  period  of  world-wide  evangeli- 
zation is  under  radically  different  conditions. 
Then  the  evil  one  will  be  removed  from  the 
scene  of  action,  the  Holy  Spirit  will  have  been 
poured  out  upon  all  flesh,  and  so  the  moral  veil 
now  upon  men's  eyes  will  be  removed.  The 
Jews,  with  all  their  characteristic  aggressiveness 
and  perseverance,  now  intensified  by  the  Holy 
Spirit's  presence,  will  be  a  nation  of  mission- 
aries to  all  the  earth.  The  redeemed  ones  in  their 
resurrection  bodies  will  have  the  blessed  privilege 
of  helping.  And  over  all  will  be  the  presence 
and  supervision  of  the  King,  our  Lord  Jesus 
Himself.  That  will  be  world-wide  evangeliza- 
tion in  earnest. 

Such  is  a  faint  glimpse  given  in  both  Old  and 
New  Testaments  of  the  kingdom  spoken  of  in 
these  Revelation  pages  in  such  few  words.  Al- 
most the  whole  Bible  lies  back  of  those  few 
words.  What  a  time  it  will  be  for  this  old  earth ! 
With  renewed  fervour  our  hearts  repeat,  "  Thy 
kingdom  come.'' 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     225 


The  Final  Crisis  of  Choice. 

But  it  is  made  clear  at  once  to  John  that  the 
kingdom  is  not  an  end  in  itself.  It  is  a  means 
to  an  end,  a  wonderful  means  to  a  blessed  end. 
It  is  startling  to  find  that  after  that  long  blessed 
reign  the  evil  one  is  to  be  loosed  out  of  his  prison- 
abyss.  This  seems  at  first  flush  too  startling  to 
be  credible.  But  on  reflection  the  reason  becomes 
plain,  and  reveals  the  strength  as  well  as  the 
tenderness  of  God's  love. 

All  through  the  kingdom  time  there  are  those 
who  are  in  heart  opposed  to  this  new  order  of 
things.  They  long  for  the  leeks  and  onions  and 
garlic  of  the  old  eating.  There  will  be  some 
yielding  only  a  feigned  allegiance  to  the  King.^ 
That  dragnet  of  the  parable  has  gathered  some 
fish  that  didn't  want  to  be  caught,  and  want  a 
chance  to  get  away  to  their  own  native  waters 
again. ^  The  tares  of  another  parable  are  left 
in  with  the  wheat  until  the  end  reveals  which 
is  real  wheat  and  which  really  tares.^ 

The  one  thing  God  longs  for  is  love.  And 
that  only  is  love  which  is  the  free  outpouring 
of  the  heart.  He  longs  for  love  as  our  free 
choice.  This  is  the  image  of  God  in  which  we 
have  all  been  made.  We  are  most  like  God  in 
power,  in  the  right  of  free  choice.  We  are  most 
like  Him  in  character  when  we  use  our  power 
as   He   uses   His;  when  we   choose   what   He 

*  Psalm  xviii.  44;  Ixvi.  3;  Ixxxi.  15;  note  marginal 
readings. 

'  Matthew  xiii.  47-50.      *  Matthew  xiii.  24-30,  36-43. 


226        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

chooses  for  us.  And  so  there  must  be  a  final 
time  of  sifting  and  choosing. 

Here  is  the  strength  of  love,  that  dares  loose 
Satan  out  that  so  we  must  choose  in  the  face  of 
opposition.  For  faith  isn't  faith  except  it  can 
stand  the  fire  test,  the  friction  fire  test  of  oppo- 
sition. Here  is  the  tenderness  of  love,  that  longs 
to  have  a  return  love  as  pure  and  free  as  its  own, 
and  so  gives  fullest  opportunity  for  it  to  be  re- 
vealed and  to  grow. 

So  Satan  is  loosed  out  for  his  tempting  work. 
And  another  great  world  crisis  comes,  and  an- 
other great  settlement;  this  the  final  one.  The 
devil,  his  beastly  Antichrist  and  false  prophet, 
are  put  out  of  the  way  forever. 

A  great  dazzling  throne  is  set.  And  One  sits 
on  it  with  a  face  of  indescribable  glory.  Then 
comes  the  second  resurrection,  of  all  those  not 
included  in  the  first  resurrection  a  thousand  years 
before.  This  is  a  judgment  of  all  who  have  died, 
with  the  exception  already  noted.  The  judg- 
ment of  the  living  spoken  of  in  Matthew,  twenty- 
five,  probably  is  in  connection  with  the  closing 
scene  of  the  great  crisis,  just  before  this  judg- 
ment of  the  resurrected  dead,  or  possibly  in  con- 
nection with  this  judgment.  This  is  the  final 
judgment. 

Gladness  and  distress  mingle  in  reading  the 
account:  gladness  that  the  contest,  age  long,  is 
over ;  distress  to  find  that  for  some  there  is  what 
is  described  briefly  but  with  terrible  intensity, 
in  the  words,  "  the  lake  of  fire.'*  Yet  there  is 
still   comfort  in  noting  the  language  used  of 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     227 

these, — "  if  any."  ^  It  is  not  the  language  of  a 
great  multitude,  but  rather  of  an  incorrigible 
scattered  and  scant  minority. 


Home  at  Last. 


And  now  for  the  seventh  time  in  this  last 
vision  John  says,  "  I  saw."  Bit  by  bit  the  view 
opens  up  before  his  eyes,  from  the  coming  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  out  of  the  opened  heavens,  on  and 
on,  until  now  the  final  view  of  all  bursts  in  a 
winsome  glory  before  his  astonished,  delighted 
eyes. 

God's  own  ideal,  that  He  has  been  carrying 
in  His  heart,  is  pictured.  That  ideal  is  that  He 
and  man  shall  dwell  together  as  a  family.  The 
ideal  is  not  a  Church  nor  a  Kingdom.  These 
are  merely  great  means  to  a  greater  end. 
The  ideal  is  the  family,  all  dwelling  to- 
gether in  sweetest  harmony  and  content,  with  a 
common  board,  and  a  common  fireside  in  the 
twilight  of  the  day,  and  all  the  sweet  fellowship 
that  these  stand  for. 

John  sees  a  new  heaven  and  a  new  earth,  the 
old  heaven  and  earth  gone,  and  with  them  the 
seoaration  of  the  wide  sea  gone  forever,  too. 
He  sees  the  holy  city,  Jerusalem,  made  over  new, 
coming  down  out  of  the  new  heavens  to  man's 
new  dwelling-place,  the  new  earth.  It  presents  a 
wondrous,  joyous  appearance  as  of  a  bride 
adorned  for  her  husband. 

Then  a  great  voice  out  of  the  throne  speaks 

*  Revelation  xx.  15. 


228         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

of  this  ideal  in  the  heart  of  God  for  Himself  and 
His  friend,  man.  "  Look !  God  has  pitched  His 
tent  down  amongst  men,  and  they  shall  be  His 
peoples,  and  He  will  be  their  God."  He  will 
live  with  them  as  a  Father-mother-God,  person- 
ally caring  for  each  one,  Himself  wiping  away 
every  tear  from  every  eye.  A  single  tear  and  a 
single  pair  of  eyes  will  be  enough  to  claim  His 
personal  attention  at  once. 

His  presence  insures  the  absence  forever  of 
death,  and  mourning,  and  pain,  and  crying.  The 
dirge  music  has  sung  its  last  song.  The  minor 
chords  are  gone.  All  the  old  things  of  a  sor- 
rowful sort  are  quite  gone.  And  as  John  looks 
He  that  sitteth  on  the  throne  makes  the  glad 
announcement,  "  Behold,  I  make  all  things  new." 
And  John  is  bidden  to  write  all  this,  for  "  these 
words  are  faithful  and  true" 

And  again  the  One  on  the  throne  seems  to 
look  eagerly  forward  to  His  ideal  as  already 
actually  accomplished:  "They  are  come  to 
pass."  And  to  let  John  feel  the  certainty  of  it 
all  He  says,  "  I  am  the  Alpha  and  the  Omega, 
the  beginning  and  the  end."  The  power  that 
has  done  all  from  creation's  morn  will  complete 
all  clear  to  the  end. 

And  then  the  tenderness  of  that  highest  love 
which  finds  expression  in  the  personal  touch 
comes  out  in  the  next  words :  "  I  will  give  unto 
him  that  is  athirst  of  the  fountain  of  life  freely." 
The  smallest  need  of  any  one  will  have  His  per- 
sonal thought  and  attention,  and  they  shall  have 
the  best  there  is,  and  have  it  in  abundance. 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     229 

And  the  old  pleading  that  runs  like  a  strain 
of  music  throughout  these  pages  comes  again: 
"  He  that  overcometh  shall  inherit  these  things. 
I  will  be  His  God,  and  he  shall  be  my  son/'  and 
so  entitled  to  the  inheritance. 

Then  plainly,  clearly,  with  all  the  honesty  of 
love,  comes  the  warning  of  the  terrible  outcome 
for  those  who  refuse  His  tender  love.  It  is  most 
significant  that  this  most  winsome  picture  at  the 
end  of  the  book  contains  the  dark,  black  shad- 
ows, which  remain  in  the  picture  at  the  end. 

All  this  is  spoken  directly  to  John  by  God 
Himself.  It  is  not  sent  by  an  angel,  or  by  a 
redeemed  human  messenger.  It  comes  to  John 
direct  with  all  the  force  and  tenderness  of  a 
word  spoken  to  him  out  of  the  very  heart  of  God. 

And  now  an  angel  carries  John  off  to  let  him 
see  this  that  is  called  both  a  bride  and  a  city. 
And  from  the  top  of  a  high  mountain  John  looks 
out  and  sees  a  most  wonderful  city,  coming  down 
out  of  heaven  from  God,  filled  and  flooded  with 
the  glory  of  God. 

And  the  best  language  that  earth  knows  any- 
thing about  is  used  in  the  attempt  to  describe 
this  city  ideal.  Its  dimensions  are  perfect  in 
proportion  and  in  their  outer  relations.  Its 
foundations  are  adorned  with  the  costliest,  most 
precious  stones,  the  walls  are  built  of  jasper, 
and  each  gate  is  one  immense  pearl ;  but  the  city 
itself  is  builded  of  a  gold  as  transparent  as  pure 
glass.  Israel  and  the  Church  are  as  sweet  mem- 
ories of  past  days,  recalled  now  by  gates  and 
foundations. 


230        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

But  these  are  passed  by  in  noting  the  outshin- 
ing glory  of  the  presence  of  God.  In  the  simple 
language  which  has  become  so  imbedded  in  the 
heart  and  imagination  of  the  Church,  "  the 
city  hath  no  need  of  the  sun,  neither  of  the 
moon,  to  shine  on  it;  for  the  glory  of  God  did 
lighten  it,  and  the  Lamb  is  the  light  thereof." 
And  the  winsome  description  goes  on.  The  na- 
tions walk  in  this  wondrous  light  of  God's  pres- 
ence, and  the  kings  of  earth  bring  glad  tribute 
of  their  glory  into  it.  "  And  the  gates  thereof 
shall  in  no  wise  be  shut  by  day,  for  there  shall 
be  no  night  there."  ''  And  there  shall  in  no  wise 
enter  into  it  anything  unclean,  or  he  that  doeth 
an  abomination  and  a  lie,  but  only  they  that  are 
written  in  the  Lamb's  book  of  life.'' 

In  the  midst  of  the  city  is  a  river  of  water  of 
life  clear  as  sparkling  crystal,  flowing  out  from 
the  throne  of  God  and  of  the  Lamb.  On  each 
side  of  the  river  is  the  tree  of  life  yielding  con- 
tinual fruitage.  And  the  leaves  of  the  tree  were 
for  the  healing  of  the  nations. 

And  the  heart  never  fails  to  respond  with  a 
quickened  beat  to  the  lines :  "  His  servants  shall 
serve  Him;  and  they  shall  see  His  face;  and  His 
name  shall  be  in  their  foreheads;" — that  is,  His 
character  shall  shine  out  of  their  faces.  "  And 
there  shall  be  no  night  there;  and  they  need  no 
candle,  neither  Hght  of  the  sun;  for  the  Lord 
God  giveth  them  light.  And  they  shall  reign 
forever  and  ever.'" 

Such  is  the  heart-touching,  heart-gripping  tale 
of  God's  ideal  for  man.  His  creature  and  com- 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     231 

panion  and  friend.  All  the  best  that  the  city 
stands  for  of  human  life,  and  all  the  best  that  the 
country,  typified  in  the  garden,  stands  for,  are 
forever  blessedly  joined.  And  in  the  midst — 
Himself,  and  gathered  about  Him  His  redeemed 
ones,  as  children  about  a  father,  in  a  union  and 
fellowship  cemented  by  the  heart's  blood  of  God, 
never  more  to  be  put  asunder. 

The  Master's  Last  Words. 


And  John  closes  the  book  with  a  few  personal 
paragraphs.  The  vision  is  complete.  Now  come 
the  closing  words.  For  the  third  time  John  is 
solemnly  assured,  "  these  words  are  faithful  and 
true."  And  again  comes  the  voice  as  of  some 
One  always  standing  by  as  John  is  being  shown, 
**  Behold,  I  come  quickly."  And  again  the  words 
with  which  the  book  begins  come  to  seal  all  its 
impressions, — blessed  is  he  that  reads,  and  pray- 
erfully seeks  to  understand  the  simple  message, 
and  who  sets  himself  to  live  his  life  in  the  light 
of  this  simple  tremendous  message. 

And  John  is  significantly  told  not  to  seal  up  the 
message.  Daniel  had  been  told  to  seal  up  the 
message  given  him,  for  it  would  not  come  to  pass 
until  the  latter  days  after  great  intervening 
events  had  taken  place.^  But  there  are  no  inter- 
vening events  before  this  message  is  to  come  true. 
It  has  been  possible  for  the  fulfilment  to  come  in 
any  generation  since  John  saw  and  wrote.  It  is 
yet  more  possible,  growing  distinctly  toward  the 

*  Daniel  xii.  4,  9. 


232        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

probable,  that  these  things  shall  come  in  our 
generation.  The  words  remain  open,  waiting 
an  expectant  fulfilment.  They  are  not  to  be 
sealed  up  but  openly  proclaimed,  for  the  time 
when  it  is  possible  for  these  things  to  work  out 
is  at  hand.    This  is  a  present  practical  issue. 

And  meanwhile,  during  these  days  of  the  wait- 
ing time  each  one  who  reads  or  listens,  however 
reluctantly,  to  the  message,  will  follow  the  bent 
of  his  own  deliberate  choice,  but  with  ever  in- 
creasing intensity.  The  pure  will  become  more 
pure;  the  bad  yet  worse.  There's  no  standing 
still  as  we  listen. 

And  again  come  the  solemnly  repeated  words  : 
"  Behold,  I  come  quickly."  His  coming  is  the 
next  step  in  the  great  plan.  There  were  then, 
and  there  are  now,  no  great  intervening  events 
to  be  worked  out,  and  waited  for.  His  com- 
ing is  imminent.  It  is  a  thing  to  be  expected. 
And  He  brings  with  Him  the  wages  due  each 
one. 

And  like  the  signature  of  certification  at  the 
book's  beginning,^  comes  now  the  personal  signa- 
ture at  its  close :  "  I  am  the  Alpha  and  the 
Omega,  the  first  and  the  last,  the  beginning  and 
the  end."  So  He  personally  certifies  to  us  the 
absolute  accuracy  and  reliability  of  this  mes- 
sage. 

And  with  the  signature  come  again  the 
gracious  pleading  and  warning  intermingled. 
Any  one  who  will  may  wash  his  robes  in  the 
fountain  provided,  and  may  eat  of  the  life-giving 

*  Revelation  i.  8. 


The  Crowned  Christ  Reigning     233 

tree,  and  come  unto  the  God-lit  city.  And 
equally  clear  it  is  that  any  who  insist  on  doing 
so  may  remain  outside  unwashed.  Each  one  is 
free  to  do  as  he  wills. 

And  once  again  comes  the  emphatic,  solemn 
announcement  of  the  accuracy  and  dependability 
of  this  message  of  John's  Revelation :  ''  /,  Jesus, 
have  sent  mine  angel  to  testify  unto  you  these 
things  for  the  Churches."  It  is  distinctively  a 
Church  message,  and  comes  with  all  the  direct 
authority  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Himself.  And  He 
patiently  reminds  us  of  His  authority, — I  am 
both  root  and  offspring  of  David,  both  before 
him  and  after  him.  I  am  the  bright,  the  morn- 
ing star,  that  rises  while  it  is  yet  night  and  brings 
in  the  new  day. 

And  again  the  spirit  of  winsome  pleading 
breaks  out  to  those  unwashed  ones  who  insist  on 
staying  outside  the  gate.  Both  the  Spirit  and 
the  whole  company  of  washed  ones  say  "  come." 
And  let  him  that  heareth  that  sweet  word  pass 
it  out  to  those  farther  away  until  the  last  man 
hears  and  feels.  And  let  them  know  that  any- 
body at  all  who  is  thirsty  may  come  freely  and 
drink  of  the  river  of  the  water  of  life. 

And  yet  once  again  comes  the  peculiar  certify- 
ing of  the  contents  of  this  Revelation  message, 
and  a  solemn  warning  against  any  interfering 
with  its  meaning.  Jesus  says, — I  hereby  certify 
unto  every  man  that  hears  the  words  of  the 
prophecy  of  this  book:  if  any  man  add  to  them, 
making  them  mean  something  else  than  I  in- 
tend, God  shall  add  unto  him  the  plagues  that 


234        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

are  written  in  this  book:  and  if  any  man  shall 
take  away,  or  lessen  the  meaning,  God  shall 
take  away  his  part  from  the  tree  of  life  and  out 
of  the  holy  city.  It  comes  as  a  very  solemn 
warning. 

And  yet  once  more  comes  the  emphatic  as- 
surance both  of  the  reliability  of  the  book  itself, 
and  of  the  certainty  of  its  great  central  message, 
— "  He  who  testifieth  these  things  saith,  '  yea,  I 
come  quickly.' " 

And  John  fervently  adds,  "  Amen ;  come,  Lord 
Jesus."  And  so  says  every  heart  in  tune  with 
His  heart  who  is  coming. 


VIII.— WATCHING  THE 
HORIZON 


"  Thy  Kingdom  Come.' 


Thou  art  coming!    We  are  waiting 

With  a  hope  that  cannot  fail; 
Asking  not  the  day  or  hour, 
Resting  on  Thy  word  of  power, 

Anchored  safe  within  the  veil. 
Time  appointed  may  be  long, 

But  the  vision  must  be  sure: 
Certainty  shall  make  us  strong, 

Joyful  patience  must  endure. 

O  the  joy  to  see  Thee  reigning, 

Thee,  my  own  beloved  Lord ! 
Every  tongue  Thy  name  confessing, 
Worship,  honour,  glory,  blessing, 

Brought  to  Thee  with  glad  accord ! 
Thee,  my  Master  and  my  Friend, 

Vindicated  and  enthroned! 
Unto  earth's  remotest  end 

Glorified,  adored,  and  owned." 

—Frances  Ridley  Havergal. 


WATCHING  THE  HORIZON 

The  Thrill  of  Expectancy. 

Watching  reveals  character  and  makes  it.  It 
means  wakefulness,  an  ideal,  a  purpose,  and  a 
hopeful  expectancy.  Some  people  only  look. 
Their  eyelids  are  not  shut.  Something  passes 
before  the  eye.    They  look,  but  they  rarely  see. 

It  takes  a  soul  to  see.  It  needs  a  spirit  awake 
to  see  out  through  the  eye,  and  see  into  persons 
and  events  passing  by,  and  see  forward  to  what 
is  coming  to-morrow.  Some  sleep.  The  body 
is  awake  in  daytime.  They  walk  and  talk  and 
eat,  buy  and  sell,  count  money  and  hoard  it. 
But  their  eyes  are  never  lifted  to  the  outer 
horizon.  They  are  settled  in  an  even,  contented 
round.     Their  spirits  sleep. 

A  wakefulness  of  spirit  to  the  time  and  its 
need,  an  ideal  clear  and  high  of  what  should  be, 
a  purpose  strong  and  masterful  that  holds  the 
life  up  toward  the  ideal,  an  expectancy  eager, 
brave,  steady ;  an  eye  fixed  intently  on  some  One 
unseen, — this  is  what  watching  means.  It  re- 
veals character.  It  makes  character.  It  reaches 
out  strong  spirit  hands,  and  brings  nearer  and 
sooner  the  thing  watched  for. 

Watching  has  always  been  a  characteristic  of 
the  men  God  has  used.  He  used  them  because 
237 


238         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

He  could.  They  were  of  use.  Their  spirit  made 
them  serviceable.  Their  watching  opened  the 
way  for  fellowship  ot  spirit  and  partnership  in 
action.  It  put  them  in  tune  with  Him  who  never 
slumbers  nor  sleeps,  and  who  watches  over  His 
pledged  word,  to  bring  it  to  pass  at  the  earliest 
possible  hour. 

The  watcher  sings.  His  favourite  song  is  *'  I 
will  lift  up  mine  eyes."  He  sees  what  is  coming. 
He  sees  Him  who  sits  beyond  the  horizon  of  our 
common  outlook.  And  seeing  Him  grows  this 
sort  of  expectancy,  and  the  expectancy  becomes 
the  controlling  thing. 

It  was  this  sort  of  expectancy  that  made  Abra- 
ham a  pilgrim  at  seventy-five,  and  that  grew 
deep  the  pilgrim  trait  of  patient  endurance 
through  the  weary  twilight  years  till  the  promised 
heir  came,  and  even  beyond  that,  wove  the  finest 
texture  into  his  character  when  the  severest  test 
came. 

It  was  this  expectancy  that  drew  Moses  away 
from  the  court  life  of  Egypt,  and  the  possible 
prospect  of  wearing  imperial  purple,  to  become 
the  leader  of  a  straggling  crowd  of  slaves.  And 
it  held  him  steady  on  through  long  years,  wilder- 
ness travel,  criticism,  and  non-appreciation,  on 
and  on,  till  Nebo's  top  was  climbed.  He  en- 
dured as  seeing  Him  who  was  invisible  to  the 
unseeing  eyes  of  the  crowds  at  His  side. 

Such  expectancy  has  steadied  every  leader  for 
God,  in  these  old  pages  from  first  to  last,  young 
Joseph  in  the  dungeon,  Joshua  in  the  glare  of  the 
limelight,   into   which   he   was   suddenly   thrust, 


Watching  the  Horizon  239 

and  ruddy-faced  singing  David  fleeing  and  hid- 
ing for  his  life  from  the  javelin  of  Saul.  It  was 
the  clear-seeing  eye  of  Isaiah  and  Jeremiah  in 
the  homeland,  and  of  Ezekiel  and  Daniel  among 
the  weeping  exiles,  that  kept  the  heart  of  the 
nation  warm  with  the  vision  of  what  was  surely 
coming.  The  thrill  of  expectancy  runs  through 
the  pages  of  this  old  Hebrew  classic.  Its  light  is 
never  out  of  the  eye,  nor  its  alluring  out  of  ear- 
shot. 

When  Jesus  walked  among  men  expectation 
ran  high.  When  He  was  killed  the  gloom  of  the 
three  days  was  the  gloom  of  a  bright  light  sud- 
denly put  out.  The  darkness  was  intensified 
by  the  light  that  had  been  shining.  Then  there 
came  a  new  sort  of  expectancy,  higher,  finer,  of 
the  inner  spirit.  This  Jesus  was  coming  back, 
in  all  the  glory  of  the  old  prophetic  vision,  made 
realer  by  the  personal  touch  these  men  knew, 
and  this  new  expectancy  puts  all  the  paper  of  the 
New  Testament  a-tremble  with  delight.  It  is 
the  light  that  lighteth  every  page  and  epistle, 
every  contested  path  of  witness,  and  every  hour 
of  suffering  because  of  faith. 

The  Church  of  these  New  Testament  pages  is 
a  watching  Church.  The  expectancy  of  the 
Lord  Jesus'  return  is  the  north  star  of  their  sky. 
It  never  swerves.  All  the  rest  revolves  around 
it.  They  see  everything  else  in  relation  to  this. 
Their  going  into  all  the  world  and  preaching  to 
every  creature  was  not  simply  for  men's  conver- 
sion: that  surely:  but  beyond  that,  it  was  to 
bring  the  Christ  back  for  the  next  step  in  His 


240        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

world  programme.  He  would  come  and  set  up 
His  kingdom,  and  then  through  the  kingdom 
would  come  a  yet  wider,  farther-reaching  world 
evangelizing.^  This  expectancy  controlled  their 
life  and  activity.  Through  their  faithful  world 
witnessing  He  would  come. 

And  as  the  knot  is  put  on  the  end  of  the 
thread  of  revelation  the  very  knotted  thread 
seems  aglow  with  the  glory  of  what  is  coming. 
The  Bible  from  end  to  end  is  a-thrill  with  ex- 
pectancy, a  hopeful  watching  for  something,  aye, 
for  some  One. 

A  Calendar  of  Events. 

We  have  been  looking  a  bit  closely  at  this 
knot  in  the  end,  the  threads  composing  it.  Now 
we  want  to  gather  up  all  that  we  have  been  go- 
ing over  with  the  light  that  comes  from  the  other 
pages,  so  as  to  have  some  sort  of  a  simple,  clear 
grasp  of  the  truth.  This  will  help  our  eyesight. 
We  can  watch  the  horizon  better.  Our  eyes 
will  be  steadier  in  the  glare  of  the  lower  lights, 
and  sharper  to  see  in  the  Spells  of  darkness  that 
get  thicker  now  and  then. 

It  is  interesting  to  notice  that  this  book  of  the 
Revelation  is  a  calendar  book.  That  is  to  say, 
it  is  not  a  calendar  of  dates  but  of  events.  It 
gives  coming  events  in  the  order  in  which  they 
will  occur.  Its  table  of  contents  becomes  an 
outline  of  coming  events.  There  is  the  Man 
of  Fire  standing  among  the  candlesticks.     Then 

^  Acts  iii.  20-21 ;  XV.  14-18. 


Watching  the  Horizon  241 

comes  an  hour  when  He  advances  to  the  next 
step  in  His  programme.  Then,  step  by  step, 
there  follow  the  occurrences  until  the  kingdom  is 
actually  here.  And  then  the  after  events,  when 
the  kingdom's  work  is  done. 

It  turns  out  that  this  thing  of  our  Lord's  re- 
turn cuts  a  wider  swath  than  we  are  apt  to 
think,  if  we  don't  stop  to  think.  That  is  because 
of  Who  it  is  that  is  coming.  An  event  takes 
on  the  size  of  the  chief  person  concerned.  This 
Lord  Jesus  is  the  One  through  whom  our 
world  was  made  in  the  early  time,  when  there 
were  no  calendars.  So  His  coming  naturally 
concerns  the  whole  world.  It  concerns  the  sys- 
tem of  evil  in  which  the  world  is  entangled,  and 
the  evil  spirit  world  so  closely  interlocked  with 
our  own. 

Then  our  Lord  Jesus  came  amongst  us  as  a 
man.  He  came  as  a  Jewish  man,  and  to  the 
Jewish  nation.  So  His  coming  concerns  the 
Jew  and  the  Jewish  capital,  Jerusalem.  When 
He  sent  down  His  executive,  the  Holy  Spirit,  a 
new  organization  was  formed,  the  Church.  So 
His  coming  concerns  the  Church,  and  concerns 
it  very  intimately,  for  it  is  spoken  of  as  a  body 
of  which  He  is  the  head.  When  Jesus  came  it 
was  to  die  for  a  world  and  to  redeem  a  world. 
And  so  His  coming  concerns  the  future  plans  of 
the  earth  and  the  race. 

Yet  though  His  coming  has  such  a  broad 
sweep,  it  is  quite  possible  to  get  a  grasp  of  the 
few  essential  items  in  the  programme.  And  this 
will  make  our  footing  steadier,  our  vision  clearer, 


242         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

our  praying  more  confident,  and  our  soul-win- 
ning and  witnessing  warmer  and  truer.  We  turn 
now  to  try  to  get  this  simple,  helpful  understand- 
ing. 

The  present  is  the  time  of  the  candlesticks. 
The  Man  of  Fire  is  in  our  midst  unperceived. 
The  unseen  Eyes  of  Flame  see.  Our  Lord  Jesus 
still  waits,  and  depends  on  the  faithfulness  of 
His  Church.  The  light  is  still  shining  out.  The 
dark  places  are  getting  some  light.  The  light 
has  not  yet  wholly  failed  to  get  out  through  the 
human  lantern  to  the  crowd  in  the  dark. 

The  characteristics  of  this  waiting  time,  so 
long  prolonged,  are  plainly  put.  In  the  outer 
world  there  will  be  an  increasing  lawlessness 
and  disregard  of  every  sort  of  restraint,  and  an 
increasing  power  of  organization  and  centraliza- 
tion. There  will  be  an  increasing  getting  to- 
gether for  more  effective  action. 

In  the  Church  world  there  will  be  an  in- 
creasing formalism,  a  compromise  with  evil  and 
with  the  world  spirit.  There  will  be  a  decrease 
of  warm  personal  devotion  to  the  Lord  Jesus 
as  the  controlling  motive  power.  And  there  will 
be  a  growing  inclination  to  make  light  of,  or 
ignore,  or  jeer  at,  the  idea  of  the  Lord  Jesus' 
return. 

As  this  period  wears  on  toward  its  close,  and 
so  on  toward  the  events  to  follow,  there  will  be 
a  coming  together  of  the  Jews  scattered  through- 
out the  world  in  an  attempt  to  regain  Palestine 
and  reconstitute  the  Hebrew  nation  there  with 
its    temple    and    old    sacrificial    ritual.      These 


Watching  the  Horizon  243 

are  the  three  chief  tendencies  that  will  char- 
acterize the  present  waiting  time  preceding  the 
group  of  coming  events. 

The  decisive  index-finger,  that  this  present 
period  is  actually  coming  to  its  close,  will  be  this 
movement  among  the  Jews.  The  movement  to 
regain  control  of  Palestine  may  rise  and  fall 
back,  gain  and  lose  again.  But  some  day  it  will 
come  to  its  head.  By  some  arrangement  with 
the  nations  concerned  the  Jewish  nation  will 
actually  be  set  up  again  in  Palestine,  and  the 
building  of  the  temple  in  Jerusalem  begun.  This 
will  be  the  decisive  indication.  This  is  an  un- 
failing index-finger.  The  hands  of  the  clock 
are  moving  then  toward  the  striking  of  the  hour. 
Soon  the  sands  will  be  run  out  and  the  hour- 
glass turned. 

The  Beginning  of  the  End. 

At  some  time  soon  after  that  point  is  reached 
two  unseen  events  will  occur,  that  is,  unseen  on 
earth.  Roughly,  it  will  be  three  and  a  half  years 
after,  though  the  whole  tendency  of  the  Scrip- 
ture is  to  discourage  the  figuring  of  exact  time. 
Yet  information  is  given  that  the  outlook  may  be 
intelligent.  These  events  are  unseen  on  the 
earth.     They  take  place  in  heaven. 

The  Holy  Spirit  will  be  withdrawn  from  the 
Church.  He  will  not  be  withdrawn  from  indi- 
viduals. He  abode  in  men  before  the  Church 
was  formed,  and  will  after  the  Church  has  cast 
Him  out.  He  is  withdrawn  only  because  He  has 
been  practically  and  wholly  cast  out 


244        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

The  Lord  Jesus,  who  sent  Him  down  to  form 
the  Church  and  witness  through  it,  will  with- 
draw Him  from  the  Church.  The  candlestick 
has  moved  out  of  all  touch  with  the  light.  And 
now  the  light  is  withdrawn,  and  so  the  candle- 
stick moved  out  of  its  place  as  the  light-bearer. 
This  is  probably  the  advance  step  taken  by  our 
L>ord  Jesus  that  marks  the  beginning  of  the  end. 

At  the  same  time  there  occurs  a  conflict  of 
spirit  forces  up  in  the  heavens.  While  the  earth 
seems  to  be  Satan's  chief  place  of  activity,  yet  his 
headquarters  are  up  in  the  heavens,  that  is, 
somewhere  below  the  throne  of  God  and  above 
the  earth.  This  conflict  is  against  him  and  his 
spirit  forces.  It  is  led  by  Michael,  the  arch- 
angel. It  results  in  Satan  and  his  host  being  cast 
out  of  the  heavens  and  down  to  the  earth. 

It  is  significant  that  as  the  Holy  Spirit  goes 
up,  this  conflict  follows,  and  Satan  is  cast  out 
and  down.  Is  it  the  Holy  Spirit's  return  there 
that  precipitates  this  conflict,  and  defeat  for 
Satan?  It  would  seem  not  improbable.  So  the 
moral  situation  on  the  earth  is  intensified  doubly. 
The  blessed  Holy  Spirit,  with  all  His  power  of 
restraint  over  evil,  is  withdrawn.  The  evil  spirit, 
with  all  his  power  of  intensifying  evil,  is  cast 
down  in  person  to  the  earth.  These  are  the  two 
unseen  events  marking  the  advance  move  of  the 
end  time. 

There  will  be  nothing  on  earth  at  the  moment 
to  indicate  that  these  tremendous  events  have 
happened.  There  is  no  suggestion  of  how  much 
time  is  involved.     Time  is  a  matter  of  earth's 


Watching  the  Horizon  245 

calculation.  Quite  possibly  we  would  speak  of 
these  events  as  occurring  in  a  very  brief  time, 
perhaps  an  instant  of  our  reckoning.  These  are 
the  two  events  unseen  on  the  earth. 

At  the  same  time  there  will  begin  two  events 
seen  taking  place  on  earth.  The  first  is  the  com- 
ing to  the  front  of  a  man,  a  terrible  leader  of 
the  forces  of  unrighteousness.  Paul  speaks  of 
him  as  *'  the  Lawless  One."  John's  name  for 
him  is  "the  Antichrist."  He  becomes  the  human 
representative  or  incarnation  of  Satan.  As 
Satan  is  cast  down  out  of  the  heavens  this 
leader  comes  to  the  front  on  earth. 

He  seems  to  have  official  position  at  the  head 
of  some  great  coalition  of  nations,  with  a  wide 
area  of  authority.  He  seems  to  be  some  former 
notable  leader  known  in  history,  who  died,  but 
is  now  brought  back  to  life  again  by  Satan's 
supernatural  power. 

As  he  forges  to  the  front  there  follows  on 
earth  a  horrible  time  of  war,  famine,  pestilence, 
death,  and  persecution.  He  arbitrarily  breaks 
the  agreement  with  the  Jews  under  which  they 
have  re-established  their  nation,  and  begins  a 
terrible  persecution  of  them.  He  sets  up  in  the 
temple  a  blasphemous  image,  and  requires  that 
all  people  shall  worship  it.  This  strikes  not 
only  at  the  Jew,  but  at  the  Christian  as  well. 

At  one  stroke  of  genius  he  compels  absolutely 
universal  attention  to  his  command  by  forbidding 
the  doing  of  any  business  except  by  those  willing 
to  worship  the  image.  Those  refusing  the  wor- 
ship are  killed.    He  will  have  an  assistant  doing 


246         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

wonderful  miracles  by  Santanic  power  to  deceive 
and  persuade  the  people.  During  this  time  there 
is  a  loosing  out  on  the  earth  of  countless  hordes 
of  unseen  demons  to  torment  men. 

All  this  continues  for  three  and  a  half  years. 
The  time  is  stated  in  three  different  ways  to 
make  quite  clear  just  how  long  is  meant.  This 
is  the  first  of  the  two  seen  events.  It  centres 
at  Jerusalem  and  seems  to  reach  out  practically 
to  all  the  earth. 

The  second  event  is  significant.  During  all 
this  terrible  time  of  persecution  and  blasphemy 
and  the  riot  of  evil,  there  will  be  two  men  in 
Jerusalem  preaching  the  Gospel  of  the  Lord 
Jesus,  and  calling  on  men  to  repent.  As  an 
emphasis  of  their  witness  against  the  awful 
wickedness  current  they  will  be  clothed  in 
mourning.  They  will  have  miraculous  power  to 
attest  their  witness,  and  to  protect  themselves 
against  attacks  upon  their  lives.  The  great 
crowds  of  many  nationalities  in  Jerusalem  will 
make  their  witness  practically  world-wide  in  its 
direct  as  well  as  its  indirect  influence. 

This  also  continues  for  three  and  a  half  years. 
As  the  Holy  Spirit  is  withdrawn  from  the 
Church  as  the  witness  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  these 
two  special  witnesses  appear.  In  His  great 
faithfulness  and  patience  God  never  leaves  Him- 
self without  a  witness.  This  is  the  second  event 
seen  on  earth.  These  two,  evil  at  its  worst,  and 
God's  special  witnesses,  run  along  side  by  side, 
both  centring  in  Jerusalem. 


Watching  the  Horizon  247 

The  Climax — He  Comes. 

Then  there  comes  a  group  of  four  events. 
And  these  four  are  very  closely  associated  to- 
gether in  point  of  time.  They  occur  at  the  close 
of  the  period  of  persecution  and  wickedness.  In- 
deed, it  is  their  occurrence  that  brings  the  close. 
Yet  the  exact  time  when  they  happen  is  left 
quite  uncertain. 

And  this  clearly  is  another  bit  of  the  tendency 
in  the  record  to  keep  our  thought  on  the  main 
events,  and  not  on  figuring  out  time.  We  are 
to  keep  to  the  essentials  and  be  wary  of  mere 
speculation.  For  the  sake  of  clearness  I  am  put- 
ting these  four  events  separately,  but  this  does 
not  mean  that  some  of  them  may  not  be  occur- 
ring at  the  same  moment,  or  that  all  may  not 
come  within  a  very  brief  time.  We  simply  do 
not  know.  It  looks  as  though  we  are  not  meant 
to  know. 

There  is  a  Jew  event.  The  Holy  Spirit  comes 
down  upon  the  nation  of  Jews  in  simple,  tremen- 
dous, converting  power.  This  is  put  in  connec- 
tion with  the  coming  down  out  of  the  heavens 
on  a  cloud  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  It  seems  to  be 
this  sight  of  their  great  Kinsman,  Jesus,  whom 
they  crucified,  that  is  used  by  the  Holy  Spirit 
to  strike  penitence  to  their  stubborn  hearts.  Lit- 
erally a  nation  is  born  again  in  a  day.  It  will 
be  with  the  whole  nation  as  it  was  with  Saul 
on  the  Damascus  road,  as  sudden  and  unex- 
pected, as  startling  and  as  radical ;  as  sudden  and 
unexpected  an  appearance  of  Jesus,  as  startling 


248         About  the  Crowned  Christ 

to  the  Jews,  as  radical  in  the  absolute  spirit 
transformation. 

There  is  a  Church  event.  And  here  the  word 
Church  is  used  to  describe  all  believers  in  the 
Lord  Jesus.  That  will  be  a  much  sifted  and 
chastened  company  of  people.  This  event  is 
also  connected  with  the  open,  visible  coming  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  out  of  the  upper  blue,  before  all 
eyes.  It  affects  two  separate  companies  of  be- 
lievers. The  bodies  of  all  believers  who  have 
died  will  be  raised  out  of  their  graves,  in- 
habited again  by  those  who  lived  in  them.  Then 
the  living  believers  shall  have  a  transforming 
touch  upon  their  bodies.  And  the  two  companies 
shall  be  caught  up  into  the  air  into  the  pres- 
ence of  the  Lord  Jesus. 

As  they  come  into  His  presence  there  will 
be  a  purifying  and  perfecting  of  character,  and 
an  adjustment  of  relations  with  Him.  There 
is  no  suggestion  of  how  much  time  is  involved. 
We  naturally  think  of  things  as  taking  place 
through  so  much  time.  Our  limitations  in  this 
regard  will  be  gone  then.  It  may  be  what  we 
now  call  instantaneous. 

There  is  a  world  event.  There  will  come  to 
the  earth  and  to  men  a  visitation  of  terrible  judg- 
ments, affecting  men's  bodies,  the  sea  and  rivers, 
vegetation,  an  intensifying  of  the  sun's  heat,  and 
possibly  a  terrible  darkness — in  short,  affecting 
everything  concerning  man  and  life  on  the  earth. 
There  will  be  a  great  gathering  of  the  armies  of 
the  nations  at  a  place  in  Palestine.  Again  there 
is  no  suggestion  of  how  much  time  this  visita- 


Watching  the  Horizon  249 

lion  of  judgments  runs  through,  nor  this  gather- 
ing for  battle. 

Then  there  is  the  event,  the  great  climax  event, 
the  actual  coming  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  out  of  the 
heavens,  down  to  the  earth.  At  the  moment 
when  He  comes  the  Jews  will  be  in  the  midst 
of  a  terrible  siege  in  Jerusalem.  Against  the 
city  will  be  assembled  the  armies  of  the  nations. 
The  city  will  be  taken,  the  looting  and  ravaging 
already  begun. 

Then  suddenly,  out  of  the  blue  above,  the 
Lord  Jesus  comes  in  a  great  blaze  of  blinding 
light,  accompanied  by  great  numbers.  He  will 
come  to  Olivet.  With  the  coming  will  be  a  ter- 
rible earthquake,  such  as  the  earth  has  never 
known. 

It  is  a  striking  geological  fact  that  the  greatest 
"  fault,"  or  break  in  the  earth's  surface,  is 
found  in  Palestine,  running  north  and  south  from 
Antioch  on  the  Orontes  down  even  into  Africa. 
But  this  earthquake  will  affect  very  wide  areas, 
including  the  city  of  Babylon,  which  will  be 
shaken  to  utter  destruction.  That  earthquake 
will  make  radical  changes  in  the  formation  of 
the  earth's  surface  in  Palestine. 

At  the  same  time  there  will  be  an  equally  ter- 
rific shake-up  in  the  heavenly  bodies,  the  sun, 
moon,  and  stars.  The  effect  of  both  these  upon 
the  vast  panic-stricken  multitudes  will  be  most 
pitiable.  They  will  call  upon  the  upheaved  rocks 
to  hide  them  from  the  wrath  of  God. 

These  are  the  four  events  occurring  at  this 
time.    They  are  grouped  together.    It  seems  im- 


250        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

possible  to  say  first  this,  then  that.  They  are 
grouped.  The  great  essential  thing  standing  out 
is  that  our  Lord  Jesus'  coming  will  be  at  a  ter- 
rible climax  of  evil.  There  will  be  partial  judg- 
ment visited  on  the  earth.  The  system  of  evil 
will  be  wholly  overthrown.  The  Jews  will  be 
converted  as  a  nation  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  The 
Church  will  be  caught  away  out  of  the  distress, 
and  will  have  part  with  our  Lord  Jesus  in  His 
coming. 

It  should  again  be  noticed  that  in  all  this  there 
are  no  time  notes,  except  as  to  the  length  of  this 
tribulation  time.  The  persecution  of  the  Jew 
and  desecration  of  Jerusalem,  the  time  of  the 
two  witnesses,  and  the  sway  of  the  Antichrist, 
each  runs  through  three  and  a  half  years.  There 
are  no  time  notes  whatever  for  the  present 
waiting-time.  And  though  the  length  of  the 
tribulation  itself  is  stated,  yet  it  should  be  noted 
that  the  exact  time  of  the  Lord  Jesus'  actual 
return  still  remains  quite  undetermined. 

In  Daniel's  prophecy  there  are  four  events 
spoken  of  as  occurring  at  this  time,  and  each 
is  measured  from  the  time  when  the  sacrifices 
are  stopped  and  the  chief  desecrating  act  in  the 
temple  begins.  The  tribulation  runs  for  three 
and  a  half  years.  Thirty  days  later  comes  some 
glad  event  not  specified  further.  Seventy-five 
days  later  there  comes  another  glad  event,  and 
two  years  ten  months  and  twenty  days  later  the 
complete  cleansing  of  the  temple.  Each  of  these 
portions  of  time  is  measured  from  the  same 
starting  point.    This  would  suggest  a  period  of 


Watching  the  Horizon  251 

readjustment  after  the  Antichrist  is  slain,  run- 
ning through  almost  three  years.  All  these 
time  notes  are  of  a  year  of  three  hundred  and 
sixty  days,  not  our  common  calendar  year  of 
three  hundred  and  sixty-five  and  a  fraction 
days. 

There  comes  the  period  called  the  kingdom. 
Its  capital  is  Jerusalem.  The  regenerated  nation 
of  Israel  becomes  the  first  nation  of  the  earth, 
with  all  other  nations  tributary.  Israel's  leader- 
ship is  a  blessed  one  in  its  spiritual  influence  over 
all  others.  The  Jews  are  a  missionary  nation, 
whose  one  passion  is  to  make  the  knowledge  of 
God  known  throughout  the  earth. 

The  redeemed  ones  of  all  the  earth  through 
all  times  will  reign  over  the  earth  in  fellowship 
with  the  King,  the  Lord  Jesus.  In  their  resur- 
rection bodies,  with  all  present  bodily  restric- 
tions and  limitations  gone,  they  will  have  a 
blessed  share  in  the  new  earth  ministry. 

The  purpose  of  the  kingdom  is  world-wide 
evangelization,  but  with  all  the  conditions  radi- 
cally changed.  Satan,  with  all  evil  spirits,  is 
removed  from  the  scene  of  action.  The  nation 
of  Jews,  baptized  by  the  Holy  Spirit,  is  the 
missionary  force,  under  the  direction  and  help 
of  the  Church.  The  Holy  Spirit  will  have  been 
poured  out  upon  all  flesh,  making  all  peculiarly 
open  to  the  truth. 

What  a  wonderful  time  of  continual  revival  it 
will  be !  But  that  much  abused  word  ''  revival  " 
will  have  its  sweet,  original  meaning  restored. 
It  will  mean  a  re-living,  a  new  life  of  the  Spirit 


252        Aboiit  the  Crowned  Christ 

coming,   that   will   naturally   include   the  body, 
too. 


Intelligent  Watching. 

Such  are  the  events,  near  and  far,  which  some 
day  will  come  up  over  the  horizon  of  our  com- 
mon life,  ushering  in  a  new  day.  And  we  are 
bidden  by  our  Lord  Jesus  to  watch.  We  watch 
for  Him,  and  for  anything  that  tells  us  His  com- 
ing is  nearing. 

Watching  means  wakefulness,  an  ideal,  a  pur- 
pose, an  expectancy,  and  a  daily  life  under  the 
control  of  wakefulness,  ideal,  purpose,  and  ex- 
pectancy. That  our  Lord  Jesus  will  actually 
come  to  this  old  earth  and  reign,  this  is  the  ideal. 
That  we  shall,  by  grace,  be  true  to  Him  in  every- 
thing, day  by  day,  during  this  waiting-time,  this 
is  the  purpose.  That  we  shall  indeed  see  Him 
come,  and  be  caught  up  into  His  presence  with- 
out death,  this  is  the  expectancy. 

That  this  shall  all  be  a  real  thing  to  us,  con- 
trolling all  our  relationships,  our  gold,  and  our 
life,  and  that  we  shall  reverently,  thoughtfully 
seek  to  understand  what  He  has  told  us  about  it, 
this  is  the  wakefulness.  This  is  what  watching 
means.  Our  bodies  may  be  asleep,  our  brains 
and  hands  absorbed  in  the  day's  task,  but  our 
hearts  can  be  awake  for  the  sound  ahead  of 
the  coming  of  His  feet. 

"  But  how  can  you  watch  for  Him.  if  there  are 
intervening  events  ? "  So  the  question  came 
to  me  this  summer  by  a  thoughtful,  godly  min- 


Watching  the  Horizon  253 

ister  who  looks  for  His  coming.  And  I  said: 
"  Because  His  coming  is  one  of  a  little  group  of 
events  which  cluster  about  His  coming." 

The  crowd  stands  watching  at  the  railway- 
station  in  England  to  see  the  king's  train  come 
in.  Yet  they  know  that  before  it  comes  the  pilot- 
engine  will  come,  running  ahead  about  so  many 
minutes  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  way.  The 
coming  of  the  pilot-engine  heightens  the  in- 
tensity of  watching,  for  now  soon  the  king  will 
come. 

The  watcher  in  the  sick-chamber,  weary  with 
the  long  night's  anxious  vigil,  goes  to  the  east 
window  to  see  if  day  is  coming.  There  comes 
a  bare  lighting-up  in  the  east,  just  a  slight  les- 
sening of  the  darkness  that  is  everywhere.  But 
even  this  much  brings  a  sigh  of  relief.  The  sun 
itself  may  not  be  seen  for  two  hours  or  more. 
But  you  know  without  looking  at  the  clock  that 
the  sun  is  coming  and  is  near.  Its  presence  near 
sends  the  light  far  ahead. 

When  the  trees  begin  to  send  out  swelling 
bud  and  tender  green  leaf  and  catkin,  we  know 
summer  is  coming,  even  though  the  chill  is  in 
the  air,  and  the  night  may  even  now  bring  a 
touch  of  the  white  of  frost.  "  Even  so  ye  also 
when  ye  see  these  things  know  that  He  is  nigh, 
even  at  the  doors."  ^ 

There's  something  intensely  practical  about 
this  thing  of  watching.  I  mean  the  intelligent 
watching  that  a  thoughtful  study  of  God's  Word 
promotes.    There  is  a  striking  sentence  used  in 

^  Matthew  xxiv.  33. 


254        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

describing  some  of  the  men  that  rallied  to  David 
during  the  clearing-up  storm  that  preceded  his 
reign.  It  is  said  of  certain  of  the  tribe  of 
Issachar  that  they  *' had  understanding  of  the 
times  to  know  what  Israel  ought  to  do  "  in  the 
matter  of  making  David  the  accepted  king  over 
the  realm.^  Their  thoughtful  study  and  judg- 
ment of  the  time  made  them  wise  leaders  of 
action. 

There  is  a  similar  significant  word  spoken  to 
Daniel  in  the  final  vision  in  which  these  end 
events  are  being  disclosed.  And  we  recall  that 
the  speaker  is  He  for  whose  coming  we  look. 
He  says,  "  They  that  are  wise  shall  under- 
stand." 2  Daniel  had  prayerfully  set  himself  to 
understand  God's  will  for  his  people.^  When  the 
wonderful  vision  was  given  him  in  answer  to  his 
patient  study  and  continued  prayer,  the  Man  of 
Fire  who  came  to  him  said,  "  Now  I  am  come 
to  make  thee  understand." 

It  is  wise,  by  thoughtful,  prayerful  study  of 
God's  Word,  to  try  to  understand  what  He  has 
told  us.  Not  to  do  so  is  not  wise.  And  more, 
it  will  become  increasingly  needful  that  others 
be  taught  as  these  events  draw  on.  Daniel 
is  told  in  this  same  connection  that  "  They  that 
are  wise  shall  instruct  many."  ^ 

The  opening  words  of  the  Revelation,  and  es- 
pecially the  closing  paragraphs,  emphasize  this 
same  thing.     The  revelation  is  given  that  we 

*  I  Chronicles  xii.  32.  '^  Daniel  xii.  10. 
'  Daniel  viii.  15-17;  ix.  1-2;  x.  1-3,  11-14, 

*  Daniel  xi.  33. 


Watching  the  Horizon  255 

may  read  and  understand  and  hold  our  lives 
true  to  this  vision.  This  thing  is  intensely 
practical.  Indeed,  it  is  the  practical  thing  for 
our  day.  We  can  understand  the  simple  essen- 
tials revealed  here.  Our  Lord  Jesus  earnestly 
desires  us  to  do  so.  Surely  we  will,  for  His 
sake. 

A  Spirit  Sensitiveness. 

The  thoughtful  watching  that  grows  out  of 
an  understanding  of  our  Lord's  plans  influences 
subtly  and  mightily  one's  whole  life.  It  deepens 
wondering  reverence  for  the  Lord  Jesus  Him- 
self, His  present  power  and  personal  glory  sit- 
ting up  yonder  in  the  indescribable  glory  of  the 
Father's  presence,  and  His  patience  and  strength 
in  this  waiting-time.  It  draws  out  a  depth  and 
tenderness  of  personal  love  for  Himself  and  of 
devotion  to  Him. 

There  comes  to  be  a  keenly  acute  conscience 
about  evil,  and  about  compromise  with  evil ;  and 
yet  with  it  a  sanity  of  judgment  on  particular 
questions  arising,  and  a  gentle  consideration  for 
others  who  see  otherwise,  or  think  they  do.  Evil 
grows  in  subtlety  and  in  aggressiveness  in  our 
day,  and  probably  will  yet  more.  It  seeks  es- 
pecially to  make  inroads  among  God's  professing 
people.  Yet  evil  is  evil.  Its  true  inwardness  is 
quickly  revealed  by  adding  a  "  d  "  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  word.  And  it  grows  increasingly 
repugnant  in  whatever  guise,  as  we  come  to  study 
more  its  inner  spirit  as  revealed  in  these  dis- 
closures of  the  end  times. 


256        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

Then,  too,  this  watching  affects  one's  judg- 
ment of,  and  attitude  toward,  Christian  service, 
and  toward  movements  in  the  Christian  world. 
The  getting-together  spirit  is  getting  more  and 
more  into  Church  circles.  The  fervent  heart  re- 
peats constantly  our  Lord's  prayer,  "  that  they 
may  all  be  one."  Yet  it  becomes  clear  that  there 
may  be  movements  toward  union  that  are  not 
of  the  Holy  Spirit's  initiation,  and  that  cannot 
have  his  approval. 

It  is  not  enough  to  do  good.  That  may  prove 
to  be  a  low  level  of  action.  The  thing  is  to  find 
out  what  God  has  planned,  and  fit  into  that,  with 
all  the  warmth  of  one's  being.  His  will  is  al- 
ways good,  and  better,  and  best.  The  good  thing 
may  not  be  the  thing  He  has  planned  and  wants 
done. 

It  becomes  increasingly  clear  that  our  Lord 
Jesus  is  a  great  general.  He  has  the  whole  cam- 
paign of  action  mapped  out,  and  every  detail 
of  it  thought  into  and  thought  out.  As  one  comes 
to  learn  more  of  His  plans,  and  Himself  as  a 
planner,  there  comes  to  be  a  passion  for  doing 
His  will.  One  moves  from  the  old  position  of 
working  for  God  up  to  the  position  of  so  fitting 
in  that  God  works  through  us. 

And  there  comes  to  be  a  consciousness  that  He 
is  doing  immensely  more  through  the  things  we 
do  than  we  are  conscious  of.  So  in  all  Church 
activity  there  comes  to  be  a  reaching  out  in  spirit 
to  discern  what  He  wants  done,  and  putting  all 
the  strength  into  that. 

Then,  too,  one's  thought  of  foreign  missionary 


Watching  the  Horizon  257 

service  undergoes  a  change.  The  actual  taking 
of  the  message  of  Christ  to  those  who  haven't 
heard  comes  to  have  first  place.  Educational 
work  and  medical  and  humanitarian,  and  the 
like,  in  missionary  service,  are  seen  to  be  wisely 
used  when  held  strictly  in  place  as  a  means  to 
a  direct  end.  And  their  value  is  judged  wholly 
by  their  being  a  means  of  bringing  those  whom 
they  touch  face  to  face  with  the  Christ  that 
died. 

It  seems  to  be  possible  to  spend  fifty  years 
and  more  establishing  mission  work  in  the  city 
centres  of  a  foreign-mission  country,  and  all 
good,  blessed  work ;  and  yet  have  the  great  mass 
of  that  country's  population  in  utter  ignorance 
of  the  Gospel  message  and  its  power. 

As  the  Holy  Spirit  is  allowed  control  increas- 
ingly, there  comes  to  be  a  better  understanding 
of  God's  purposes  and  of  His  plans,  an  earnest 
cooperation  in  the  Church  movement  for  mak- 
ing Christ  known  to  all  men  everywhere,  a  faith- 
fulness in  all  the  circle  of  one's  own  home 
Church,  and  a  warm  personal  winning  of  men 
to  know  the  Lord  Jesus  as  their  Saviour. 

So  it  is  seen  that  watching  for  our  Lord's  re- 
turn affects  one's  whole  life  in  an  intensely  prac- 
tical way.  It  deepens  faith  in  Him.  It  leads  to 
an  intelligent  detachment  in  social  and  commer- 
cial and  even  Church  circles,  while  making  an 
increase  of  thoughtful  regard  for  others.  It 
purifies  the  personal  life.  It  chastens  and  deep- 
ens and  gentles  the  personal  character. 

It  seems  very  striking  and  very  strange  that 


258        About  the  Crowned  Christ 

when  Jesus  was  bom  there  are  just  two  persons 
named,  outside  the  immediate  circle,  who  seemed 
to  have  the  spirit  instinct  that  recognized  who 
He  was.  There  was  a  man  living  in  Jerusalem 
whose  name  was  Simeon.  Who  was  he?  rich? 
poor?  cultured?  of  lowly  station?  No  one 
knows.  But  whoever  he  was,  he  had  cultivated 
close  walk  with  God.  That's  clear.  And  into  his 
inner  spirit  came  the  conviction  that  the  Christ 
promised  for  ages,  so  long  waited  for,  the  Christ 
was  now  coming,  and  he  would  see  Him. 

And  a  similar  story  is  told  of  the  woman  called 
Anna.  These  two  were  in  that  simple  touch  of 
heart  with  God  that  could  in  spirit  sense  the 
coming  of  the  Christ.  There  may  have  been 
others.  We  are  not  told.  But  the  emphasis 
remains  on  the  fact  that  few  seemed  to  discern 
the  working  out  of  God's  tremendous  plan. 

Will  it  be  so  again?  It  would  surely  seem 
that  intelligent  watching  would  make  one  sensi- 
tive in  spirit  to  coming  events.  Yet  there  would 
ever  be  a  mingling  of  deepest  reverence,  and  a 
thoughtful  caution  regarding  mere  speculation, 
while  the  fervent  prayer  that  Jesus  taught  is 
daily  repeated,  "  Thy  kingdom  come." 

And  John's  closing  Revelation  prayer  con- 
stantly breathes  out,  "  Even  so,  come,  Lord 
Jesus." 


PRINTED  IN  THE  UNTraD  STATES  OF  AMERKA 


Date  Due 

1^13^ 

i 

f) 

